Service Manual Imageclass Mf7400 SM

imageCLASS
MF7460/7470/7480
SERVICE
MANUAL
NOVEMBER 2007
REV. 0
COPYRIGHT ©2007 CANON INC. CANON imageCLASS MF7460 Series REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
i
Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value,
however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
ii
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction ...................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.1 Pickup/Delivery/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration........................................... 1- 1
1.1.2 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7480) ............................................... 1- 2
1.1.3 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7470) ............................................... 1- 3
1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.1 Names of Parts ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.1.1 External View (MF7460/7470/7480) .............................................................................................. 1- 4
1.2.2 Using the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ........................................................................................................ 1- 5
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................................... 1- 6
1.2.3 User Mode Items ...................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ............................................................................................................................ 1- 7
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings .................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.3.4 Report Settings ................................................................................................................................ 1- 8
1.2.3.5 System Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1- 9
1.2.3.6 Copy Settings ................................................................................................................................. 1- 10
1.2.3.7 Communication Settings ............................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.2.3.8 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings ................................................................................................................. 1- 12
1.2.3.10 Recommended setting of system management information ................................................. 1- 12
1.2.3.11 The Reference Information of the Department ID Management........................................... 1- 12
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User ...................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items................................................................................................................ 1- 13
1.2.4.2 Cleaning (Touch panel type)......................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.2.5 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light................................................................................................................ 1- 15
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations ......................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................. 1- 15
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner................................................................................................................................ 1- 16
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire................................................................................................................. 1- 16
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery.............................................. 1- 16
1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 18
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (MF7460/MF7470/MF7480).............................................................................. 1- 18
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ............................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 2- 1
Contents
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................ 2- 4

2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials .......................................................................... 2- 4
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................ 2- 4
2.2.3 Setting the Cassettes .............................................................................................................................. 2- 6
2.2.4 Attaching the Ferrite Core ...................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.2.5 Checking the Image Quality ................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.2.6 Setting the Date and Time...................................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.2.7 Attaching Other Parts.............................................................................................................................. 2- 8
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection........................................................................................................ 2- 9
2.4 Connection to Telephone Line...................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.4.1 Connecting to the Telephone Line ........................................................................................................ 2- 9
2.4.2 Basic Settings........................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.4.3 Communication Test ............................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.5 Flow of Accessory Installation .................................................................................................................... 2- 10
2.5.1 Flow of Accessary Installation ............................................................................................................. 2- 10
Chapter 3 Main Controller

3.1 Overview/Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms .............................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry .................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB ............................................................................................................................ 3- 1
3.3 Image Processing ........................................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow .................................................................................................................. 3- 2
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ................................................................................... 3- 3
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing.................................................................................................... 3- 3
3.3.4 Compression/ Extesion/ Editing Block ................................................................................................ 3- 4
3.3.5 Printer unit Output Image Processing .................................................................................................. 3- 4
3.4 Image Data Flow............................................................................................................................................. 3- 5
3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions ............................................................................. 3- 5
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function ........................................................................................ 3- 5
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission .................................................................................... 3- 6
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function.......................................................................... 3- 6
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function............................................................................................ 3- 7
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 3- 8
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................ 3- 8
3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Image Processor PCB ................................................................ 3- 8
3.5.1.2 Removing the Image Processor PCB............................................................................................ 3- 8
3.5.2 SDRAM .................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the SDRAM ....................................................................................... 3- 10
3.5.2.2 Removing the SDRAM................................................................................................................... 3- 11
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.1 Basic Constraction.......................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions ............................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Major Components ................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.1.3 Control System Configuration ............................................................................................................... 4- 3
Contents
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ...........................................................................................................................4- 4

4.2 Basic Sequence...............................................................................................................................................4- 5
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on .................................................................................................................4- 5
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original)....................4- 5
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original)....................4- 6
4.3 Various Control ................................................................................................................................................4- 7
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System...................................................................................................4- 7
4.3.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................4- 7
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control .......................................................................................................................4- 7
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ...................................................................................................................4- 9
4.3.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................4- 9
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS .........................................................................................4- 10
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction .........................................................................................................................4- 10
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction .......................................................................4- 10
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction...................................................................4- 10
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .............................................................................................................4- 11
4.3.4.1 Outline ...............................................................................................................................................4- 11
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection.................................................................................................4- 11
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................4- 13
4.3.5.1 Outline ...............................................................................................................................................4- 13
4.3.6 Image Processing ...................................................................................................................................4- 15
4.3.6.1 Outline ...............................................................................................................................................4- 15
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive .......................................................................................................................4- 15
4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction.................................................4- 16
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion........................................................................................4- 16
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline) ........................................................................................................4- 16
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ........................................................................................................................4- 16
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction .........................................................................................................................4- 16
4.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ....................................................................................................................4- 17
4.4.1 Copyboard Glass ....................................................................................................................................4- 17
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass ....................................................................................................4- 17
4.4.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass (Model equipped with ADF) .....................4- 17
4.4.1.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass...............................................................................................4- 17
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................4- 17
4.4.2.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB .........................................................................................4- 17
4.4.3 Reader Motor...........................................................................................................................................4- 19
4.4.3.1 Removing the Scanner Motor........................................................................................................4- 19
4.4.4 Contact Sensor........................................................................................................................................4- 19
4.4.4.1 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)................................................................................4- 19
4.4.4.2 Procedure after Replacing the CIS(Touch panel type) .............................................................4- 19
4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor................................................................................................4- 19
4.4.5.1 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor (Front/Rear)........................................4- 19
4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ...................................................................................................................4- 20
4.4.6.1 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor ..................................................................................4- 20
4.4.7 Original Size Sensor...............................................................................................................................4- 20
4.4.7.1 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan Direction) ..........................................................4- 20
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan Direction) .....................................................4- 21
4.4.8 Reader Heater (option) ..........................................................................................................................4- 21
4.4.8.1 Removing the Reader Heater (Right)...........................................................................................4- 21
Contents
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Left)............................................................................................. 4- 21
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

5.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism ................................................................................................ 5- 1
5.1.3 Main Components.................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.4 Control System Configuration................................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing....................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control .......................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.2 Horizontal Synchronization Control ...................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.3 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ........................................................................................................ 5- 5
5.3.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC) ................................................................................................ 5- 5
5.4 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor........................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.4.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control................................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.5 Controlling the Laser Shutter ........................................................................................................................ 5- 6
5.5.1 Laser Shutter Control .............................................................................................................................. 5- 6
5.6.1 Laser/Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................................. 5- 7
5.6.1.1 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................. 5- 7
Chapter 6 Image Formation

6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System ......................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System ................................................................................ 6- 1
6.2 Image Formation Process ............................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2.1 Image Formation Process ...................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.3 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ................................................................................................................ 6- 2
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System ..................................................................................... 6- 4
6.4.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.4.2 Primary Charging Bias Control .............................................................................................................. 6- 4
6.4.3 Developing Bias Control ......................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.5 Secondary Transfer Mechanism .................................................................................................................. 6- 5
6.5.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.5.2 Transfer Roller Bias Control................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.5.3 Static Eliminator Bias Control ................................................................................................................ 6- 6
6.6.1 Transfer Charging Roller......................................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.6.1.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller ....................................................................................... 6- 7
Chapter 7 Pickup and Feed System

7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods ............................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units .......................................................................................................................... 7- 2
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing............................................................................................................................. 7- 2
Contents
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing (Printer on its own) ..............................................................................................7- 3

7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing (Finisher) ...............................................................................................................7- 3
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit/Finisher) .........................................................................................7- 4
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit) ........................................................................................................7- 4
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex/Inner 2Way Tray) ..................................................................................7- 5
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray).................................................................................................7- 5
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing .........................................................................................................................7- 6
7.2 Detection Jams ................................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.2.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................................7- 7
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at First Delivery Sensor/Wound
Paper Jam at Fixing Assembly) ..............................................................................................................7- 7
7.2.2 Stationary Jams.........................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly ...............................................................................................7- 7
7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at First Delivery
Sensor/Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor) ................................................................................7- 7
7.2.3 Other Jams.................................................................................................................................................7- 8
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam .................................................................................................................................7- 8
7.3 Cassette Pickup Unit.......................................................................................................................................7- 9
7.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................7- 9
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation .....................................................................................................................7- 9
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection ............................................................................................................7- 11
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit .............................................................................................................................7- 12
7.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................7- 12
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup........................................................................7- 12
7.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ....................................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly ....................................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly...................................................................................7- 13
7.5.2 Cassette Paper Sensor..........................................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence Sensor ......................................................7- 13
7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor.............................................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches ...........................................................................7- 13
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ...............................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.4.1 Removing the Retry Sensor...........................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.5 Cassette Pickup Solenoid......................................................................................................................7- 13
7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ....................................................................................7- 13
7.5.6 Separation Roller ....................................................................................................................................7- 14
7.5.6.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers ...............................................................................7- 14
7.5.7 Manual Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................7- 14
7.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller .....................................................................................7- 14
7.5.8 Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor .........................................................................................................7- 14
7.5.8.1 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/Absence Sensor..................................................7- 14
7.5.9 Manual Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................................................................7- 15
7.5.9.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................7- 15
7.5.10 Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................7- 16
7.5.10.1 Removing the Registration Roller ...............................................................................................7- 16
7.5.11 Registration Clutch ...............................................................................................................................7- 16
7.5.11.1 Removing the Registration Clutch ..............................................................................................7- 16
7.5.12 Separation Pad......................................................................................................................................7- 16
Contents
7.5.12.1 Removing the Separation Pad.................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.5.13 Pickup Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 17
7.5.13.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller ........................................................................... 7- 17
Chapter 8 Fixing System

8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms and Functions .......................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms........................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film............................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed .................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature .............................................................................................. 8- 3
8.2.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature....................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode ....................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage Paper................................................................................................................. 8- 4
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper..................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.3 Protection Function......................................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.3.1 Protective Functions................................................................................................................................ 8- 5
8.4.1 Fixing Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.4.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................ 8- 7
8.4.2 Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 8
8.4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Film Unit........................................................................................................ 8- 8
8.4.3 Fixing Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.3.1 Removing the Pressure Roller...................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Paper Sensor............................................................................................................... 8- 11
8.4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ......................................................................................... 8- 11
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 8- 12
8.4.5.1 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................ 8- 12
Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.1 Control Panel................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2 Fan .................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2.2 Fan Control ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.3 Power Supply .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 2
9.3.1 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................ 9- 2
9.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 2
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................... 9- 3
9.3.2 Protection Function .................................................................................................................................. 9- 3
9.3.2.1 Protective Mechanisms.................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.4.1 Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 4
9.4.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................... 9- 4
9.4.2 External Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 4
Contents
9.4.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover.......................................................................................................9- 4

9.4.3 Upper Right Cover ....................................................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (Upper) ................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.4 Lower Right Cover ....................................................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (Lower) ................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.5 Left Rear Cover .........................................................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.5.1 Removing the Rear Left Cover........................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.6 Reader Front Cover ..................................................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.6.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover.................................................................................................9- 4
9.4.7 Reader Rear Cover...................................................................................................................................9- 5
9.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover .................................................................................................9- 5
9.4.8 Delivery Tray..............................................................................................................................................9- 5
9.4.8.1 Removing the Delivery Tray ............................................................................................................9- 5
9.4.9 Left Door.....................................................................................................................................................9- 5
9.4.9.1 Removing the Left Door (Non Duplex Unit Type).........................................................................9- 5
9.4.9.2 Removing the Left Door (With Duplex Unit Type) ........................................................................9- 6
9.4.10 Main Drive Unit ........................................................................................................................................9- 7
9.4.10.1 Removing the Main Drive Unit.......................................................................................................9- 7
9.4.11 Fixing/Duplex Drive Unit ........................................................................................................................9- 9
9.4.11.1 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit.....................................................................................................9- 9
9.4.12 Operation Panel Unit ..............................................................................................................................9- 9
9.4.12.1 Removing the Operation Panel Unit (Touch Panel Type).........................................................9- 9
9.4.13 DC Controller PCB..................................................................................................................................9- 9
9.4.13.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................9- 9
9.4.14 Powwer Supply PCB ............................................................................................................................9- 10
9.4.14.1 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................9- 10
9.4.15 Option Power Supply PCB ..................................................................................................................9- 10
9.4.15.1 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB .................................................................................9- 10
9.4.16 HVT PCB ................................................................................................................................................9- 10
9.4.16.1 Removing the HVT PCB...............................................................................................................9- 10
9.4.17 Main Drive Motor...................................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.17.1 Removing the Main Motor ............................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.18 Fixing Drive Motor.................................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.18.1 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor .......................................................................................9- 11
9.4.19 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..................................................................................................................9- 11
9.4.19.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (Non Duplex Unit Type)......................................9- 11
9.4.19.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (With Duplex Unit Type) .....................................9- 12
9.4.20 Fan Filter ................................................................................................................................................9- 13
9.4.20.1 Removing the Fan Filter (Non Duplex Unit) ..............................................................................9- 13
9.4.20.2 Removing the Fan Filter (With Duplex Unit Type) ...................................................................9- 13
Chapter 10 RDS
10.1 RDS ...............................................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.2 Application Operation Mode ...............................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.3 Communication Test ............................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.4 Communication Log .............................................................................................................................10- 1
10.1.5 Detail of Communication Log .............................................................................................................10- 1
Contents
10.1.6 Initialization of e-RDS.......................................................................................................................... 10- 1

10.1.7 SOAP Communication Function........................................................................................................ 10- 2
10.1.8 Retransmission at the time of SOAP Transmission Error ............................................................. 10- 3
10.1.9 e-RDS Setting Screen......................................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.10 Report Output of Communication Error Log.................................................................................. 10- 4
10.1.11 Sleep Operation ................................................................................................................................. 10- 4
10.1.12 Alarm Filtering, Alert Filtering .......................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.1.13 CA Certificate ..................................................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.1.14 Settings of Network Connection (Installation/Maintenance) ....................................................... 10- 5
10.1.15 Settings of e-RDS (Installation/Maintenance) ............................................................................... 10- 5
10.1.16 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................. 10- 6
10.1.17 Error Message list ............................................................................................................................. 10- 6
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection

11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ...................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.2 Reader Unit........................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 11- 1
11.2 Consumables............................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2.2 Reader Unit........................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 11- 1
11.3 Periodical Service ....................................................................................................................................... 11- 2
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing............................................................................................................................ 11- 2
Chapter 12 Measurement and Adjustments

12.1 Scanning System........................................................................................................................................ 12- 1
12.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS (Touch panel type)................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass (With ADF) ...................................................... 12- 1
12.2 Image Formation System .......................................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly ................................................................... 12- 1
12.3 Electrical Adjustments................................................................................................................................ 12- 1
12.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB (Touch panel ......................................... 12- 1
12.3.2 Procedure after Replacing the USB Memory (Touch panel type)................................................ 12- 1
12.3.3 Actions to Take before All Clearing (Backing up the User Data) ................................................. 12- 1
Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images

13.1 Initial Checkup............................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1 Site Environment.................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.2 Checking the Paper............................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper .................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.4 Checking the Durables........................................................................................................................ 13- 1
13.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.6 Others .................................................................................................................................................... 13- 2
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components............................................................................................................. 13- 2
13.2.1 Cluth/Solenoid....................................................................................................................................... 13- 2
Contents
13.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids ...........................................................................................................13- 2

13.2.2 Motor .......................................................................................................................................................13- 3
13.2.2.1 List of Motors..................................................................................................................................13- 3
13.2.3 Fan ..........................................................................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.3.1 List of Fans .....................................................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.4 Sensor.....................................................................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.4.1 List of Sensors ...............................................................................................................................13- 4
13.2.5 Switch .....................................................................................................................................................13- 6
13.2.5.1 List of Switches ..............................................................................................................................13- 6
13.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ...............................................................................................................13- 7
13.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others............................................................................................13- 7
13.2.7 PCBs .......................................................................................................................................................13- 8
13.2.7.1 List of PCBs....................................................................................................................................13- 8
Chapter 14 Error Code

14.1 Error Code Table .........................................................................................................................................14- 1
14.1.1 List of Error Codes ...............................................................................................................................14- 1
14.2 Error Code Details.......................................................................................................................................14- 2
14.2.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................14- 2
14.3 Jam Code .....................................................................................................................................................14- 5
14.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit) .................................................................................................14- 5
14.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher) .......................................................................................................14- 5
14.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF) .............................................................................................................14- 5
14.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit).................................................................................................14- 6
14.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray) .......................................................................................14- 6
14.4 Finisher Error Codes...................................................................................................................................14- 7
14.4.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................14- 7
14.5 Fax Error Codes ........................................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.1.1 Error Code Outline ......................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.2 User Error Code ..................................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.2.1 User Error Code...........................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.3 Service Error Code .............................................................................................................................14- 10
14.5.3.1 Service Error Code......................................................................................................................14- 10
Chapter 15 Service Mode

15.1 Outline ...........................................................................................................................................................15- 1
15.1.1 Outline of Service Mode ......................................................................................................................15- 1
15.1.2 Using the Mode (Touch Panel Type) ................................................................................................15- 2
15.2 Default Settings ...........................................................................................................................................15- 2
15.2.1 Service Mode Menus ...........................................................................................................................15- 2
15.3 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW) ......................................................................................................15- 9
15.3.1 Outline.....................................................................................................................................................15- 9
15.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition.................................................................................................................15- 9
15.3.2 SSSW-SW01: ........................................................................................................................................15- 9
15.3.2.1 List of Functions.............................................................................................................................15- 9
15.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 .....................................................................................................15- 10
Contents
15.3.3 SSSW-SW03....................................................................................................................................... 15- 10

15.3.3.1 List of Functions .......................................................................................................................... 15- 10
15.3.3.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 .................................................................................................... 15- 10
15.3.4 SSSW-SW04....................................................................................................................................... 15- 10
15.3.5 SSSW-SW05....................................................................................................................................... 15- 11
15.3.6 SSSW-SW12....................................................................................................................................... 15- 12
15.3.7 SSSW-SW13....................................................................................................................................... 15- 13
15.3.8 SSSW-SW14....................................................................................................................................... 15- 13
15.3.9 SSSW-SW25....................................................................................................................................... 15- 13
15.3.10 SSSW-SW28..................................................................................................................................... 15- 14
15.3.10.1 List of Functions ........................................................................................................................ 15- 14
15.3.10.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 .................................................................................................. 15- 14
15.3.11 SSSW-SW30..................................................................................................................................... 15- 15
15.3.12 SSSW-SW33..................................................................................................................................... 15- 15
15.3.12.5 Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 - Bit4 ........................................................................................ 15- 16
15.3.13 SSSW-SW34..................................................................................................................................... 15- 16
Contents
15.4 Menu Switch Settings (MENU)................................................................................................................15- 17

15.4.1 Menu Switch Composition ................................................................................................................15- 17
15.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer>......................................................................................................................15- 17
15.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor>.....................................................................................................15- 17
15.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level>....................................................................................................15- 17
15.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit>................................................................................15- 17
15.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit> ...........................................................................................15- 17
15.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal> ...............................................................................15- 18
15.5 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.) ...............................................................................15- 18
15.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition..................................................................................................15- 18
15.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN
transmission condition (3)>......................................................................................................................15- 18
15.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)>........................................................................................15- 18
15.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)> ......................................................................................15- 19
15.5.5 <010: line connection identification length> ...................................................................................15- 19
15.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)> ...............................................................................................15- 19
15.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer> ......................................................................................................................15- 19
15.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover>...............................................15- 19
15.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time
length (short)><019: pseudo ..................................................................................................................15- 19
15.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length
(short)><022: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)>......................................................15- 19
15.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover>......................................................................15- 19
15.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover>.......................................15- 19
15.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time> ...................................15- 19
15.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length>.......................................................15- 19
15.5.15 <055: Acquisition period of environmental log data>..................................................................15- 19
15.5.16 <056 - 061: Count type select >.....................................................................................................15- 19
15.6 Scanner Function Settings (SCANNER) ...............................................................................................15- 23
15.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch ...........................................................................................................................15- 23
15.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration ................................................................................15- 23
15.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning>.............................................................................15- 25
15.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point>............................15- 25
15.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment> ................................................................................15- 25
15.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment> ...........................................................................15- 25
15.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction> .................................................................................15- 25
15.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change> ....................................................................................15- 25
15.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> 15-
25
15.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
15- 25
15.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction ((copy:scanning on ADF)>.............................15- 25
15.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine:scanning on ADF)> ......................15- 25
15.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine:scanning on ADF)> ................................15- 26
15.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard:scanning on ADF)> .......................15- 26
15.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> ...
15- 26
15.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
15- 26
15.6.17 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready> ................................15- 26
Contents
15.6.18 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready>................................ 15- 26

15.6.19 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready> .......................... 15- 26
15.6.20 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)>............................................................................................. 15- 26
15.6.21 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)>......................................................................................... 15- 26
15.6.22 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)> ............................................................................................ 15- 26
15.6.23 <213: XYZ correction value (X) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions)) 15-
27
15.6.24 <214: XYZ correction value (Y) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions).. 15-
27
15.6.25 <215: XYZ correction value (Z) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions).. 15-
27
15.7 Printer Function Settings (PRINTER).................................................................................................... 15- 27
15.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW) ............................................................................................. 15- 27
15.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05 ............................................................................................................................... 15- 27
15.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14 ............................................................................................................................... 15- 28
15.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15 ............................................................................................................................... 15- 29
15.7.1.4 SSSW-SW18 ............................................................................................................................... 15- 30
15.7.2 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.) ........................................................................ 15- 30
15.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)> ....................................................... 15- 31
15.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)> ...................................................................... 15- 31
15.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)>.................................................................. 15- 31
15.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>................................................ 15- 31
15.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)> ........................................................... 15- 31
15.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)> ........................................................ 15- 32
15.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)>..................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.12 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)>.......................................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.13 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)>......................................................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.14 <053: Margin adjustment at the leading edge of the copy>............................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.15 <054: Margin adjustment at the trailing edge of the copy> ................................................ 15- 32
15.7.2.16 <055: Margin adjustment at the right edge of the copy>.................................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.17 <056: Margin adjustment at the left edge of the copy> ...................................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.18 <058:: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual feed tray)> .......................... 15- 32
15.7.2.19 <059:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Cassette)> ......................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.20 <060:Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Option cassette)> .............................. 15- 32
15.7.2.21 <061:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Duplex unit)> ..................................... 15- 32
15.7.2.22 <062:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For plain paper)>.............................. 15- 32
15.7.2.23 <063:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For rough paper)> ............................ 15- 33
15.7.2.24 <064:Mode for preventing the temperature rise of the end > ............................................ 15- 33
15.7.2.25 <065:Mode for reducing sand image>................................................................................... 15- 33
15.7.2.26 <066:Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode> .............................................................. 15- 33
15.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST) ................................................................................................................. 15- 33
15.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility .......................................................................... 15- 33
15.8 Network Parameter Settings (NETWORK)........................................................................................... 15- 34
15.8.1 Confirmation of contents of CA certificate ..................................................................................... 15- 34
15.9 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM) ............................................................................................... 15- 34
Contents
15.9.1 Bit Switch Settings..............................................................................................................................15- 34

15.10 Registration of Accessories (ACC) .......................................................................................................15- 34
15.10.1 Accessory Registration....................................................................................................................15- 34
15.11 License Management (LMS) .................................................................................................................15- 35
15.11.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................15- 35
15.11.2 Method of confirming license option..............................................................................................15- 35
15.11.3 Inactivity of the transmitted license................................................................................................15- 36
15.12 eRDS Parameter Settings (E-RDS) .....................................................................................................15- 37
15.12.1 Settings Related to e-RDS..............................................................................................................15- 37
15.13 Counter Indication (COUNTER)............................................................................................................15- 37
15.13.1 Counters ............................................................................................................................................15- 37
15.13.2 Clearing Counters ............................................................................................................................15- 38
15.14 Report Output (REPORT) ......................................................................................................................15- 38
15.14.1 Report Output....................................................................................................................................15- 38
15.14.2 System Data List ..............................................................................................................................15- 38
15.14.3 System Dump List ............................................................................................................................15- 39
15.14.4 Counter List .......................................................................................................................................15- 40
15.14.5 Error Log List.....................................................................................................................................15- 40
15.14.6 Spec List ............................................................................................................................................15- 42
15.14.7 Service Label ....................................................................................................................................15- 45
15.14.8 e-RDS Communication Error Log List...........................................................................................15- 45
15.14.9 Environmental Log Report ..............................................................................................................15- 45
15.15 Download (DOWNLOAD).......................................................................................................................15- 46
15.15.1 Download ...........................................................................................................................................15- 46
15.16 Data Initialization Mode (CLEAR) .........................................................................................................15- 46
15.16.1 Clear ...................................................................................................................................................15- 46
15.17 Error Display (ERROR DISPLAY) ........................................................................................................15- 47
15.17.1 Error Display......................................................................................................................................15- 47
15.18 ROM Management (ROM).....................................................................................................................15- 47
15.18.1 ROM Display .....................................................................................................................................15- 47
15.19 Test Mode (TEST)...................................................................................................................................15- 47
15.19.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................15- 47
15.19.1.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................15- 47
15.19.1.2 Test Mode Menu List (Touch Panel Type) ............................................................................15- 47
15.19.2 DRAM Test.........................................................................................................................................15- 49
15.19.2.1 D-RAM Test<(1) D-RAM TEST>.............................................................................................15- 49
15.19.3 Scan Test ...........................................................................................................................................15- 50
15.19.3.1 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST) ...................................................................................................15- 50
15.19.4 Print Test ............................................................................................................................................15- 50
15.19.4.1 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST) ...................................................................................................15- 50
15.19.5 Modem Test .......................................................................................................................................15- 51
15.19.5.1 Modem Test ((4) MODEM TEST) ...........................................................................................15- 51
15.19.6 Faculty Test .......................................................................................................................................15- 53
15.19.6.1 Function Test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)....................................................................................15- 53
15.19.7 Cleaning Mode ..................................................................................................................................15- 57
15.19.7.1 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN) ........................................................................15- 57
Chapter 16 Upgrading
Contents
16.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................... 16- 1

16.1.1 Overview of Upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool .................................................................................................... 16- 1
16.2 Making Preparations .................................................................................................................................. 16- 2
16.2.1 Registering the System Software...................................................................................................... 16- 2
16.2.2 Connection............................................................................................................................................ 16- 4
16.3 Downloading System Software................................................................................................................. 16- 4
16.3.1 Downloading the System Software ................................................................................................... 16- 4
16.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure .............................................................................................................. 16- 4
16.3.2 Downloading the Boot Software....................................................................................................... 16- 10
16.3.2.1 Downloading Procedure ............................................................................................................ 16- 10
16.3.3 Downloading the Language Module................................................................................................ 16- 10
16.3.3.1 Downloading Procedure ............................................................................................................ 16- 10
16.3.4 Otehr Upgrade Methods.................................................................................................................... 16- 10
16.3.4.1 Downloading the PCL Software ............................................................................................... 16- 10
16.3.4.2 Downloading the CA certificate ................................................................................................ 16- 11
Chapter 17 Service Tools

17.1 Service Tools............................................................................................................................................... 17- 1
17.1.1 Special Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 17- 1
17.1.2 Oils and Solvents ................................................................................................................................. 17- 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Pickup/Delivery/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7480) ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7470) ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1.1 External View (MF7460/7470/7480)..............................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.2 Using the Machine ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ........................................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ...................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.2.3 User Mode Items .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.3.4 Report Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.3.5 System Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.2.3.6 Copy Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3.7 Communication Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.3.8 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.10 Recommended setting of system management information ....................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.11 The Reference Information of the Department ID Management................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User............................................................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.2.4.2 Cleaning (Touch panel type)......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.5 Safety.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-15
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery.................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.6 Product Specifications................................................................................................................................................................ 1-17
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (MF7460/MF7470/MF7480)............................................................................................................................................... 1-18
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction
1.1.1 Pickup/Delivery/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration

0018-1104
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
The configuration is as shown in the following figure:
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-1-1
[1] DADF-P2 *1
[2] Duplex Unit-B1 *1
[3] Power Supply Kit-Q1
[4] Cassette Feeding Module-Q1
*1 Standard equipment device
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.2 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7480)

0018-1134
imageCLASS MF7480
[1]
[2]
F-1-2
[1] Netwark/PCL Extension kit

[2] Send Extension kit
* The above kits are standard equipments.
1-2
Chapter 1
1.1.3 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7470)

0018-2218
imageCLASS MF7470
[1]
F-1-3
[1] Netwark/PCL Extension kit
* The above kit is the standard equipment.
1-3
Chapter 1
1.2 Product Specifications
1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View (MF7460/7470/7480)

0018-1152
[1]
[13] [14]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10] [15]
[5]
[9]
[6] [17]
[8] [16]
[7]
F-1-4
[1] DADF [10] Left door

[2] Reader front cover [11] Left cover (rear)
[3] Control panel [12] Reader left cover
[4] Delivery tray [13] Reader right cover
[5] Front cover [14] Reader rear cover
[6] Cassette 1 [15] Rear cover
[7] Cassette 2 [16] Right cover (upper)
[8] Left cover (front) [17] Right cover (lower)
[9] Manual feed tray
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2.2 Using the Machine
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch

0018-1155
The machine possesses 2 power switches: main power switch and control power switch. Normally (i.e., unless the machine is in a sleep state), the machine will be
supplied with power when you turn on its main power switch.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-1-5
[1]Control panel power switch
[2]Main power lamp
[3]Main power switch
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch

0018-1157
<During printing or fax data transmission/reception>
Be sure to operate the main power switch while the Processing/Data lamp on the control panel is not lit.
(Turning off the main switch during printing or fax data transmission/reception can erase the data being processed.)
F-1-6
1-6
Chapter 1
<During downloading>
Do not turn off the power switch or ON/OFF switch on the control panel.
(Turning off the main power switch during downloading can make this machine inoperative.)
F-1-7
1.2.3 User Mode Items
1.2.3.1 Common Settings

0018-1159

T-1-1
Item Settings
Initial Function Select Initial Function: Copy*1, Send, Scan
Set System Monitor Screen as initial function: On, Off*1
Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor: On*1, Off
Auto Clear Setting Initial Function*1, Selected Function

Audible Tones Entry Tone: On *1 (1*1 to 3 levels)*2, Off
Error Tone: On *1 (1*1 to 3 levels)*2, Off
Send Done Tone: On (1 to 3 levels)*2, Off*1
Receive Done Tone: On (1 to 3 levels)*2, Off*1
Print Done Tone: On *1 (1*1 to 3 levels)*2, Off
Scan Done Tone: On *1 (1*1 to 3 levels)*2, Off
Toner Save Mode High, Low, Off*1

Printer Density 1 to 9 levels; 5*1
Inch Entry On*1, Off
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS Copy
Stack Bypass: On, Off*1
All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off
Printer
Stack Bypass: cannot be set
Receive
Other
Register Paper Type Paper Drawer 1, Paper Drawer 2*2, Paper Drawer 3*2, Paper Drawer
4*2: Plain*1, Recycled, Color, 3-hole punch, Bond, Heavy Paper 1
1-7
Chapter 1
Item Settings
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode Low*1, High
Tray Designation*2 If the Optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 Is Attached:

Tray A: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1
Tray B: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1
If the Optional Finisher-U2 and Additional Finisher Tray-C1 Are
Attached:
Tray A: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1
Tray B: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1
Stack Bypass Standard Settings On: Paper Size, Paper Type

Off*1
Paper Feed Method Switch Stack Bypass, Paper Drawer 1, Paper Drawer 2*2, Paper Drawer 3*2,
Paper Drawer 4*2: Speed*1, Print Side
Language Switch On, Off*1

Reversed Display (B/W) On, Off*1
Error Display for Dirty Feeder On*1, Off
Data Compress. Ratio for Remote Scans High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio
Gamma Value for Remote Scans Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2
Initialize Common Settings Initialize: Yes, No
*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings

0018-1160

T-1-2
Item Settings
Date & Time Settings Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone Settings:
GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00;
GMT -5:00*1
Daylight Saving Time Settings: On, Off*1
Auto Sleep Time Use Auto Sleep Time: On*1, Off

3 to 30 minutes; 5*1
Auto Clear Time 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 2 min.*1
1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning
0018-1161

T-1-3
Item Settings
Transfer Roller Cleaning Press [Start].
Drum Cleaning Press [Start].
Fixing Unit Cleaning Cleaning Sheet Print, press [Start].
Feeder Cleaning Press [Start].
Special Mode M Standard*1, Low, Moderate, High
Special Mode N Manual (Medium, High), Off
Special Mode O Stack Bypass: Medium, High, Off*1
Drawer: Medium, High, Off*1
Special Mode P Off*1, Medium, High
Bond Special Fixing Mode On, Off*1
Special Mode S Speed Priority 1, Speed Priority 2, Off*1
Rotate Collate Adjustment Speed Priority 1*1, Speed Priority 2, Image Priority
Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder On*1, Off
1.2.3.4 Report Settings

0018-1162
1-8
Chapter 1
T-1-4
Item Settings
Settings TX Report: On, For Error Only*1, Off
Report With TX Image: On*1, Off
Activity Report
Auto Print: On*1, Off
Send/Receive Separate: On, Off*1
RX Report: On, For Error Only, Off*1

Print List Address Book List
One-touch Buttons: Yes, No
Address Book: Yes, No
User’s Data List: Yes, No
1.2.3.5 System Settings

0018-1163

T-1-5
Item Settings
System Manager Settings
System Manager 32 characters maximum
System Manager ID Seven digit number maximum
System Password Seven digit number maximum
Department ID Management
Department ID Management On, Off*1
Register ID/Password Register, Edit, Erase, Set page limits
Page Totals Clear, Clear All Totals, Print List
Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs On*1, Off
Allow ID Unknown Remote Scan Jobs On*1, Off
Network Settings
Forwarding Settings
Receive Type*2 All*1, Fax, I-Fax
Validate/Invalidate On, Off*1
Register Condition Name: 50 characters maximum
Forwarding Conditions
Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax
Forward w/o Cond. Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax

Forwarding Destination: Select from the list of registered addresses.
File Format: TIFF*1, PDF, Divide into Pages
Detail/Edit Condition Name: 50 Characters maximum

Forwarding Conditions
Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax
Erase Yes, No
Print List Yes, No
Device Info Settings
Device Name 32 characters maximum
Location 32 characters maximum
User ID Management On, Off*1
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Settings Maximum TX Data Size: 0 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1
Divided TX over Max.Data Size: On, Off*1
Default Subject: 40 characters maximum; Attached Image*1
Fax Settings*2 Send Start Speed: 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800
bps, 2400 bps
Receive Start Speed: 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps,
4800 bps, 2400 bps
Memory Lock Settings On: Option

Off*1
Remote UI On/Off On*1 On*1, Off
1-9
Chapter 1
Item Settings
Restrict the Send Function Address Book Password: 7 digits maximum
Restrict New Addresses: On, Off*1
Allow Fax Driver TX: On*1, Off
Restrict Recall: On, Off*1
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers*2: On, Off*1
Restrict Sequential Broadcast: Broadcast Confirmation, Prohibit
Broadcast, Off*1
License Registration Enter a license key using the numeric keys.

Display Dept. ID/User Name On*1, Off
Auto Online/Offline Auto Online: On, Off*1
Auto Offline: On, Off*1
Job Log Display On*1, Off
Use USB Device On*1, Off
Failed Forwarding Document Set. Print Image: On*1, Off
Store Image to Memory: On, Off*1
PDL Selection (PnP) UFRII LT*1, PCL5e, PCL6, FAX

1.2.3.6 Copy Settings

0018-1164

T-1-6
Item Settings
Image Orientation Priority On, Off*1
Auto Orientation On*1, Off
Standard Settings Store, Initialize
Initialize Copy Settings Yes, No
1.2.3.7 Communication Settings

0018-1166

T-1-7
Item Settings
Common Settings: TX Settings
Unit Name 24 characters maximum
Data Compression Ratio High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio
Retry Times 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1
Edit Standard Send Settings Store, Initialize
TX Terminal ID On: Option (Printing Position, Telephone # Mark*2)
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2
Sharpness 1 to 7 levels, 4*1
Register Favorites Button M1 to M18
Color TX Scan Settings Speed Priority*1, Image Priorit
Default Screen for Send Favorite Buttons, One-touch Buttons, Initial Function*1
Initialize TX Settings Yes, No
Common Settings: RX Settings
2-Sided Print On, Off*1
Select Cassette Switch A: On*1, Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Receive Reduction On*1 RX Reduction:

Auto*1, Fix. Red.
Reduce %: 97, 95, 90*1, 75%
Reduce Direction
Ver. Hor., Vertical Only*1
Off
Received Page Footer On, Off*1

Continue Printing When Toner Is Out On, Off*1
Fax Settings: User Settings*2
Unit Telephone # 20 characters maximum
Tel Line Type Pulse, Tone*1
1-10
Chapter 1
Item Settings
Monitor Volume Control Volume Control: 0 to 3 levels, 1*1
Fax Settings: TX Settings*2
ECM TX On*1, Off
Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds; 2 seconds*1
Auto Redial On*1 Option:
Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1
Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2*1
minutes*1
TX Error Redial: On*1, Off
Off
Check Dial Tone Before Sending On*1, Off

Rotate Send On*1, Off
Fax Setting: RX Settings*2
ECM RX On*1, Off

1.2.3.8 Printer Settings

0018-1167

T-1-8
Item Settings
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE LTR*, STMT, EXECUTIV, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10,
MONARCH, DL, A4, A3, B4, B5, A5, 11X17, LGL
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1,
HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, 3-HOLE PUNCH
PAPER, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE
COPIES 1 to 999; 1*
2-SIDED PRINTING OFF*, ON
PRINT QUALITY
IMAGE REFINEMENT ON*, OFF
DENSITY 9 levels; 5*
TONER SAVER OFF*, ON
PAGE LAYOUT
BINDING LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDG
MARGIN INCHES*: -01.90 INCHES to 01.90 INCHES; 00.00 INCHES*
MM: -50.0 MM to 50.0 MM; 0.0 MM*
AUTO ERROR SKIP OFF*, ON
ERROR TIME OUT ON* (TIME OUT PERIOD: 5 to 300 SEC), OFF; 15 SEC*
COLLATE OFF*, COLLATE, ROTATE + COLLATE*1, ROTATE +
GROUP*1, OFFSET + COLLATE*2, OFFSET + GROUP*2,
STAPLE*2 (STAPLE POSITION: TOP LEFT*, TOP RIGHT,
BOTTOM LEFT)
INIT. PRINTER SET OFF*, ON

RESET PRINTER OFF*, ON
PCL Settings
PAPER SAVE OFF*, ON
ORIENTATION PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
FONT NUMBER 0 to 89; 0*
POINT SIZE 4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*
PITCH 0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
FORM LINES 5 to 128 lines; 60 lines*
SYMBOL SET PC8*, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PSTEXT,
ROMAN8, ROMAN9, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2,
WINL5, DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21,
ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, LEGAL,
MCTEXT, PC775
CUSTOM PAPER OFF*, ON

UNIT OF MEASURE INCHES*, MILLIMETERS
X DIMENSION 5.83" to 17.00" (148 mm to 432 mm); 17.00"* (432 mm)
Y DIMENSION 3.75" to 11.69" (95 mm to 297 mm); 11.69"* (297 mm)
APPEND CR TO LF NO*, YES
ENLARGE A4 OFF*, ON
HALFTONE
TEXT TONE, GRADATION, RESOLUTION*
1-11
Chapter 1
Item Settings
GRAPHICS TONE*, GRADATION, RESOLUTION
IMAGE TONE*, GRADATION, RESOLUTION
BarDIMM*3 ENABLE*, DISABLE
FreeScape ~*, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF
An asterisk(*) indicates the default settings.

*1 Rotate items do not appear when the optional Finisher-U2 is attached.
*2 Offset and staple items appear only when the optional Finisher-U2 is attached.
*3 This setting is available only if the BarDIMM function is activated.
1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings

0018-1168

T-1-9
Item Settings
Register Address: Register New Address
Fax*2 Fax Number: 120 characters maximum
Option: Sending Speed, Long Distance, ECM TX
Register Name: 16 characters maximum
E-mail E-mail Address: 120 characters maximum

I-Fax I-Fax Address: 120 characters maximum
File Protocol: FTP*1, Windows (SMB)
Host Name: 120 characters maximum
File Path: 120 characters maximum
User: 24 characters maximum
Password: 24 characters maximum (FTP),
14 characters maximum (Windows (SMB))
Group Address Book

Erase
Register Address: Erase

Register Address: Edit
One-touch Buttons
Register/Edit You can register or edit the items of One-touch Buttons for Fax, E-
mail, I-Fax,
File, and Group shown in Register New Add above.
Key Name: 12 characters maximum

1.2.3.10 Recommended setting of system management information

0018-1169

When multiple users use the machine, it is necessary to advise each user to set the system management information.
Setting ID and password of system administrator on the operation unit under (Additional functions key) > [System management setting] > [Setting of system ad-
ministrator's information] has an effect of restraining the third person from falsifying information, for the ID and password are required when a user carries out an
important setting of the machine.
Under the environment that the setting is not done, if a user who does not sufficiently know operation situation of the machine tries to change the setting, following
troubles may occur.
- When the user changes [User ID Management] from [off] to [on], copying operation cannot be done unless ID and password are input.
- When each setting is changed on the network from RUI, that enables to falsify data of address book or delete log.
- When TCP/IP fixed address is changed on the network setting, printing operation via network cannot be done until the port setting is changed.
- When usage restriction of USB device is changed to [on], printing operation via USB becomes disabled.
1.2.3.11 The Reference Information of the Department ID Management

0018-1170
Function:
If Department is registered in Department ID Management, users are required to input the Department ID and password when inputting data from the operation
unit of the machine. Also, the registration enables to restrict usage and control the usage number of times of Total Parts, Copy, B&W Scan, Color Scan, or Print.
Setting method:
Register Department ID in Department ID Management under Additional Functions key>System Setting.
Operation outline:
Department ID can be registered in [Department ID management] from the operation unit of the machine even though [System Manager Settings] is not done.
When registering data in [Department ID Management] using RUI, you need to register yourself as a system manager in [System Manager Settings] and login
as a system manager.
1-12
Chapter 1
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items

0018-0086
No. Item Maintenance cycle Remarks

[1] Pressure plate cleaning As required
[2] Copyboard glass(large) cleaning As required
[3] Copyboard glass(small) cleaning When the message appears
[4] Copyboard holder (jump board) As required
[5] Fixing pressure roller cleaning As required Clean every 10000 sheets
[6] Exterior cleaning As required
1.2.4.2 Cleaning (Touch panel type)

0018-0088
The parts that should be cleaned by the customer to maintain the design performance and the cleaning method are described below.
The service engineer should instruct the customer to clean the machine at regular intervals (once a month).
1. Pressure Plate
Clean the pressure plates [1] with a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent and squeezed hard, and then wipe it with a dry soft cloth.
[1]
F-1-8
2. Document Glass/Glass holder (jump board)
Clean the document glass [1] with a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent and squeezed hard, and then wipe them with a dry soft cloth.
When an ADF is installed, clean is document glass (small) [2] and glass holder [3] in the same manner.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-1-9
3. Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller
If white streaks are seen on the printed paper, the fixing pressure roller can be dirty. If white streaks are seen on the printed paper, clean the fixing pressure roller
in the user mode.
When cleaning the fixing pressure roller, manually feed A4 paper.
MEMO:
The time required for cleaning is about 100 seconds.
1-13
Chapter 1
1) Press the Additional functions key to enter the user mode.

2) Select "Adjustment/Cleaning" on the touch panel.
3) Select "Fixing Unit Cleaning" and then press [Cleaning Sheet Print]. The cleaning pattern will be printed.
4) Open the manual feed tray.
F-1-10
5) Place the cleaning pattern printed in step 3 in the manual feed tray with "V" up.
F-1-11
6) Select the size of the loaded paper and then press [Next].
7) Select the size of the loaded paper and then press [OK].
8) Press [Start] and then Cleaning will start.
1-14
Chapter 1
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light

0018-1171
Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will
not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations

0018-1172
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976.
These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned
within the Untied States. The label shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser products that are sold
in the United States.
CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146, JAPAN.
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.
F-1-12
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit

0018-1173
The laser scanner unit emits invisible laser light inside it. If exposed to laser light, the human eye can irreparably be damaged. Never attempt to disassemble the
laser scanner unit. (It is not designed for servicing in the field.)
Warning labels are affixed to the top cover of the laser scanner unit and the inner cover inside the front cover of this machine.
1-15
Chapter 1
F-1-13
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner

0018-1174
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin

1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
2. Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire

0018-1175
It is dangerous to throw lithium batteries and parts and components containing flammable substances, such as cartridges, etc., into fire. Such parts and components
must be disposed of in accordance with local laws and regulations.
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery

0018-1176
Risk of explosion if Battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used Batteries according to the instructions.
1-16
Chapter 1
1.2.6 Product Specifications
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications

imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 0018-1149
Copyboard stream reading, fixed reading

Body desktop
Light source type LED array (CIS)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
Image reading method CCD (CIS)
Reproduction method indirect electrostatic
Exposure method by laser light
Charging method by AC charging roller
Development method 1-component toner projection
Transfer method by transfer roller
Separation method by curvature + static eliminator
Cassette pickup method retard
Multifeeder pickup method dual processing
Drum cleaning method by cleaning blade
Fixing method on-demand
Delivery method face-down
Reproduction ratio 50% to 200%
Warm-up time approx. 26sec
Image margin (leading edge) 3.0 -/+1.5 mm
Image margin (trailing edge) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Image margin (left/right) left edge: 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
right edge: 0.5 mm or more
Non-image width (leading edge) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Non-image width (trailing edge) 5.0 -/+2.0 mm
Non-image width (left/right) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Number of gradations 256 gradations
Reading resolution 600x600dpi
Printing resolution 1200dpix1200dpi
First print time 6.9 sec or less
Cassette capacity 250sheets (80 g/m2)
Multifeeder tray capacity 100 sheets (A4/B5/LTR, 64 g/m2)
50 sheets (A3/B4/LDR/LGL, 64 g/m2)
100 sheets (A5/A5R/STMT, 64 g/m2)
80 sheets (A4/B5/LTR, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (A3/B4/LDR/LGL, 80 g/m2)
80 sheets (A5/A5R/STMT, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper, A4/B5/LTR, 105 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper, A3/B4/LDR/LGL, 105 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper, A5/A5R/STMT, 105 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper, A4/B5/LTR, 128 g/m2)
35 sheets (heavy paper, A3/B4/LDR/LGL, 128 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper, A5/A5R/STMT, 128 g/m2)
50 sheets (OHP)
1 sheet (label)
10 sheets (envelope)
40 sheets (post card)
Continuous reproduction 1 to 99 sheets
Toner type magnetic negative toner
Original type sheet, book
Maximum original size A3/LDR
Original size detection function by reflection type sensor
Sleep mode yes
Option See the system configuration chart.
Operating environment 15 to 27.5 deg C
(temperature range)
Operating environment 25% to 75%
(humidity range)
Operating environment 0.6 to 1.0 atm
(atmospheric pressure)
Noise 69.5dB or less
Power supply rating 120V
Power consumption (maximum) 1.26KW or less
Power consumption Average power consumption
511W or less (At the option full-equipped: 516W)
Ozone 0.01 ppm or less (initial)
0.035 ppm or less (after endurance)
Dimensions 622mm x 676mm x 757mm (WxDxH)
Weight approx. 56 kg
1-17
1.2.7 Function List
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (MF7460/MF7470/MF7480)

Paper size Single-sided Double-sided

Casette feed Manual feed Casette feed Manual feed
Plain paper A4 25 25 23.5 23.5
A5 25.5 25.5 - -
A5R - 9.5 - 9
B5 23 23 22.5 22.5
B5R 9 9 9 9
A4R 11 11 9.5 9.5
B4 11 11 9 9
A3 15 15 10 10
STMT 10.5 10.5 - 9
STMTR - 9.5 - 9
EXE - 23 - 21
LTR 25 25 27.5 27.5
LTRR 11.5 11.5 9.5 9.5
LGL 11 11 9 9
LDR 15 15 9.5 9.5
8K 10.5 10.5 9 9
16K 23 23 22.5 22.5
16KR 11 11 9 9
Heavy paper; 81 to 105g/ A4 23 (-) 23 (23) 22 (-) 22 (-)
m2 *1 A5 47.5 (-) 17.5 (7.5) - -
(Heavy paper; 106 to A5R - 10 (7) - 8 (-)
128g/m2 *2) B5 16.5 (-) 16.5 (8) 16 (-) 16 (-)
B5R 8 (-) 8 (7.5) 7.5 (-) 7.5 (-)
A4R 9.5 (-) 9.5 (5.5) 9 (-) 9 (-)
B4 9.5 (-) 9.5 (6.5) 8.5 (-) 8.5 (-)
A3 14 (-) 14 (14) 9.5 (-) 9.5 (-)
STMT 9 (-) 9 (8) - 8 (-)
STMTR - 8 (7.5) - -
EXE - 16.5 (8) - 15.5 (-)
LTR 22.5 (-) 22.5 (22.5) 22 (-) 22 (-)
LTRR 9.5 (-) 9.5 (4.5) 9 (-) 9 (-)
LGL 9.5 (-) 9.5 (4.5) 8.5 (-) 8.5 (-)
LDR 13.5 (-) 13.5 (13.5) 9.5 (-) 9.5 (-)
8K 9 (-) 9 (4.5) 8 (-) 8 (-)
16K 16.5 (-) 16.5 (8) 16 (-) 16 (-)
16KR 9.5 (-) 9.5 (4.5) 8.5 (-) 8.5 (-)
Bond paper *3 A4 - 7.5 (6) - 7.5 (6)
A5 - 6 (5) - -
(Bond paper H *4)
A5R - 6 (5) - 6 (4.5
B5 - 6 (5) - 6 (5)
B5R - 5.5 (4.5) - 5.5 (4)
A4R - 4.5 (4) - 4.5 (3.5)
B4 - 5.5 (4.5) - 5 (4)
A3 - 6 (5) - 6 (5)
STMT 6.5 (5) 6.5 (5) - -
STMTR - 6 (5) - 5.5 (4.5)
EXE - 6 (5) - -
LTR 7.5 (6) 7.5 (6) 7.5 (6) 7.5 (6)
LTRR 4.5 (4) 4.5 (4) 4.5 (3) 4.5 (3)
LGL 4 (3.5) 4 (3.5) 3.5 (3) 3.5 (3)
LDR 6 (5) 6 (5) 6 (5) 6 (5)
8K - - - -
16K - - - -
16KR - - - -
OHP A4 - 30 - -
LTR - 30 - -
1-18
Envelope Monarch - 6.1 - -
COM10 - 6 - -
ISO-B5 - 6.1 - -
ISO-C5 - 6 - -
DL - 6 - -
Postcard Postcard - 11.5 - -
Double postal card - 10.5 - -
4-plane post card - 23.5 - -
*1. Bond SP. FIX. Mode in the user mode: OFF

*2. Bond SP. FIX. Mode in the user mode: ON
Supplement:
- The above copy speed does not change irrespective of whether paper is supplied from the upper/lower cassette, the manual feed tray, or from the
cassette feeding module.
- The copy speed may become down when the copies make continuously one minutes or more with the narrow width paper. The slowdown is reduced
with the following user mode. User Mode: Additional Functions > Adjust/Cleaning > Spesial Mode S > Speed Priority 1 or 2
1-19
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials .................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.3 Setting the Cassettes..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Attaching the Ferrite Core............................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.5 Checking the Image Quality......................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.6 Setting the Date and Time............................................................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.7 Attaching Other Parts ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network...................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4 Connection to Telephone Line....................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.1 Connecting to the Telephone Line ............................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.2 Basic Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.3 Communication Test .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5 Flow of Accessory Installation .................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.1 Flow of Accessary Installation................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation

0017-2577
Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (-/+10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier,
or refrigerator:
(%RH)
100
[C]
90
85
[B]
75
70 [A]
50
25
20
15
10
5
0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 (degC)
7.5 23 27.5 32.5
F-2-1
<Environmental zone assured>
[A]: Zone A: Satisfies all the conditions of the standard image quality and paper feed performance.
[B]: Zone B: Inferior to Zone A in terms of the standard image quality and paper feed performance, or may not apply.
[C]: Zone C: Problems associated with safety, malfunctions, or incorrect message display do not occur, but image quality and paper feed performance are
not guaranteed.
3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The level of ozone generated by the machine will not affect the health of individuals around it. Some, however, may find its odor unpleasant as while remaining
in contact with it for long hours. Be sure that the room is well ventilated.
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
100 mm min.
100 mm min.
1249 mm
1247 mm
F-2-2
7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work

0017-2579

1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is
2-1
Chapter 2
fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on
the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 58 kg. Be sure to work in a group of 2 persons when lifting it.
1-2 Checking the Contents

Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:
[1] [2] [3]
A3 A4 A4 A4 LTR 16K B5 STMT/LGL A5 B5 A5

A3 11 17 8K B4 LTR A4
A5 B4 B5
A4 LTR STMT/LGL A5/A4 A5
B5 LGL 11 17 A3 11 17 LTR
LTR LTR STMT Set the size detector lever to the

new paper size.
A4/A3 A5/A4 A5
Placer I’indicateur de format sur
8K 16K le nouveau format.
A4/A3 B5/B4 A5 B5 A5
A4
FU5-8609
[4] [5] [6]
[7] [8] [9]
[10] [11] [12]

F-2-3
[1] Toner cartridge ---1 [7] Main unit warranty card ---1
[2] Power cable ---1 [8] Registration card ---1
[3] Stamp ink cartridge ---1 [9] Cartridge warranty ---1
[4] Cassette size label ---2 [10] Tweezers ---1
[5] Caution sheet ---2 [11] Ferrite core ---1
[6] Document size label ---1 [12] Telephone cord ---1
Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
Operators manual: Starter Guide

Operators manual: Basic Guide
Operator manual CD-ROM
Driver/Utility CD-ROM
2-2
Chapter 2
1-3 Names of Parts
[1]
[13] [14]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10] [15]
[5]
[9]
[6] [17]
[8] [16]
[7]
F-2-4
[1] DADF [10] Left door

[2] Reader front cover [11] Left cover (rear)
[3] Control panel [12] Reader left cover
[4] Delivery tray [13] Reader right cover
[5] Front cover [14] Reader rear cover
[6] Cassette 1 [15] Rear cover
[7] Cassette 2 [16] Right cover (upper)
[8] Left cover (front) [17] Right cover (lower)
[9] Manual feed tray
2-3
Chapter 2
2) Remove the short shipping tape.

2.2 Unpacking and Installation
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials

0017-2581
1) Unpack the machine and remove vinyl, cushioning materials, and tape.
2) Hold the handles [1] of the machine together with one or more persons and
take it out.
The maximum weight of this machine is approximately 53kg. Two or more

persons are required to lift the machine.
F-2-7
3) Remove the packing materials.
[1] F-2-8
4) Gently rock the cartridge several times to distribute toner inside.
[1] F-2-9
F-2-5 5) Pull out the seal completely.
2.2.2 Installing the Toner Cartridge

0017-2582
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 Do not pull out the seal at an angle.
1) Remove the cartridge from the bag.
F-2-6
F-2-10
2-4
Chapter 2
6) Remove the long shipping tape. 10) Rotate the lever to the unlocked position.
F-2-11
7) Remove the protective cover.
F-2-15
11) While grasping the handle of the cartridge holder, pull the cartridge hold-
er out of the machine until it stops.
F-2-12
8) Push the release button on the left cover of the main unit to open the left
cover.
F-2-16
12) Hold the cartridge by its handle, then insert it into the cartridge holder.
F-2-13
9) Open the front cover.
F-2-17
F-2-14
2-5
Chapter 2
13) Push the cartridge holder in the machine as far as it will go. 2) Remove the wire [1] securing the inner plate of the cassette.
[1]
F-2-18
F-2-21
14) Rotate the lever to the locked position.
3) Press the "PUSH DOWN" mark [1] on the inner plate to lock it into the
cassette.
WN
PUSH DO
[1]
F-2-22
4) Turn the lever [1] of the paper front guide counterclockwise to release it.
Slide the paper front guide [2] to fit to the size of the paper to be used, and
then turn the lever clockwise to lock it.
F-2-19
15) Close the front cover.
16) Gently close the left cover until it clicks.
2.2.3 Setting the Cassettes

0017-2583
U2
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 LTR
STM
T
U1
U3
LGL LTR
B5 11 17
A5 B5
1) Holding the knob [1] at the center of the cassette, draw out the cassette [2] A4
A4
B4
until it stops. A3
[2] [1]
F-2-23
5) Turn the paper trailing edge registration plate [1] to the left to remove it.
Re-attach it to fit to the size of the paper to be loaded.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-2-20
F-2-24
2-6
Chapter 2
6) Slide the paper size detection lever [1] to fit to the paper size. 9) Align the left, right, and leading edges of sheets and load the stack of paper
[1] in the cassette. Make sure that the paper is below the claws [2] of the
cassette.
[1]
MEMO:
Inserting the cassette into the machine with the inner plate locked into the
cassette will unlock the inner plate automatically. If the inner plate is not
locked, press the "PUSH DOWN" mark on the inner plate to lock it into the
cassette and then load paper.
[1]
F-2-25
7) Affix the cassette size label [1] to the paper size indication plate [2].
A4
[2]
F-2-28
10) Holding the knob at the center of the cassette, insert the cassette in the
[2] machine it stops.
[1]
2.2.4 Attaching the Ferrite Core
0017-5259
The installation of the ferrite core does only for the model equipped with the
printer function.
1) Attach the ferrite core [2] to the user's USB cable, and then connect the
USB cable to the USB port of the host machine.
F-2-26
8) Affix the caution sheet printed in an appropriate language.
To reduce noise, attach the ferrite core as close to the USB port of the host
machine as possible.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-2-27
F-2-29
2.2.5 Checking the Image Quality

0017-2585
2-7
Chapter 2
1) Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the main power
switch [2].
Use the specified power supply (rated voltage -/+10% and rated current).
[1]
F-2-32
[2] b. Document size label

F-2-30
The purpose of this label is to facilitate the size adjustment made from the
2) Place a document on the document glass, take a copy of it by supplying view point of each user.
paper from the cassette or manual feed tray, and check the printed image. 1) Align the side guide (rear) [1] to "A4/A3" "LTR/11X17" [2].
Also perform the following checks: 2) Affix the label of the series matching the document size label [3] to the
- Check whether abnormal sound is heard. feeder cover.
- Check the printed images at all preset magnifications. Adjust the label position by moving it back and forth (in the direction of
- Check whether the document is copied normally on the specified the arrow [5]) according to the view point of the user so that the indicator
number of sheets. [4] on the side guide (front) meets the indicator on the size label, and then
affix the label securely.
2.2.6 Setting the Date and Time
0017-2586
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 [1]

[2]
1) Press keys to display the user mode screen. [3]
2) Select "TIMER SETTINGS" and then press the OK.
3) Select "DATE&TIME SETTING", and then press the OK. The set date
and time appears.
4) Enter the current date and time with the ten keys.
5) Press the OK to allow the entered date and time to take effect.
2.2.7 Attaching Other Parts

0017-2587
a. Stamp
1) Open the paper feeder cover and jam handling cover of DADF.
x17
/11
TR
/A3 A
A4
[4]
[5]
[1] [2]
F-2-31
2) Install the stamp using tweezers or the like.
A loosely installed stamp will cause a paper jam. Push the stamp all the way
in until it clicks.
F-2-33
2-8
Chapter 2
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection

0017-2588
If the machine supports a network feature, check the network connection following the procedure below.
1) Press the following keys to display the service mode screen:
> 2 Key > 8 Key >
2) Select "# REPORT" using or , and then press the OK.
3) Select "REPORT OUTPUT" using or , and then press the OK.
4) Select "SPEC LIST" using or , and then press the OK.
5) When "SPEC REPORT" is displayed, check that "NETWORK" is set to ON.
6) Contact the system administrator of the customer to make network settings.
2.4 Connection to Telephone Line
2.4.1 Connecting to the Telephone Line

0017-2589
1) Turn off the main power switch of this machine.

2) Connect modular plug at either end of the modular cable to the modular jack (LINE) at the back of the machine, and connect the other modular plug to the
modular jack on the wall.
Use the modular cable supplied with the machine. If you use another
modular cable, its length must be within 3 m.
F-2-34
3) Turn on the main power switch.
2.4.2 Basic Settings

0017-2590
Make the minimum settings required to use the fax feature.

a. Registering the User Telephone Number
> [Communications Settings] > [User Settings (Fax Settings)] > [Uit Telephone #] > Enter the fax No. > [OK]
b. Selecting the Telephone Line Type
> [Communications Settings] > [User Settings (Fax Settings)] > [Tel Line Type] > Select [Pulse] or [Tone]. > [OK]
2.4.3 Communication Test

0017-2591
Conduct a communication test to check the fax feature is implemented properly.

1) Using ten keys, enter the telephone number of a called party who allows you to conduct the communication test. Send a test document to check for normal trans-
mission. If the test document cannot be sent normally, check whether the set telephone line type is the same as the type of the telephone line connected to this
machine.
2) Ask the called party to send a test document to your to check for normal reception.
2-9
Chapter 2
2.5 Flow of Accessory Installation
2.5.1 Flow of Accessary Installation

0017-2592
If you are going to install any accessory after installing the host machine, follow the following flow of work so that the work will become effective.
Host machine installation
Power supply kit installation
Cassette feeding module installation
Additional finisher tray installation Inner 2-way tray installation
Finisher installation
F-2-35
2-10
Chapter 3 Main Controller
Contents
Contents
3.1 Overview/Configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Image Processing ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3.4 Compression/ Extesion/ Editing Block ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.5 Printer unit Output Image Processing .......................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Image Data Flow............................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission............................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function .................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Image Processor PCB.....................................................................................................................................3-8
3.5.1.2 Removing the Image Processor PCB ..............................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.5.2 SDRAM...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the SDRAM........................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.5.2.2 Removing the SDRAM................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
Chapter 3
3.1 Overview/Configuration
3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms

0018-1560

T-3-1
Item Description
Image Processor PCB Controls system operation, memory, printer unit output, image processing, printer unit image input processing, card
printer unit interface, fax image processing, etc.
Image memory (SDRAM) Temporarily retains image data (128 MB; 256 MB max.)
Flash ROM Stores system software and retains user data/service data
USB port USB2.0 interface
Reader Unit
image Processor PCB

USB port
DC controller PCB
Flash ROM
image memory
(SDRAM)
F-3-1
3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB

0018-1561
3-1
Chapter 3
J317 J320 J300

J305
J318
J308
J301
J303 J309
J1 J2
J304
(main) (sub)
J312
IC1
J313
J316
J315
IC10
BAT951
IC11S J319
IC140
J314
J310
F-3-2
T-3-2
Connector Description
J300 SERIAL (RS-232C) PCB connection slot
J301 USB memory connection slot
J303 USB port
J304 LAN PCB connection slot
J305 Not used
J308 Reader ADF connection slot
J309 Reader Book connection slot
J310 Power supply connection slot
J312 SERIAL PCB connection slot
J314 DC controller PCB connection slot
J315 SOFT ID PCB connection slot
J316 SOFT counter PCB connection slot
J317 New Card Reader connection slot
J318 Control panel connection slot
J319 Extend ROM PCB connection slot
J320 Not used
J1 DDR DIMM PCB connection slot (main)
J2 DDR DIMM PCB connection slot (sub)
3.3 Image Processing
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow

0018-1562
3-2
Chapter 3
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy Scan
-SEND
A A -FAX
-PullScan
-E-Mail
Print output Image data -PDL Print
PC
F-3-3
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module

0018-1563

The machine's major image processing is executed by the image processor PCB.
The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing:
Reader Unit
Reader unit input image processing block Image Processor PCB

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit. Printer unit output image
processing block
Processes image data for

DC controller PCB
output to the printer unit.
SDRAM
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
F-3-4
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing

0018-1564
The image data colleted by the contact image sensor is processed by the Image processor PCB.
3-3
Chapter 3
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
Enlargement/reduction
Edge emphasis
-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Binary processing (error diffusion)
To compression/expansion/editing block
F-3-5
3.3.4 Compression/ Extesion/ Editing Block

0018-1565
Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing.
Image processor PCB

Reader image PDL image
processing block processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction Compression
Rotation Expansion
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block

F-3-6
3.3.5 Printer unit Output Image Processing

0018-1566

The image processor PCB processes the image data coming from the reader unit for output to the printer unit.
3-4
Chapter 3
Image processor PCB
Compression/expansion/editing block
Binary density conversion
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing
To DC controller PCB
F-3-7
3.4 Image Data Flow
3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions

0018-1567
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
Image processing block for reader unit
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-8
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

0018-1569
3-5
Chapter 3
Reader unit
image processor PCB
SDRAM
Data expansion
USB1.1
Data rotation
Resolution conversion
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
F-3-9
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission

0018-1570
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
SDRAM
Data compression
Data rotation
Data expansion
Image processing block for FAX
Modem board
F-3-10
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

0018-1571
3-6
Chapter 3
Modem board
Image processor PCB
Image processing block for fax
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-11
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

0018-1572
Ethernet
Image processor PCB
PDL Rendering processing block
SDRAM
Compression/expansion
/editing block
Processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-12
3-7
Chapter 3
MEMO:
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure The jumper plug is small. A needlenose pliers or tweezers may be useful in
this operation. To prevent short-circuit, avoid contact of the jumper pin to a
nearby metal through the tool.
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB
3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Image Processor 2) Detach the RAM cover [1].
PCB - 5 screws [2]
0018-1591

[1]
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Detach the rear left cover.
3.5.1.2 Removing the Image Processor PCB

0018-1592
1) Change the position of the jumper plug (JP100) [1] on the modem PCB
(capacitor PCB).
[2]
If disconnecting/connecting the modem PCB (capacitor PCB) without
implementing this operation, the SDRAM may be broken.
F-3-14
3) Detach the SDRAM. (page 3-11)Reference[Removing the SDRAM]
4) Detach the LAN cover [1].
- 6 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-3-13
[2]
F-3-15
5) Disconnect the connector [1] of the IP-LAN cable.
When turning off the main power switch and disconnecting the power plug
from the power outlet, the power is supplied between the SDRAM and the
super capacitor for image memory backup.
If the jumper plug (JP100) is disconnected with the image being backed up,
the contents in the memory are all cleared. Be sure to output all data in the
memory before disconnecting the jumper plug (JP100).
[1]
F-3-16
3-8
Chapter 3
6) Detach the modem PCB or the capacitor PCB [1].

In the case of the modem PCB
- 3 connectors [2]
- 2 screws [3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-3-17
In the case of the capacitor PCB
- 2 screws [3]
[2] [4] [3]
[3] F-3-20
9) Detach the cable guide [2] in the upward direction.
- 1 claw [1]
[2] [1]
[1] F-3-21
F-3-18 10) Open the core [1].
7) Disconnect the USB memory [1].
[1]
[1]
F-3-22
11) Detach the cable retainer [1].
F-3-19
8) Free the relay cable [1] and disconnect the connector [2].
- 1 edge saddle [3]
- 4 wire saddles [4]
3-9
Chapter 3
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-3-23
12) Detach the flexible cable guide [1].
- 3 screws [2]
[1] [2]
F-3-26
[2] If the image processor controller PCB [1] must be replaced, be sure to trans-
fer the following from the old to new PCB:
- SEND PCB [2]
- Counter PCB [3]
[1]
F-3-24
13) Detach the IP cover [1].
- 15 screws [2]
[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-3-27
3.5.2 SDRAM
[2]
F-3-25 3.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the SDRAM
14) Detach the image processor PCB [1]. 0018-1593
- 5 connectors [2] imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480

- 7 screws [3]
2) Change the position of the jumper plug (JP100) [1] on the modem PCB
(capacitor PCB).
If disconnecting/connecting the modem PCB (capacitor PCB) without

implementing this operation, the SDRAM may be broken.
3-10
Chapter 3
[1]
[2]
F-3-29
3.5.2.2 Removing the SDRAM

0018-1594
1) Release two lock levers [1] in the direction of arrow [A] and remove
SDRAM [2].
[1]
F-3-28
[A]
When turning off the main power switch and disconnecting the power plug
from the power outlet, the power is supplied between the SDRAM and the
super capacitor for image memory backup.
If the jumper plug (JP100) is disconnected with the image being backed up,
the contents in the memory are all cleared. Be sure to output all data in the
memory before disconnecting the jumper plug (JP100).
[A]
[1] [2]
F-3-30
MEMO:
The jumper plug is small. A needlenose pliers or tweezers may be useful in
this operation. To prevent short-circuit, avoid contact of the jumper pin to a
nearby metal through the tool.
3) Detach the RAM cover [1].

- 5 screws [2]
3-11
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System
Contents
Contents
4.1 Basic Constraction ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Major Components ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Control System Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original) .................................................................. 4-5
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original).................................................................. 4-6
4.3 Various Control ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System......................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)......................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-9
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction........................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction.................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .................................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.3.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection................................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.5.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.6 Image Processing........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.3.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction.....................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.1 Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass (Model equipped with ADF) ........................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.1.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass............................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.2.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3 Reader Motor.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.4.3.1 Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.4.4 Contact Sensor............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-19
4.4.4.1 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS).................................................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.4.4.2 Procedure after Replacing the CIS(Touch panel type) ................................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor........................................................................................................................................ 4-19
4.4.5.1 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor (Front/Rear).............................................................................................................. 4-19
4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.6.1 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor..................................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.7 Original Size Sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.7.1 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan Direction) ............................................................................................................................ 4-20
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan Direction)........................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.4.8 Reader Heater (option)............................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.8.1 Removing the Reader Heater (Right) ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Left) ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-21
Chapter 4
4.1 Basic Constraction
4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions

0018-1180
Major specifications, control methods, and functions of the original exposure system are summarized below.
T-4-1
Item Function/Method
Exposure light source LED
Original scan In BOOK mode: Original scan is performed by moving the contact image sensor (CIS).
When ADF is used: Original stream reading is performed with the contact image sensor
(CIS) fixed.
Scan resolution 600 dpi (vertical scan) x 600 dpi (horizontal scan) (Color send: 300 dpi horizontal scan)
Gradation 256
Carriage position Contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (SR401)

detection
Magnification range 50% to 200%
Vertical scan direction: Image processing is by image processor PCB

Horizontal scan direction:
Carriage movement speed change and image
BOOK mode:
processing by image processor PCB *1
Original feed speed change and image processing by
ADF mode:
image processor PCB *1
Lens Rod lens array
CMOS sensor Number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (incl. 7176 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 304 mm
CIS drive control Drive control by reader motor (M401)
Original size detection [1] BOOK mode:
Vertical scan direction: Detection by reflection type sensor (AB/INCH)
Horizontal scan direction: Detection by reflection type sensor (AB/INCH)
[2] When ADF is used
Width: Detection by original width sensor PCB in ADF
Length: Detection by photo sensor in ADF
*1 The control method depends on the magnification. For more details, refer to "Magnification Change".
4-1
Chapter 4
4.1.2 Major Components

0018-1181
Major components of the original exposure system are as follows:
[5]
[4] [6]
[3]
[2] [7]
[8]
[1]
[12]
[7] [9]
[11]
[10]
F-4-1
T-4-2
Component No. Function/Specification
[1] Copyboard cover open/close SR402 Photo interrupter: Detects the copyboard cover open/
sensor (Rear: SR402) close status. Starts detecting the original size when the
copyboard cover angle is 30 deg.
[2] Reader controller PCB - Controls drive of the reader unit and image processing.
[3] Original sensor 3 SR406 Detects the original size (for all destinations).
[4] Original sensor 4 SR407 Detects the original size (AB, INCH/AB).
[5] Original sensor 5 SR408 Detects the original size (INCH/A)
[6] Reader motor M401 Pulse motor: Controls drive of the carriage.
[7] Reader heater*1 - Prevents condensation inside the original glass.
[8] Original sensor 1 SR404 Detects the original size (AB, INCH/A, INCH/AB).
[9] Original sensor 2 SR405 Detects the original size (AB, A, INCH/AB)
[10] Contact image sensor (CIS) - Uses LEDs for indirect exposure (LED +
Photoconductor)
[11] CISHP sensor SR401 Photo interrupter: Detects the CIS position.
[12] Copyboard cover open/close SR403 Finishes detecting the original size when the
sensor copyboard cover angle is 5 deg.
*1 Service parts setting
4-2
Chapter 4
4.1.3 Control System Configuration

0018-1182
The control system configuration of the original exposure system is shown below.
[4] [5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1] 01
J4
2 J4 [8]
J40 J4 09
10
J4
03 12
08
J4 J4
04 07
J4J 11 J4
40 J4
5
J4
13
J4
06
[13]
[12]
[11] [9]
[10]
F-4-2
[1] Printer main body (Connected to the image processor PCB)
[2] Connected to ADF
[3] Connected to the power supply PCB
[4] Reader motor drive control
[5] Reader motor (M401)
[6] Reader controller PCB
[7] Original sensor (horizontal scan direction)
[8] Original sensor (vertical scan direction)
[9] Contact image sensor
[10] Image signal
[11] CISHP sensor (PS503)
[12] Copyboard cover open/close sensor (Front: SR403)
[13] Copyboard cover open/close sensor (Front: SR402)
4-3
Chapter 4
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB

0018-1183
The functional configuration of the reader controller PCB is shown below.
DC5V
DC3.3V DC24V
J401
J405 J404 J403 J402
J410 J409
J411 J412
IC9
IC4
IC2
IC1
J408
J413 IC5
J406 J407
F-4-3
T-4-3
Jack No. Function
J401 Supplies power (24 VDC) from the main body (printer).
J402 Supplies power (5 VC, 3.3 VDC) from the main body (printer).
J403 Communicates with the main body (printer) (to control the ADF).
J404 Communicates with the main body (printer).
J405 Connected to the copyboard open/close sensor.
J406 Connected to the contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor.
J407 Connected to the original sensor 1 and original sensor 2.
J408 Connected to the contact image sensor (CIS).
J409 Connected to the reader motor.
J410 Supplies power to the ADF.
J411 Communicates with the ADF (to drive the sensor).
J412 Communicates with the ADF (to drive the motor).
J413 Connected to the original sensor 3, original sensor 4, and original sensor 5.
4-4
Chapter 4
4.2 Basic Sequence
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on

0018-1184
Main power switch

ON
SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Shading
position position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-4
CISHP
sensor
Shading Leading edge

HP position of original
1. CIS position check
F-4-5
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original)
0018-1185
4-5
Chapter 4
Black shading/White shading

Start key
ON
STBY SCFW SCRW STBY

Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading

position of original of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-6
CISHP
sensor
Original glass reading Shading Leading edge Trailing edge

start position HP position of original of original
1. Moves to the start position

after black shading/white shading.
2. Original scan
3. Moves to the standby position
F-4-7
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original)
0018-1186
Black shading/White shading

Start key
ON
STBY SCRW SCFW STBY

Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Stream reading Trailing edge Shading
position position of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-8
CS HP
sensor
Original glass
Stream reading reading start Shading
start position position HP position
1. Black shading/
White shading/
Original scan
F-4-9
4-6
Chapter 4
4.3 Various Control
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
4.3.1.1 Outline
0018-1187
The machine's scanner system consists of the following components:
Reader motor
Reader controller
PCB [1] Carriage drive belt
Original glass
cover open/close
sensor (SR402)
Sensor
shading
plate
Forward
movement
[3]
[2] Backward
Original glass
movement
cover open/close Carriage
sensor (SR403)
Contact image
CISHP sensor (SR401) sensor (CIS)
Guide shaft
F-4-10
[1] Reader motor (M401) drive signal
Controls rotation/stop and rotational direction/speed of the reader motor.
[2] Contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (SR401) signal
Detects that the contact image sensor (CIS) is at the home position.
[3] Copyboard cover sensor (SR403 (front)/SR402 (rear)) signal
Detects the open/close status of the copyboard cover.
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control

0018-1188

The reader motor driver controls rotation/stop and rotational direction/speed of the reader motor based on the signals from IC2.
Reader controller PCB

3.3V +5V +24V
RTP3APWN
J409
RTP3BPWN B*
1
RTP3A
Motor B
IC2 2
RTP3B driver A M401
3
MO_STANDBY A*
4
MO_TORQUE
F-4-11
MEMO:
The scan speed of this machine is as follows:
Copy (100%): 118 mm/sec
Color send (300 dpi x 300 dpi): 28 mm/sec
4-7
Chapter 4
a. Forward Movement during Image Scan

During image scan, operation of the contact image sensor (CIS) is controlled by controlling the motor as shown below.
Start Leading edge Trailing edge

position of original of original Stop
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
Movement
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Movement distance
[1] Acceleration area: The motor accelerates to the speed specified for each mode.
[2] Runup area: A margin to stabilize the speed.
[3] Image read area: The image is read at a constant speed.
[4] Deceleration area: Upon detection of the trailing edge, the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.
F-4-12
b. Backward Movement after Image Scan
After image scan, the carriage moves back to the contact image sensor (CIS) shading position at the constant speed (118 mm/sec).
4-8
Chapter 4
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
4.3.2.1 Outline
0018-1189
The original is exposed to light and read using the contact image sensor (CIS) to read the image on a line-by-line basis.
T-4-4
Component Function
LED Illuminates the original.
Light guide Illuminates the entire image line with the LED light.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected by the original.
CMOS sensor array Receives the light that passed through the rod lens array.
Image read line
Light guide LED (R/G/B)
Original glass
Rod lens array

Scan direction
CMOS
sensor array
LED (R/G/B)
Light guide Rod lens array Light guide
LED
CCD LED
F-4-13
4-9
Chapter 4
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS

0018-1190
The flow of analog image processing performed by the contact image sensor (CIS) is as follows:
The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array.
- The light is received by the CMOS sensor array.
- The CMOS sensor array converts the received light to an electric signal and outputs it.
The CMOS sensor array consists of four channels (units).
Each channel is provided with an output correction table to output an image signal after performing gain correction for the input brightness signal.
1
ls
xe
pi
88
74
2
it
ircu
rc
rive CCD channel x 4
D
ls
3
xe
pi
72
18
F-4-14
- After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following steps to perform inter-channel output correction:
1) Enter the service mode.
Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional functions key on the operation panel.
2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE".
3) Press [OK].
4) Press the [2] key to display "SCAN TEST".
5) Press the [1] key to display "SHADING".
6) Press [OK].
After completion of the above procedure, the contact sensor output is compensated and parameters are set automatically.
After completion of automatic adjustment, "OK" is displayed.
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction

0018-1191
In the Book mode or when the ADF is used

In the vertical scan direction, the image is read at 100%. Magnification is changed by processing data on the image processor PCB.
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction

0018-1192
In the horizontal scan direction, magnification is changed as follows depending on the selected magnification rate:
1) When magnification is reduced to 50-99%
a. In the Book mode
Data is processed on the image processor PCB with the original scan speed held at 118 mm/sec.
b. When the ADF is used

The original feed speed is changed within the range of 118 mm/sec to 236 mm/sec depending on the selected magnification rate. Data is not processed on the image
processor PCB.
2) When magnification is increased to 100-200%

The original scan speed (in the Book mode)/original feed speed (when the ADF is used) is changed within the range of 118 mm/sec to 59 mm/sec depending on the
selected magnification rate. Data is not processed on the image processor PCB.
4-10
Chapter 4
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals
4.3.4.1 Outline
0018-1193
The original size is identified by the combination of presence and absence of output levels of the reflection type sensors as summarized in the tables below.
- Absence of paper: The light reflected from the reflection type sensor changes when the copyboard cover is open/close.
- Presence of paper: The light reflected from the reflection type sensor does not change when the copyboard cover is open/close.
This machine is provided with the following sensors. Locations of the sensors are shown below.
- Vertical scan direction: Reflection type photo sensors (2 locations for AB; 1 location for Inch)
- Horizontal scan direction: Reflection type photo sensors (2 locations for AB; 2 locations for Inch)
AB-Configration
Horizontal scan direction
Upper left corner
of original Index plate
Original sensor 3
Vertical scan direction Original sensor 4
B5R
A4R
Original sensor 1
B5 B4
Original sensor 2 A4 A3
Inch-Configration
Horizontal scan direction
Upper left corner
of original
Original sensor 3
Vertical scan direction
Original sensor 5
STMT-R
LTR-R LGL
Original sensor 1
LTR 11" 17"
F-4-15
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection

0018-1194
- In the BOOK mode

One sheet of original (A4R) is set and the copyboard cover (or ADF ) is closed.
1) Standby state
Original sensor: Turns off.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Copyboard cover
Copyboard glass
Reader unit Original sensor 1

Original sensor 2
F-4-16
4-11
Chapter 4
2) The copyboard cover opens (at an angle of more than 30o).

Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
F-4-17
3) The copyboard cover is closed (at an angle of 30 deg).
Original sensor: Turns on and original size identification process 1 is performed.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
30
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4 Original sensor 1/2

F-4-18
4) The copyboard cover is closed (at an angle of more than 5 deg but less than 30 deg)
Original sensor: Turns on and original size identification process 2 is performed.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
5 Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4 Original sensor 1/2

F-4-19
5) The original cover is closed (at an angle of 5 deg or less)
The original size is identified.
In identifying the original size, the data obtained in the original size identification process 1 is compared with the data obtained in the original size identification
process 2 to check whether these two pieces of data are identical.
Note that a wrong original size may be identified because the sensor output level does not change in the following cases:
- When the original is A3-sized black
- When the original is a book (its thickness does not allow the copyboard cover to close fully, making it difficult to detect the sensor level change).
- When the copyboard cover is not closed fully (the sensor level change is not detected after lapse of the above time-out time)
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Change absent
Change present
F-4-20
Before original size identification processes 1 and 2 are performed, the original size is detected with original sensors as follows:
AB-Configration Inch-Configration
Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original

size sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 3 sensor 4 size sensor 1 sensor 3 sensor 5
A3 11"X17"
A4 LTR
B4(8K)*1 LGL
B5(16K)*1 LTR-R
A4R No original
B5R(16K)*1
No original
:No original
:Change absent
F-4-21
4-12
Chapter 4
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control
4.3.5.1 Outline
0018-1195
The machine changes the original read position or corrects the read image depending on the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass or ADF platen
roller, thus preventing dust from showing up in the image. This control is performed only when the ADF is used and it is closed.
[Control Timing]
- At job end
- Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)
Main power
switch Start key
ON ON
WMUPR STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN
Dust detection control

F-4-22
[Description of Control]
- At job end (Dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the ADF platen roller surface at the read position for presence/absence of dust. After completion of a
job, dust detection is performed maximum six times in 3 point of A, B and C. First, dust detection is performed once at position A. If no dust is detected at position
A, dust detection is performed twice there. If no dust is detected, the original is scanned at position A. If dust is detected at position A, move to position B and dust
detection is performed twice at position B. If no dust is detected at position B, the original is scanned at position B. If dust is also detected at position B, move to
position C and dust detection is performed once at position C. If dust is also detected at position C, a relevant message is displayed on the operation panel. In this
case, move back to position A and the original is scanned at position A.
- At job start (Dust bypass)

Presence/absence of dust is detected at all points A, B, and C in this order at job end. The original is read at the point where least dust is detected.
A B C
F-4-23
4-13
Chapter 4
- Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)

The contact image sensor (CIS) does not move to detect dust.
The original is read at the position determined at job end or start. If presence of dust is detected there, the read image is corrected.
T-4-5
Point Description
A Read reference position
B out 0.5 mm from the reference position to the inside of the roller
C About 1.0 mm from the reference position to the inside of the roller
Platen roller
0.5mm 0.5mm
A B C
Stream
reading
glass Lens
Contact image sensor

LED (CIS)
F-4-24
4-14
Chapter 4
4.3.6 Image Processing
4.3.6.1 Outline
0018-1196
Major specifications and functions of the image processing system are as follows:
T-4-6
- CMOS sensor Number of lines: 1

Number of pixels: Total 7488 (incl. 7176 effective pixels)
Pixel size: 32 x 46.9 um
- Shading correction Shading correction: Made for each job.

Shading adjustment: Made in the Service mode.
Contact image
sensor (CIS) Reader controller PCB
Analog image processor Digital image processor
CMOS
sensor
Analog
A/D Shading Controller
image
conversion processing
processing
F-4-25
Functions of the image processing system are summarized below.
T-4-7
- Reader controller PCB CMOS sensor drive, analog image processing, A/D
conversion, and shading correction
The reader controller PCB is used to process images on a line-by-line basis. Its major functions are as follows:
1)Analog image processing
- CMOS sensor drive
- CMOS sensor output gain correction and offset correction
- CMOS sensor output A/D conversion
2)Digital image processing
- Shading correction
Contact image sensor (CIS)
CMOS sensor (1 line)
Reader controller PCB
Analog image signal IC2

CMOS sensor
Gain CMOS sensor control signal
IC1 correction drive control
data
Serial
Analog image Target communication
processing value I/F
A/D RAM
- Gain correction Digital
- Offset correction conversion image J309
Digital image
signal signal
Shading correction
10 8
F-4-26
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive

0018-1197
4-15
Chapter 4
The CMOS sensor used in this machine is a 1-line linear image sensor consisting of 7488 photocells. After completion of photoelectric conversion in the light-
receiving block, the signals are output to the AP circuit in the reader controller PCB in parallel for each channel (total four channels) of the CMOS sensor array.
CMOS sensor 4 CMOS sensor 3 CMOS sensor 1
Light receiving block
output
L L H H L H L H H H L
F-4-27
4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction

0018-1198

The analog video signals output from the CMOS sensor are corrected so that they will have a specific gain level (gain correction), and the output voltages generated
in the absence of incident light are also corrected so that they it will have a specific offset level (offset correction).
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion

0018-1199

After completion of the above corrections, the analog video signals are converted to digital signals corresponding to individual pixel voltage levels by the A/D
converter.
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline)

0018-1200

The CMOS sensor outputs are necessary even for the following reasons even when the density of the original is uniform:
(1) Variation in sensitivity among CMOS sensor pixels

(2) Variation in light intensity of rod lens array
The machine performs shading correction to even out the CMOS sensor output.
There are two types of shading correction: shading adjustment performed in the Service mode and shading correction performed for each job.
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment

0018-1201
The machine measures the density of the standard white plate, and stores the measured density data. It then processes the stored data to use it as the target value for
shading correction.
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction

0018-1202
The machine performs shading correction for each scan. It measures the density of the standard white plate, and compares the measured value with the target value
stored in the shading correction circuit to use the difference between the two as the shading correction value. The machine uses this shading correction value to
correct the variation among CMOS sensor pixels when scanning the original, thus evening out the image density level.
CMOS
sensor Characteristics
output after correction
Target Characteristics
value before correction
Measurement
value
White
Original density
Standard white plate
F-4-28
4-16
Chapter 4
4.4.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass

4.4 Parts Replacement Procedure (Model equipped with ADF)
0017-9926

4.4.1 Copyboard Glass After replacing the copyboard glass, enter the correction values (X, Y, Z) of
the standard white plate which are indicated on the back of the new copy-
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass board glass in the service mode.
0017-9925
Correction value (X): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.213
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 Correction value (Y): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.214
Correction value (Z): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.215
1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). Also, rewrite the values on the service label.
2) Remove the copyboard glass [1].
- Screws [2], 2 pcs.
- glass retainer [3].
820686679349
[1] [2] correcton correcton

va l u e ( X ) correcton va l u e ( Z )
va l u e ( Y )
F-4-30
4.4.1.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0017-9927
1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

2) Remove the glass retainer [1].
- Screws [2], 2 pcs
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
[2]
[3]
F-4-29
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following:
- Glass surface
- Standard white plate
Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image. If dirt is
found, remove it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1] [3]
F-4-31
- When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface. Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image.
If dirt is found, remove it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
- When installing the ADF reading glass, position the cut portion [1] of the
ADF reading glass sheet at the front-left corner.
[1]
F-4-32
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB
4.4.2.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB

0017-9928

4-17
Chapter 4
3) Detach the right cover (lower). 16) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the harness from the
4) Detach the right cover (Upper). edge saddle [2] and clamp [3]. And then remove the five screws [4].
5) Detach the left cover (rear).
6) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). [3] [2] [4]
7) Detach the small cover.
8) Disconnect the ground cable of the ADF harness.
9) Remove the ADF harness.
10) Detach the reader rear cover.
11) Remove the glass retainer.
12) Remove the copyboard glass.
MEMO:
This machine stores adjustment values in the image processor PCB, not the
reader controller PCB.
Accordingly, you need not input adjustment values after replacing the
reader controller PCB.
13) Detach the cover [1].

- Screw [2], 1 pcs [4] [1] [4]
F-4-36
[1] [2] 17) Go to the back of the machine, and then disconnect the four connectors
[1] from the reader controller PCB.
18) Remove the harness from the edge saddle/clamp [2].
19) Remove the flexible cable holder [3], and then disconnect the two flexi-
ble cables [4].
20) Remove the two screws [5].
[1] [2] [5]
F-4-33
14) Disconnect the connector [1] and flexible cable [2] from the leader con-
troller PCB, and then remove the harness from the edge saddle [3].
[2] [3]
[2] [1] [4] [3]
[1]
F-4-34 [5] [2]
15) Detach the cover [1].
F-4-37
- Screw [2], 1 pcs
21) Remove the flexible cable guide [1].
- Screws [2], 2 pcs
[2] [1] 22) Remove the reader controller PCB [3] together with the mount.
[3] [1]
F-4-35
[2]
F-4-38
4-18
Chapter 4
23) Remove the reader controller PCB [1] from the mount. 13) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow to move the
- Screws [2], 3 pcs contact sensor [2] to the position shown below.
[1] [1] [2]
F-4-41
2) Remove the rear side of the contact sensor [1] from the carriage.
3) Disconnect the flexible cable [2], and then remove the contact sensor [1].
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-39
4.4.3 Reader Motor
4.4.3.1 Removing the Scanner Motor

0018-0009

3) Detach the right cover (lower).
4) Detach the right cover (upper).
6) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). F-4-42
10) Detach the reader rear cover. When removing or installing the contact sensor unit, take care not to touch
11) Remove the scanner motor. the light guide and rod lens array.
- Connector [2], 1 pcs.
- Screw [3], 2 pcs.
- Spring [4], 1 pcs. Light guide
[1] [2]
Rod lens array
F-4-43
4.4.4.2 Procedure after Replacing the CIS(Touch panel

type)
0017-9931
[3] [4] [3] imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480

F-4-40
After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following
4.4.4 Contact Sensor steps to perform inter-channel output correction:
1) Enter the service mode.
Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional
4.4.4.1 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) functions key on the operation panel.
0017-9930
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE".
3) Press [OK].
1) Detach the rear cover. 4) Press the [2] key to display "SCAN TEST".
2) Open the front cover. 5) Press the [1] key to display "SHADING".
3) Detach the right cover (lower). 6) Press [OK].
4) Detach the right cover (upper). After completion of the above procedure, the contact sensor output is com-
5) Detach the left cover (rear). pensated and parameters are set automatically.
6) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). After completion of automatic adjustment, "OK" is displayed.
8) Disconnect the ground cable of the ADF harness. 4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor
10) Detach the reader rear cover. 4.4.5.1 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close
12) Remove the copyboard glass. Sensor (Front/Rear)
0017-9932
4-19
Chapter 4
2) Open the front cover. 4.4.7 Original Size Sensor

4) Detach the right cover (upper). 4.4.7.1 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan
6) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). Direction)
7) Detach the small cover. imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
0017-9934

10) Detach the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the copyboard glass.
11) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the screw [2].
3) detach the cover [1].
12) Remove the reusable band [3], and then remove the harness [4] from the - Screw [2], 1 pcs
sensor mount.
13) Remove the sensor mount [5].
14) Remove the sensor from the sensor mount. [1] [2]
[5] [1] [4]
F-4-46
[2]
4) Disconnect the flexible cable [1], and then detach the cover [2].
- Screw [3], 1 pcs
5) Pull the drive belt (front) [4] in the direction of the arrow to move the con-
tact sensor [5] to the left.
[3]
F-4-44
[5] [2] [3] [1]
4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor
4.4.6.1 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor

0017-9933

2) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass.
4) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow to move he con-
tact sensor [2] to the center.
5) Remove the contact sensor [3] together with the mount.
- Screw[4], 2 pcs
6) Remove the contact sensor HP sensor.
[1] [2] [4]

F-4-47
6) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the edge
saddle/clamp [2].
7) remove the original sensor (vertical scan direction) [3] together with the
mount.
- Screw [4], 3 pcs
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[4] [3]
F-4-48
F-4-45
4-20
Chapter 4
8) Remove the original sensor (vertical scan direction) [1]. 6) Remove the harness from the edge saddle/clamp [1], and then disconnect
- connector [2], 2 pcs the connector.
7) Remove the original sensor [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-49 F-4-52
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan 4.4.8 Reader Heater (option)
Direction)
0017-9935
4.4.8.1 Removing the Reader Heater (Right)

2) Remove the copyboard glass. 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
3) Detach the cover [1]. 2) remove the copyboard glass.
- Screw [2], 1 pcs 3) Detach the heater cover [1].
- Screw [2], 1 pcs
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-50
4) Disconnect the connector [1] from the reader controller PCB, and then re-
move the harness from the edge saddle [2].
5) Remove the original sensor [3] together with the mount. F-4-53
- Screw [4], 2 pcs 4) Remove the screw [1].
5) remove the reader heater (right) [2].
[1] [2] [4] - wire saddle [3], 1 pcs
- connector [4], 1 pcs
[2] [4] [3] [1]
[3]
F-4-51
F-4-54
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Left)

0017-9937

2) Detach the reader front cover.
3) Remove the glass retainer.
4) Remove the ADF reading glass.
4-21
Chapter 4
5) Remove the jump board [1].

- Screw [2], 1 pcs
[2] [1]
F-4-55
6) Remove the stream reading glass stay [1].
- Screw [2], 2 pcs
7) Pull the drive belt (front) [3] in the direction of the arrow to move the con-
tact sensor [4] to the center.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-4-56
4) Detach the heater cover [1].
- Screw [2], 1 pcs
[1] [2]
F-4-57
9) Remove the reader heater (left) [1].
- Connector [2], 1 pcs
- Screw [3], 1 pcs
[3] [1] [2]
F-4-58
4-22
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents

5.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism........................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.3 Main Components ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.4 Control System Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ...................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Horizontal Synchronization Control ............................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ........................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC)....................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.4.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control....................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.5 Controlling the Laser Shutter......................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5.1 Laser Shutter Control ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.6.1 Laser/Scanner Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.6.1.1 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................5-7
Chapter 5
5.1.1 Overview
0018-1203
The laser scanner unit consists of a laser driver, scanner motor, and others. It is controlled by the signals from the DC controller PCB.
The laser driver operates the laser diode to emit light in response to the laser control signals and video signals from the DC controller PCB.
Laser beams are emitted, through a collimator lens and cylindrical lens, to the hexahedral mirror rotating at a constant speed.
Laser beam reflected by the hexahedral mirror focus on the photoconductor drum via the imaging lens and loop-back mirrors installed before the hexahedral mirror.
When the hexahedral mirror rotates at a constant speed, the photoconductor drum is scanned with laser beams at a constant speed.
When the photoconductor drum rotates at a constant speed and the photoconductor is scanned with laser beams at a constant speed, a latent image is formed on the
photoconductor drum.
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism

0018-1204

T-5-1
Laser beam
Number of laser beams 2 beams
Scanner Motor
Type of motor DC brushless motor
Rotation control Constant speed rotaion control
Polygon Mirror
Number of facets 6 facets (40-mm dia.)
Control Mechanism
Synchronous control Horizontal (main scan) synchronization control
Light intensity control Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
Others Laser emission ON/OFF control
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control
5-1
Chapter 5
5.1.3 Main Components

0018-1205
[2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
F-5-1
T-5-2
Name Function
[1] Photoconductive drum Receives laser beams to form a latent image.
[2] Laser mirror 1 (loop-back mirror) Reflects a laser beam toward laser mirror 2.
[3] Laser mirror 2 (loop-back mirror) Reflects a laser beam toward the photoconductor drum.
[4] BD PCB Generates a BD signal.
[5] Polygonal mirror Scans the photoconductive drum with a laser beam in the main
scan direction.
[6] Laser unit Emits laser beams.
[7] BD mirror Reflects a laser beam toward the BD PCB.
5-2
Chapter 5
5.1.4 Control System Configuration

0018-1206
The laser exposure system is controlled mainly by the IC5 on the DC controller PCB.
Main control types are as follows:
[1] Laser emission ON/OFF control/video signal input
[2] Horizontal synchronization control
[3] Laser scanner motor control
[4] Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
DC Controller PCB
J314
J207
Image Processor
IC5
PCB
J206 J205
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
F-5-2
5-3
Chapter 5
5.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
5.2.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control

0018-1207
The purpose of this control is to turn ON/OFF the laser diode (LD) in response to video signals.
The DC controller PCB sends laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2), which are used to switch between laser driver operation modes, to the laser
driver IC along with video signals (VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, and /VDO2). The laser driver IC controls laser emission (ON/OFF) according to the combination of
CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2 signals.
The following table shows combinations of laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2).
T-5-3
Laser control signal Laser status Description

CTL2 CTL1 CTL0 Laser A Laser B
0 0 0 OFF OFF Laser control OFF
Video signal input Laser beams can be emitted in
1 1 1
enable response to video signals.
Forced emission of laser A (for
1 1 0 ON OFF
adjustment in factory)
Forced emission of laser B (for
1 0 1 OFF ON
adjustment in factory)
Forced emission of laser A and
1 0 0 ON ON laser B (for adjustment in
factory)
0 1 0 ON OFF APC over laser A
0 0 1 OFF ON APC over laser B
0 1 1 OFF OFF Forced stop of laser emission
5.2.2 Horizontal Synchronization Control

0018-1208

The purpose of this control is to adjust the position where scanning starts in the horizontal direction (main scan direction) of the image with reference to the hori-
zontal synchronization signal (/BD) sent from the BD sensor in the laser scanner. The horizontal synchronization signal is also used as a vertical synchronization
signal to recognize the leading edge of paper. Upon detection of arrival of the fed paper at the prescribed position, the DC controller PCB starts sending the /BD
signal to the image porcessor PCB. The image processor PCB recognizes the leading edge of paper at the start of the continuous /BD signal; it recognizes the trailing
edge of paper at the end of the continuous /BD signal.
MEMO:
About Generation of BD Signal
The BD sensor on the BD circuit board receives only the beam of laser B; it does not receive the beam of laser A. The BD signal is generated from the beam of laser A.
5-4
Chapter 5
5.3 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light
5.3.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC)

0018-1209
The purpose of this control is to monitor the laser beam emitted to the photodiode on the laser driver circuit board in order to adjust the light quantity.
5.4 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
5.4.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control

0018-1210
From the moment the laser scanner motor starts to the moment it reaches the target revolution speed, the revolution speed is controlled with reference to the laser
scanner motor revolution speed signal (FG signal). After the target revolution speed is reached, the revolution speed is controlled so that the BD cycle and the laser
scanner motor revolution cycle are in the same phase.
The revolution speed of the laser scanner motor is controlled using an acceleration signal (ACC signal) and deceleration signal (DEC signal).
DC Controller PCB
IC5
J205
/BD
P-DEC
P-ACC
P- FG
F-5-3
5-5
Chapter 5
5.5 Controlling the Laser Shutter
5.5.1 Laser Shutter Control

0018-1211
When the drum unit is drawn out, the interlocked laser shutter moves down, shutting off the laser beam path. When opening of the front cover or left door is detected,
the laser scanner motor and laser outputs turn off.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
OPEN CLOSE
[2] [2]
[1] [3] [1] [3]
[4] [4]
[5] [5]
F-5-4
Laser shutter control
[1] Laser shutter
[2] Laser mirror 1
[3] Laser mirror 2
[4] Polygonal mirror
[5] Laser beam
5-6
Chapter 5
5.6 Parts Replacement Procedure
5.6.1 Laser/Scanner Unit
5.6.1.1 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

0017-9939

4) Detach the delivery tray.
5) Remove the metal plate [1] and laser scanner unit [2].
- Sponge [3], 2 pcs
- Connector [4], 3 pcs
- Screw [5], 3 pcs
[5] [3] [5]
[2] [4] [1]

F-5-5
5-7
Chapter 6 Image Formation
Contents
Contents

6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System ................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System ......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Image Formation Process .............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Image Formation Process ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.3 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System ....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Primary Charging Bias Control.................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.3 Developing Bias Control.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.5 Secondary Transfer Mechanism .................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.2 Transfer Roller Bias Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.5.3 Static Eliminator Bias Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.1 Transfer Charging Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.6.1.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller.........................................................................................................................................................6-7
Chapter 6
6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System

0018-1212

T-6-1
Photosensitive drum
Drum type OPC drum
Drum diameter 3mm
Cleaning mechanism Cleaning blade
Processing speed 106.7mm/sec
Primary charging
Charging method Roller charging (AC + DC)
ng roller diameter 14mm
Transfer charging
Charging method Roller charging (DC)
Charging roller diameter 16mm
Developing assembly
Developing cylinder diameter 20mm
Developing method Dry, 1-component jumping (AC + DC)
Toner 1-component, negative toner
Remaining toner level detection Remaining toner level sensor (in toner cartridge)
Others
Separation method Static Eliminator + Curvature separation
Waste toner Collected in the toner cartridge.
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System

0018-1213
[2]
[1] [4]
[3]
Laser beam
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
Paper transport
path
F-6-1
[1] Photosensitive drum
[2] Cleaner blade
[3] Primary charging roller
[4] Toner cartridge
[5] Blade
[6] Developing cylinder
[7] Transfer charging roller
[8] Static eliminator
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Image Formation Process
6.2.1 Image Formation Process

0018-1214
The image formation system of this machine consists of toner, primary charging roller, developing unit, cartridge integrated with a drum, and transfer charging
roller, and so on.
The image formation process of this machine is composed of the following five blocks (7 steps):
[1] Electrostatic latent image formation block
Step 1: Primary charging (AC & Minus DC)
Step 2: Laser exposure
[2] Developing block
Step 3: Developing (AC & Minus DC bias)
[3] Transfer block
Step 4: Transfer (Plus DC)
Step 5: Separation (Minus DC)
[4] Fixing block
Step 6: Fixing (Minus DC bias)
[5] Drum cleaning block
Step 7: Drum cleaning
4. Fixing block 6. Fixing Delivery
5. Drum cleaning block

7. Drum cleaning
1. Primary charging 1. Electrostatic latent

image formation block
5. Separation
3. Transfer block 2. Laser beam exposure
4. Transfer
3. Development 2. Developing block
Registration
Manual feed pickup
Rotational direction of
photosensitive drum
Paper flow
Cassette pickup
F-6-2
6.3 Basic Sequence
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation

0018-1215

The basic sequence of operation of this machine is explained below.
For more details, refer to the explanation of various types of bias control.
- At power-on (when the door is opened/closed)
The main motor starts rotating after completion of the error check.
To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias voltage is held higher than usual during application of the developing AC bias voltage.
Power ON
or
Door open/close
WAIT STBY
Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Cleaning bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias
F-6-3
6-2
Chapter 6
- During printing
To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias is held higher than usual except during image formation.
To prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum from sticking to the transfer charging roller, the transfer roller bias which is lower than that applied
during printing the is applied at the prescribed timing.
Print command
is received
STBY INTR PRINT [1] PRINT

Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias

F-6-4
[1] Between sheets
- At the end of printing

To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias is held higher than usual except during image formation.
To prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum from sticking to the transfer charging roller, the transfer roller bias which is lower than that applied
during printing the is applied at the prescribed timing.
PRINT [1] LSTR STBY
Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Cleaning bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias
F-6-5
[1] Time until post-rotation
6-3
Chapter 6
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System
6.4.1 Outline
0018-1222
The voltage generated by superimposing the DC voltage over the AC voltage is applied to the primary charging roller and developing cylinder, and a positive or
negative DC voltage is applied to the transfer charging roller according to the instruction of the CPU on the DC controller PCB.
The primary DC bias and developing DC bias are changed according to the image density information sent from the image processor PCB, thus adjusting the image
density.
A negative DC voltage is applied to the electrostatic discharge needle and fixing film.
DC controller High-voltage power

PCB supply PCB
J214 J100 Fixing film bias JP5/JP6
ASIC circuit
JP3/JP4
Primary bias
circuit
CPU Static eliminator JP9/JP10

bias circuit
Tr3
Transfer bias circuit
Developing bias JP7/JP8

circuit
Remaining toner JP1/JP2

level detection circuit
F-6-6
6.4.2 Primary Charging Bias Control

0018-1224
With the primary charging bias method, the drum is charged directly by the charging roller. In addition to a DC bias, an AC bias is applied to the primary charging
roller to stabilize charging. When the drum is charged, both AC and DC biases are applied. When the drum is discharged, only the AC bias is applied.
The ASIC on the DC controller PCB outputs the primary bias drive signal (/PRACFOT), primary AC bias ON/OFF signal (/PRACON), primary DC bias drive
signal (/PRDCFOT), and primary DC bias output level signal (/PRDCPWM) to apply the voltage generated by superimposing the primary AC bias over the primary
DC bias to the primary charging roller.
The primary AC bias is detected by the primary AC bias current detection circuit, and is fed back to the AC generator circuit via the comparison circuit.
The primary DC bias is detected by the primary DC bias current detection circuit, and is fed back to the DC generator circuit via the comparison circuit. Thus, this
machine controls the primary DC bias voltage. The primary DC bias voltage changes with the developing DC bias voltage according to the image density informa-
tion sent from the image processor PCB.
DC controller PCB High-voltage power supply PCB
J214 J100 Primary bias circuit
/PRDCPWM Compariso Primary DC bias voltage

circuit detection circuit
/PRDCFOT DC generation circuit

JP3/JP4
Superimposition
ASIC To primary
/PRACFOT
AC generation circuit charging roller
/PRACON Comparison Primary AC bias current

/PRACMONI
CPU
F-6-7
6-4
Chapter 6
6.4.3 Developing Bias Control

0018-1225
A DC bias and an AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.

The ASIC on the DC controller PCB outputs the developing AC bias drive signal (/DVACFOT), developing AC bias ON/OFF signal (/DVACON), developing DC
bias drive signal (/DVDCFOT), and developing DC bias output level signal (/DVDCPWM) to apply the voltage generated by superimposing the developing AC
bias over the developing DC bias to the developing cylinder.
To prevent fogging of the drum, a DC bias higher than usual applied except during image formation and when the developing AC bias is applied for warm-up
rotation.
The developing DC bias is detected by the developing DC bias detection circuit, and is fed back to the DC generation circuit via the comparison circuit, thus con-
trolling the DC bias voltage. The developing DC bias voltage changes with the primary DC bias voltage according to the image density information sent from the
image processor PCB.
The remaining toner level is detected during warm-up rotation and when the developing AC bias is applied for printing. The remaining toner level detection signal
(TNRCHKT) sampled from the antenna (for remaining toner level check) in the developing assembly is compared with the reference signal (TNRCHKD) received
from the developing bias detection circuit.
DC controller High-voltage power supply PCB

PCB
Developing bias circuit
/DVDCPWM Comparison Developing DC bias

ASIC
circuit voltage detection circuit
DC generation circuit
/DVDCFOT
JP7/JP8
Superimposition
/DVACFOT To developing
/DVACON AC generation circuit cylinder
Developing AC bias
TNRCHKD current detection circuit
CPU
TNRCHKT Remaining toner level JP1/JP2

detection circuit
From remaining
toner level sensor
F-6-8
6.5 Secondary Transfer Mechanism
6.5.1 Outline
0018-1227
The transfer unit consists of a transfer roller [1] and an static eliminator [2].
The transfer roller is driven by the photosensitive drum.
The static eliminator is biased to separate paper from the drum.
[2]
[1]
F-6-9
6-5
Chapter 6
6.5.2 Transfer Roller Bias Control

0018-1229
A negative bias, sheet-to-sheet bias, or positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller according to the type of sequence.
The negative bias is applied at the prescribed timing to moves the toner from the transfer charging roller to the photosensitive drum for cleaning.
The sheet-to-sheet bias is lower than that applied during printing and it is applied at the prescribed timing to prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum
from adhering to the transfer charging roller.
The positive bias is applied to transfer toner images from the photosensitive drum to paper.
DC High-voltage power supply PCB

controller
PCB Transfer bias circuit
/TRPWM Comparison Positive current

ASIC
/TRPFOT Positive voltage

generation circuit
Tr3
TRCHG Constant current/voltage Superimposition
switching circuit To transfer
/TRNFOT Negative voltage charging roller
generation circuit
CPU TRCRNT
F-6-10
6.5.3 Static Eliminator Bias Control

0018-1231
Two types of biases, a high-output bias and a low-output bias, are applied to the static eliminator using the static eliminator bias drive signal (/DISDCFOT) and
static eliminator bias output level signal (/DSCPWM) issued from the DC controller PCB according to the type of the print sequence, thus allowing the printing
paper to separate easily from the photosensitive drum.
DC controller High-voltage power supply PCB

PCB
Static eliminator bias circuit
ASIC
/DSCPWM Static eliminator bias
/DISDCFOT generation circuit
JP9/JP10
To static eliminator
CPU
F-6-11
6-6
Chapter 6
6.6.1 Transfer Charging Roller
6.6.1.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller

0017-9941
1) Open the left door.

2) Remove the transfer charging roller [1]
[1]
F-6-12
Do not touch the transfer charging roller surface.
MEMO:
The transfer charging roller bearing [1] could be the same shape as the
figure below. If so, detach the transfer charging roller towards the arrow [3]
and [4]. Gear [5] will come off when detaching the transfer charging roller.
Be careful not to lose the gear [5]. When attaching the transfer charging
roller, apply transfer charging roller D cut[6] to gear [5] D cut.
[5] [2]
[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
6-7
Chapter 7 Pickup and Feed System
Contents
Contents
7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units............................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing (Printer on its own) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing (Finisher)..................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit/Finisher)................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit) .............................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex/Inner 2Way Tray).......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray) ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2 Detection Jams............................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at First Delivery Sensor/Wound Paper Jam at Fixing Assembly) ..................7-7
7.2.2 Stationary Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly ...............................................................................................................................................................7-7
7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor/Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor)
7-7
7.2.3 Other Jams.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam ...............................................................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.3 Cassette Pickup Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection .................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup ............................................................................................................... 7-12
7.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly..................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.2 Cassette Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches .............................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor....................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.4.1 Removing the Retry Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.5 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.6 Separation Roller........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.5.6.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers.................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.5.7 Manual Pickup Roller................................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.5.8 Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.5.8.1 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/Absence Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.5.9 Manual Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5.9.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid................................................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.5.10 Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.10.1 Removing the Registration Roller .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.5.11 Registration Clutch................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.11.1 Removing the Registration Clutch ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.5.12 Separation Pad.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.12.1 Removing the Separation Pad..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.5.13 Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-17
7.5.13.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 7-17
Chapter 7
7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods

0018-1233
Functions and operation methods of the pickup/feeding system are as follows:

T-7-1
Item Function/Operation method

Pickup method Cassette Claw and separation retard
Multi manual feed tray Separation pad
Plain paper 300 sheets (64g/m2)
Paper stack Cassette 260 sheets (75g/m2)
250 sheets (80g/m2)
120 sheets (90g/m2)
Plain paper (*1)
Large 50 sheets (64g/m2)
Half 100 sheets (64g/m2)
Small 100 sheets (64g/m2)
Thick paper (*1)
Multi manual feed tray Label sheet
1 sheet
OHP
50 sheets
Envelope
10 sheets
Postcard
40 sheets
Paper size Setting Cassette Set by user
Multi manual feed tray Set by user
Delivery option Finisher-U2
Inner 2Way Tray-E2
Pickup option Cassette Feeding Module-P1
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1
*1. Large: A3/B4/LDR/LGL, Half: A4/B5/A4R/B5R/LTR/LTRR, Small: A5/A5R/STMT/STMTR
7-1
Chapter 7
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units

0018-1234
Locations of main units of the pickup/feeding system are shown blow.
]8[
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-1
[1] Pickup assembly
[2] Manual feed pickup assembly
[3] Registration roller
[4] Transfer assembly
[5] Duplex paper feed assembly
[6] Fixing assembly
[7] First delivery assembly
[8] Second delivery assembly (option)
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing

0018-1235
The layout of the rollers used in the pickup/feeding system is shown below.
[10] [11] [12]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

F-7-2
[1] Pickup roller
[2] Cassette pickup roller
7-2
Chapter 7
[3] Feed roller 1

[4] Multi pickup roller
[5] Registration roller
[6] Duplex paper feed roller 3
[7] Transfer roller
[8] Fixing roller
[11] Second delivery roller
[12] First delivery roller
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing (Printer on its own)

0018-1236
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-3
[1] Cassette pickup
[2] Manual feed pickup
[3] Delivery to copy tray 1
7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing (Finisher)

0018-1237
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-4
[1] Cassette pickup
[3] Finisher (option)
7-3
Chapter 7
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit/Finisher)

0018-1238
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-7-5
[1] Cassette pickup
[3] Duples paper feed assembly
[4] Finisher (option)
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex Unit)

0018-1239
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-7-6
[1] Cassette pickup
7-4
Chapter 7
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing (Duplex/Inner 2Way Tray)

0018-1240
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-7
[1] Cassette pickup
[4] Delivery to copy tray 2 (option)
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray)

0018-1241
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-8
[1] Cassette pickup
[4] Delivery to copy tray 2 (option)
7-5
Chapter 7
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing

0018-1242
The layout of the sensors used in the pickup/feeding system is shown below.
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

F-7-9
[1] Cassette 1 paper presence/absence sensor (SR204)
[2] Registration sensor (SR209)
[3] Manual feed paper presence/absence sensor (SR208)
[4] Duplex paper sensor 2 (SR1003)
[5] Fixed paper delivery sensor (SR202)
[6] First delivery sensor (SR203)
[7] Duplex paper sensor 1 (SR1002)
[8] Second delivery sensor (SR1102) (option)
7-6
Chapter 7
7.2 Detection Jams
7.2.1 Delay Jams
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly

0018-1244
Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly

The registration sensor cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the jam detection time interval after paper pickup started.
T-7-2
Sensor/Solenoid
Registration sensor (SR209)
Pickup solenoid (SL202)
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at First Delivery Sensor/Wound Paper Jam at Fixing
Assembly)
0018-1245
Paper Leading Edge Jam at First Delivery Sensor

The first delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within the prescribed time after the registration clutch has been turned on.
T-7-3
Sensor/Registration clutch
First delivery sensor (SR203)
Registration clutch (CL203)
Wound Paper Jam at Fuser

The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within the prescribed time after the registration clutch has been turned on.
T-7-4
Sensor/Registration clutch
Fixing delivery sensor (SR202)
Registration clutch (CL203)
7.2.2 Stationary Jams
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly

0018-1246

Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly
The registration sensor does not detect absence of paper within the prescribed time before the next leading edge of fed paper reaches the registration sensor.
T-7-5
Sensor
Registration sensor(SR209)
7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor/Stationary Jam
at First Delivery Sensor)
0018-1247
Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor

The first delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the prescribed time after the registration sensor has been turned off.
T-7-6
Sensor
Registration sensor (SR209)
Stationary Jam at First Delivery Sensor

The first delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the prescribed time after it has detected the leading edge of paper.
7-7
Chapter 7
T-7-7
Sensor
7.2.3 Other Jams
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam

0018-1248
Door Open Jam

The door is opened when paper to be printed is in the paper feed path.
7-8
Chapter 7
7.3 Cassette Pickup Unit
7.3.1 Overview
0018-1249
The paper picked up from the cassette is fed to the registration roller using the vertical path roller driven by the main motor (M204). The registration roller is not
rotating when paper reaches there, so an arch is formed at the leading of the paper to prevent skewing. The DC controller PCB turns on the registration clutch
(CL203) at the prescribed timing to transfer the main motor rotation to the registration roller, thus feeding the paper to the delivery tray through the transfer, sepa-
ration, fixing, and delivery assemblies.
F-7-10
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation

0018-1250
Rotation of the pickup roller is controlled by the pickup roller drive gear, which transfers the drive power of the main motor (M204) to the pickup roller drive shaft,
and the cassette pickup solenoid (SL202). When the main motor starts rotating, the interlocked relay gear also starts rotating. At this time, the pickup roller drive
gear is not driven because its toothless portion is positioned at the relay gear and therefore these gears are not engaged with each other.
1) The DC controller PCB issues a cassette pickup solenoid drive signal (CSTFD). When the solenoid is turned on, the control arm pushes the cam to rotate the
pickup roller drive gear slightly.
F-7-11
7-9
Chapter 7
2) When the pickup roller drive gear is engaged with the pickup roller shaft gear, drive power is transferred to the pickup roller shaft gear and consequently the
pickup roller starts rotating.
F-7-12
3) When the feed roller drive gear is engaged with the feed roller shaft gear, drive power is transferred to the feed roller shaft gear and consequently the feed roller
starts rotating.
4) When the pickup roller rotates once, the toothless portion of the pickup roller drive gear comes to the position of the relay gear and consequently drive power of
the main motor is not transferred, stopping the rotation of pickup and feed rollers.
5) The picked up paper is fed to the registration roller through the vertical path roller.
F-7-13
7-10
Chapter 7
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection

0018-1251
The size of the paper in the cassette is detected by the DC controller PCB when the user changes the position of the cassette paper size lever. When the cassette is
inserted in the iR host machine, the paper size lever pushes the paper size switches provided in the iR host machine to allow the DC controller PCB to detect presence
of the cassette and the size of paper. Paper size switches are arranged as shown below. Paper sizes are determined by the combinations of the switches pushed by
the paper size lever.
PSIZE4 PSIZE1
PSIZE3 PSIZE2
F-7-14
T-7-8
A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R LGL 11x17 LTR LTRR STMT U1 U2 U3
PSIZE1
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PSIZE2
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
PSIZE3
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
PSIZE4
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
ON:The push switch is pushed.

OFF:The push switch is not pushed.
*:Not used.
7-11
Chapter 7
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit
7.4.1 Overview
0018-1252
a. Multi Manual feed Pickup Control

The manual feed pickup mechanism picks up sheets of paper in succession from the multi manual feed tray. The sheets of paper stacked in the tray are raised against
the manual feed pickup roller by the inner plate. The manual feed pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M204) via the manual feed pickup solenoid (SL202)
and gears. Only one sheet of paper is picked up by the combination of the manual feed pickup roller and manual feed pickup paper separation pad, and then fed to
the registration roller. These operations are performed for each sheet to be picked. The user must set the size of the paper in the multi manual feed tray using the
operation panel, or the user must register a fixed size in the user mode.
F-7-15
b. Inner Plate Lift Operation
During standby, the inner plate is at the down position with it held by the cams provided at the front and back of the manual feed pickup roller shaft. Rotation of
the pickup roller rotates the interlocked cams to lift the inner plate, raising the sheets of paper (loaded in the manual feed tray) against the manual feed pickup roller.
On the opposite side of the pickup roller is mounted a separation pad that separates only one sheet of paper from others and feeds it to the next section.
c. Manual feed Tray Pickup Drive Mechanism
pickup solenoid drive signal (MFPD) sent from the DC controller PCB. Rotation of the main motor drives the pickup drive power transfer gear. The DC controller
PCB issues a manual feed pickup solenoid drive signal (MFPD). When the solenoid turns on, the stopper operates to rotate the pickup roller once. Next, the stopper
operates again to stop rotation of the pickup roller.
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup

0018-1253
Paper pickup operation ends when paper is pressed against the registration roller. After this, the registration roller starts rotating and the multi manual feed pickup
clutch turns on. This clutch turns off after feeding the paper by the distance equivalent to the paper size - 126.7 mm (*1) - 5 mm (*2).
*1. Distance that paper is fed from the multi pickup roller to the point where the registration sensor turns on.
*2. Paper is post-fed to the point which is 5 mm to the training edge.
When the paper size is not specified, paper is post-fed by the distance equivalent to the multi paper feed enabled size (148 mm in longitudinal direction).
Minimum post-feed distance: 148 mm - 126.7 mm - 5 mm = 16.3 mm
7-12
Chapter 7
4) Remove the cassette paper presence/absence sensor [1].

- Connector [2], 1 pc.
[2] [1]
7.5.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly

0017-9943
1) Detach the lower-left cover.

2) Detach the cassette rear cover.
3) Remove the cassette pickup assembly [1].
- Screw [2], 5 pcs.
- Screw with toothed washer [3], 1pc .
- Connector [4], 3pcs.
[4] F-7-17
[3] 7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor
[2] 7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches

0017-9944
1) Remove the paper size switches [1].

- Screw [2], 1 pc.
[1] [2]
[4] F-7-18
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor

[2] [1]
F-7-16
7.5.4.1 Removing the Retry Sensor
0017-9945

Install the cassette pickup assembly with the ground plate [1] outside the 1) Detach the lower-left cover.
side plate. 2) Detach the cassette rear cover.
3) Remove the cassette pickup.
4) Remove the retry sensor [1].
[2] [1]
[1]
7.5.2 Cassette Paper Sensor
7.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence F-7-19

Sensor
0017-9946 7.5.5 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
1) Detach the lower-left cover. 7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid
0017-9948

1) Detach the lower-left cover.
7-13
Chapter 7
4) Remove the cassette pickup solenoid [1]. 5) Remove the feed guide [1].
- Harness [2], 1 pc. - Screw [2], 2 pcs.
- Wire saddles [3], 2 pcs.
- Screw [4], 1 pc. [1]
[2] [3] [4] [1] [2]

F-7-20 F-7-23
6) Remove the multi-paper roller [1].
7.5.6 Separation Roller - Bearing [1], 1 pc.
7.5.6.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers [1]

0017-9956
1) Remove the cassette.

2) Open the lower-left cover.
3) Lower the separation roller [1] as shown below, and then remove the sep-
aration roller [1] and feed roller [3] by holding the claws [2] of the roller
collars.
[3]
[2]
F-7-24
When installing the multifeeder pickup roller, pay attention to the

orientation.
Left-side axis: [1] Long Right-side axis: Short [2]
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
F-7-21
7.5.7 Manual Pickup Roller
7.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller

0017-9950

2) Turn the developer pressure release lever clockwise, and then open the left
door.
3) Draw out the drum unit.
4) Remove the transfer registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[2] 7.5.8 Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor
7.5.8.1 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/

Absence Sensor
0017-9952

door.
[1] [2]
F-7-22
7-14
Chapter 7
4) Remove the transfer registration unit [1]. 4) Remove the transfer registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs. - Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[2] [2]
[1] [2] [1] [2]

F-7-25 F-7-28
5) Remove the feed guide [1]. 5) Remove the feed guide [1].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
F-7-26 F-7-29
6) Remove the multifeeder paper presence/absence sensor [1]. 6) Detach the multifeeder connector cover [1].
- Claw [2], 2 pcs. - Connector [2], 3 pcs.
[1] [3] [2]
[2]
F-7-27
7.5.9 Manual Pickup Solenoid
7.5.9.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid

0017-9953

door. [1]
3) Draw out the drum unit. F-7-30
7-15
Chapter 7
7) Remove the multifeeder unit [1]. 4) Remove the two metal plates [1], and remove the registration roller [2].
[1]
[3] [1] [2]

[2]
F-7-31
8) Remove the harness from the guide.
- connector [1], 1 pc.
9) Remove the multifeeder pickup solenoid [2].
- Screw [3], 1 pc.
[2] [3] [1]

F-7-33
7.5.11 Registration Clutch
7.5.11.1 Removing the Registration Clutch

0017-9955
1)Detach the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the three
wire saddles [2].
3) Remove the resin ring [3], and then remove the registration clutch [4].
[2] [3] [1]
F-7-32
[1] [4]
7.5.10 Registration Roller
7.5.10.1 Removing the Registration Roller

0017-9954

door.
[2] [3]
F-7-34
7.5.12 Separation Pad
7.5.12.1 Removing the Separation Pad

0017-9957

door.
7-16
Chapter 7
4) Remove the transfer registration unit [1]. 3) With the pickup roller [1] down, insert a screwdriver [2] or the like from
- Screw [2], 4 pcs. the left side of the host machine as shown below.
4) Remove the pickup roller [3] with your fingers as shown below.
[2]
[1] [2]
F-7-38
[1] [2]
F-7-35
5) Remove the feed guide [1].
- Screw [2], 2 pcs.
[3]
[1]
F-7-39
[2]
F-7-36
6) Remove the multi-paper roller.
7) I use a minus screwdriver and remove separation pad [1].
[1]
F-7-37
7.5.13 Pickup Roller
7.5.13.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller

0017-9942
1) Remove the cassette.

2) Open the lower-left cover.
7-17
Chapter 8 Fixing System
Contents
Contents

8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms and Functions .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film..................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed .................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature .................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature.......................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode........................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage Paper......................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper .......................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.3 Protection Function........................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.3.1 Protective Functions..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.4.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................8-7
8.4.2 Fixing Film Unit........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................8-8
8.4.3 Fixing Pressure Roller................................................................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.4.3.1 Removing the Pressure Roller....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Paper Sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.5.1 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-12
Chapter 8
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms and Functions

0018-1254

T-8-1
Item Function/Method
Fixing method by fixing film + pressure roller
Fixing heater Unitary flat heater incorporating both main heater and sub heater
Fixing temperature detection [1] Main thermistor (TH1): Temperature control and fault detection
[2] Sub thermistor (TH2): Fault detection
[3] Thermo-switch (TP1): Fault detection
Fixing temperature control [1] Warm-up temperature control
[2] Normal temperature control
[3] Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
Protection functions [1] Detection of error in temperature control by thermistor
[2] Detection of temperature rise by thermo-switch
Fixing drive control Speed control by detecting fixing film rotation
8-1
Chapter 8
8.1.2 Major Components

0018-1255
M201 [1]
SR202
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-8-1
[1] Inner delivery roller [4] Pressure roller

[2] Fixing film speed sensor SR202 Fixing delivery sensor
[3] Fixing film unit M201 Fixing drive motor
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
F-8-2
[1] Fixing film speed sensor [4] Thermo-switch (TP1)
[2] Sub thermistor (TH2) [5] Pressure roller
[3] Main thermistor (TH1) [6] Fixing film unit
8-2
Chapter 8
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed

0018-1256
The rotation cycle is measured with reference to the mark provided at the end of the fixing film to rotate the fixing drive motor at the optimum speed, thus keeping
the paper feed speed constant. Measurement of the cycle of each rotation (excluding the initial rotation and post-rotation) of the fixing drive motor starts when 1
second lapses after the motor starts rotating and ends when the trailing edge of the last sheet has passed through the fixing nipper.
[1] FILM_SENS
[2]
J217
DC Controller PCB
F-8-3
[1] Film rotation detection signal (FILM_SENS): Set to 1 and 0 alternately when the fixing film is rotating.
[2] Rotation cycle measurement mark
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature
8.2.2.1 Outline
0018-1257
The surface temperature of the fixing heater is detected to control the fixing heater drive signal so that the fixing heater temperature becomes the target temperature.
The temperature of the fixing heater is detected by the thermistor (TH1/TH2) provided on the fixing heater. If the surface temperature rises, the resistance of the
thermistor lowers and the voltage of the fixing heater temperature detection signal (M_TH/S_TH) also lowers.
The CPU on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the M_TH/S_TH signal to control the fixing heater 1 drive signal (H1DRV) and fixing heater 2 drive signal
(H2DRV). These two voltages are generated based on the zero crossing detection signal which is output from the heater control circuit. The CPU controls these two
signals to adjust the fixing heater temperature to the prescribed value.
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature

0018-1258
This machine performs fixing temperature control according to the fixing heater temperature as mentioned below.
1) Warm-up temperature control
Upon receipt of a print command from the DC controller, the fixing heater heats to the temperature below the target paper-present section temperature.
2) Paper-present section temperature control
The fixing heater temperature is adjusted to the target paper-present section temperature according to the combination of the paper size, number of sheets fed,
fixing mode, and temperature detected by the fixing main thermistor.
3) Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
The fixing heater temperature is held relatively below the target paper-present section temperature to prevent the paper-absent section temperature from rising
between sheets.
4) Down sequence
The temperature may detect an abnormally high temperature during continuous printing. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or higher than 275
deg C, the sheet-to-sheet distance is increased to prevent the paper-absent section temperature from rising. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to
or lower than 220 deg C in the down sequence, normal control resumes.
5) Cooling mode
If printing is performed using wider sheets (*1) after printing is performed using narrower sheets in the continuous print mode, fixing offset may occur due to
the difference in temperature between the edge and center. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or higher than 130 deg C, paper feed and printing
stop to prevent the temperature from rising at the edge. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or lower than 130 deg C or two or more minutes lapse,
normal control resumes.
*1: The large size is a paper of which the width is 10 mm larger than the previous job.
8-3
Chapter 8
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode

0018-1301
This machine controls the fixing temperature according to the "media type" selected in the user mode and the "target temperature" set in the "special mode."
The correspondence between each mode and target temperature is as follows:
T-8-2
Fixing mode Paper type Target initial fixing Initial number of sheets Condition
temperature (*1) (*2)
Normal Plain paper (colored paper/ 201 deg C 1-12 (A4/LTR) Special Mode P: Off
recycled paper/label sheet (64-80
g/m2) 191 deg C 1-12 (A4/LTR) Special Mode P: Medium
181 deg C 1-12 (A4/LTR) Special Mode P: High
Rough Paper Lo Heavy paper 1 206 deg C 1-12 (A4/LTR)

(81-90 g/m2)
Heavy paper 2
(91-105g/m2)
Rough Paper Heavy paper 3 220 deg C 1-25 (A4/LTR)

(106-128g/m2)
Super rough paper Bond paper 220 deg C 1-100 (A4/LTR) Bond SP. FIX. Mode: OFF
Super rough paper Hi Bond paper 220 deg C 1-100 (A4/LTR) Bond SP. FIX. Mode: ON
Postcard Postcard 220 deg C 1-12 Fix. Unit Offset: OFF

Postcard H Postcard 220 deg C 1-7 Fix. Unit Offset: 1 or 2
Envelope Envelope 220 deg C 1-10
OHP OHP 181 deg C 1-12 (A4/LTR)
*1: Target fixing temperature at startup. When the initial temperature of the fixing unit is high, the target temperature is lowered. In the continuous copy mode, the
target temperature is lowered in 5 deg C steps.
*2: Number of sheets controlled at the initial target temperature. If it is exceeded, the target temperature is lowered. The prescribed number of sheets varies with
the paper size.
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage Paper
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper

0018-1304
The paper passage detection mechanism of the fixing unit is shown below.
DC Controller PCB
J217-12
EXP_P_SNS
SR502
F-8-4
If a delay jam is detected by the fixing delivery sensor (SR202), the fixing motor is stopped immediately to prevent paper from winding around the fixing roller.
8-4
Chapter 8
8.3 Protection Function
8.3.1 Protective Functions

0018-1305
AC
DC Power supply PCB DC Controller PCB
F1 F2
NF NF
P1
SW1
Low voltage power
+3.3V, +5.1V, +24V,+24VR
supply circuit
J11 J215 CPU
Zero crossing -15 ZEROX -3
circuit
Heater drive circuit J11 J215
-16 RLDRV -2
Relay -13 H1DRV -5 ASIC
circuit -12 H2DRV -6
RL1 J217
GND -6 High temp.
detection circuit
GND -5
Heater trigger
S_TH -4
circuit
High temp.
detection circuit
J13
-1
-2
-3
GND -3
M_TH -2
THCNCT -1 Connecting
Fixing unit detection
circuit
TH2 TH1
J31 TP1
-1
H2
-2
H1
F-8-5
Protection Functions
This machine is provided with the following four protection functions to prevent the fixing heater from overheating:
1) The CPU monitors the thermistor (TH1) voltage. If the thermistor (TH1) voltage is abnormal, the CPU judges that the fixing heater is faulty and turns off the
relay (RL1). At the same time, the CPU notifies the DC controller of occurrence of the fixing heater failure.
2) If the temperature of the fixing heater rises abnormally and the thermistor (TH1) detects a voltage lower than about 0.7 V (equivalent of 240 deg C), the fixing
heater high temperature detection circuit cuts off the power supplied to the fixing heater.
3) If the temperature of the fixing heater rises abnormally and the thermo switch (TP1) detects a temperature higher than 250 deg C, the thermo switch turns off
to cuts off the power supplied to the fixing heater.
Failure Detection
The CPU performs error detection at intervals of 40 msec. If any one of the cases a to d occurs, the CPU stops the machine completely. To restart the machine,
remove the cause of the failure and carry out initial rotation. If a failure is detected, an error code "EXXX" is displayed on the operation panel.
MEMO:
In case of this machine, the detail code of the error code of this machine can be confirmed in the following service mode.
Service mode > ERROR DISPLAY
a. Failure at startup
1) The main thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 30 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 1 second lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
2) The main thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 70 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 2 seconds lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
3) The sub-thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 75 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 5 seconds lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
4) The temperature rise detected by the main thermistor is less than 5 deg C when energization of the fixing heater starts, when the temperature detected by the
main thermistor is less than 100 deg C, or when 1 sec has lapsed since start of energization.
5) The main thermistor has detected temperatures less than 115 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 1 second has lapsed after detection of 100 deg C.
8) The target printing temperature is not reached when 30 seconds have lapsed since start of the initial rotation.
b. Low temperature detection during temperature control
During temperature control, the main or sub thermistor has detected low temperatures continuously for 400 or more msec after the target temperature was reached.
c. Abnormally high temperature detection
1) The main thermistor has detected 240 C deg irrespective of whether the fixing heater is of or off.
2) The sub thermistor has detected 295 deg C irrespective of whether the fixing heater is of or off.
d. Drive circuit failure
1) The zero crossing signal frequency of the power supply has not been detected during initial rotation.
2) During temperature control, no zero crossing signal has been input for 3 seconds.
3) A triac short circuit has been detected in the ASIC.
4) An abnormally high temperature has been detected in the ASIC.
8-5
Chapter 8
5) A lock condition has been detected in the fixing motor.
Fixing System Error Codes

E000-0000 STARTUP ERROR
The temperature detected by the main and sub thermistors did not reach the prescribed temperature during startup control.
E001-0000 ABNORMALLY HIGH TEMPERATURE (detected by main thermistor)
The main thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature (250 deg C) during temperature control.
E001-0001 ABNORMALLY HIGH TEMPERATURE (detected by sub thermistor)
The sub thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature (295 deg C) during temperature control.
E002-0000 LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTED DURING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The main and sub thermistors detected an abnormally low temperature (140 deg C) during temperature control.
E003-0000 ABNORMALLY LOW TEMPERATURE (detected by main thermistor)
The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not reach the target temperature during initial rotation after it has reached the target temperature.
E003-0001 ABNORMALLY LOW TEMPERATURE (detected by sub thermistor)
The temperature detected by the sub thermistor does not reach the target temperature during initial rotation after it has reached the target temperature.
E007-0000 ABNORMALLY ROTATION of FIXING FILM (detected by fixing film speed sensor)
A fixing film rotation failure has been setected.
E808-0000 DRIVE CIRCUIT FAILURE
A zero crossing signal cannot be detected.
A fixing drive motor failure has been detected.
8-6
Chapter 8
6) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1].
8.4.1 Fixing Unit
8.4.1.1 Removing the Fixing Unit

0017-9958

3) detach the left cover (rear).
4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the junction harness and remove the reus-
able band [2], then remove the earth wire [3].
- Screw [4], 1 pc.
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
[1] F-8-8
7) Lift the left door with both hands to release it from the door rotation shaft
[1], and then remove the left door.
F-8-6
5) Remove the screw [1] securing the door support band. Remove the con-
nector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness from
the wire saddle [4].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-9
8) Detach the inner cover [1] at the upper front.
- Screw [2], 2 pcs.
[3] [4]
F-8-7
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-10
8-7
Chapter 8
9) Detach the heater harness cover [2]. Disconnect the connector [3]. 2) Remove the fixing pressure release lever [2].
- Screw [1], 1 pc. - Resin ring [1]
[2] [2]
[3] [1]
[1]
F-8-14
F-8-11
10) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then release the fixing unit har-
ness from the wire saddles [2].
When installing the fixing pressure release lever, check that the rib [3] of the
lever is inside the pressure block [4].
[1]
[2]
F-8-12 [4] [3]

11) Raise the delivery upper guide [1]. Remove the fixing unit [3]. F-8-15
- Screw [2], 3 pcs.
3) Release the fixing unit harness [2] from the wire saddle [1].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-8-16
4) Remove the fixing paper guide [2].
[2] [3] [2] - Screw [1], 1 pc.
F-8-13
8.4.2 Fixing Film Unit
8.4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

0017-9960
1) Remove the fixing unit.
[1] [2]
F-8-17
8-8
Chapter 8
5) Remove the right side stay [1] and left side stay [2]. 7) Remove the ground cable [1] from the holder, and then free the fixing unit
- Screw [1], 2 pcs. AC harness.
[3] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-18
6) Disconnect the connector [1] and release the fixing DC harness [2] from [2]
the harness guide [3]. Unhook the claw [4] and remove the sensor holder
[5].
- Screw [6], 2 pcs. F-8-21
8) Remove the roller guide unit [1].
[5] [1] [2] - Screw [2], 2 pcs.
[2]
[1]
[6] [4] [3] [6]
F-8-19 F-8-22
When installing the electrode plate [1], place it under the three claws [2] as
shown below.
[2]
[1]
F-8-20
8-9
Chapter 8
9) Release the pressure plates [1]. 8.4.3 Fixing Pressure Roller

- Screw [2], 2 pcs.
8.4.3.1 Removing the Pressure Roller
0017-9959

[1]
2) Remove the fixing film unit.
[2] 3) Raise the claw [1] of the fixing unit inlet guide, and remove the slide the
fixing unit inlet guide [2] by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
[1]
F-8-25
4) Remove the pressure roller [3].
- E-ring [1]
- Gear [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3] [2]
F-8-23 F-8-26
10) After rotating the pressure plates [1] to release them from the fixing film
unit, remove the fixing film unit [2].
When installing the pressure roller, bring the ground plate [4] into contact
with the roller shaft [5].
[2]
[1]
[4] [5]
[1] F-8-27
F-8-24
8-10
Chapter 8
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Paper Sensor 5) Remove the right side stay [1] and left side stay [2].
- Screw [1], 2 pcs.
8.4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor
0017-9961
[3]
[2]
2) Remove the fixing pressure release lever [2].
- Resin ring [1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-32
[1]
6) Disconnect the connector [1] and release the fixing DC harness [2] from
the harness guide [3]. Unhook the claw [4] and remove the sensor holder
[5].
- Screw [6], 2 pcs.
[5] [1] [2]
F-8-28
When installing the fixing pressure release lever, check that the rib [3] of the
lever is inside the pressure block [4].
[6] [4] [3] [6]

F-8-33
7) Release the four sensor claws [1], and then remove the fixing delivery sen-
sor [2].
[4] [3] [2]

F-8-29
3) Remove the fixing unit harness [2] from the wire saddle [1].
[2] [1]
[1]
F-8-30
4) Remove the fixing paper guide [2].
- Screw [1], 1 pc.
F-8-34
[1] [2]
F-8-31
8-11
Chapter 8
When installing the electrode plate [1], place it under the three claws [2] as
shown below.
[2]
[1]
F-8-35
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor
8.4.5.1 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor

0017-9962

2) Disconnect the connector [1], release the two hooks [2], and then remove
the film sensor [3].
[1]
[3] [2]
F-8-36
8-12
Chapter 9 External and Controls
Contents
Contents
9.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Fan ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.2 Fan Control................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Power Supply................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.1 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB.........................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2 Protection Function ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.2.1 Protective Mechanisms ...................................................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.4.1 Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover...............................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.2 External Cover.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.4.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover .....................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.3 Upper Right Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (Upper)................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.4 Lower Right Cover....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (Lower) ...............................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.5 Left Rear Cover............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.4.5.1 Removing the Rear Left Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.6 Reader Front Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.6.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover .................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.4.7 Reader Rear Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.8 Delivery Tray ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.8.1 Removing the Delivery Tray...........................................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.9 Left Door ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.9.1 Removing the Left Door (Non Duplex Unit Type).........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.9.2 Removing the Left Door (With Duplex Unit Type) .......................................................................................................................................9-6
9.4.10 Main Drive Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.10.1 Removing the Main Drive Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.4.11 Fixing/Duplex Drive Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.11.1 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.4.12 Operation Panel Unit.................................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.4.12.1 Removing the Operation Panel Unit (Touch Panel Type) ............................................................................................................................9-9
9.4.13 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.13.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB ...............................................................................................................................................................9-9
9.4.14 Powwer Supply PCB................................................................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.4.14.1 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.15 Option Power Supply PCB....................................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.15.1 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB.................................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.16 HVT PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.16.1 Removing the HVT PCB ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.4.17 Main Drive Motor .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.17.1 Removing the Main Motor.......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.18 Fixing Drive Motor .................................................................................................................................................................. 9-11
9.4.18.1 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.19 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan....................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.19.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (Non Duplex Unit Type)......................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.19.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (With Duplex Unit Type)........................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.20 Fan Filter .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.20.1 Removing the Fan Filter (Non Duplex Unit).............................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.4.20.2 Removing the Fan Filter (With Duplex Unit Type) ................................................................................................................................... 9-13
Chapter 9
9.1 Control Panel
9.1.1 Overview
0018-1306
The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, and is controlled by the ASIC of the image processor PCB.
Image processor Panel switch

PCB Control panel CPU PCB PCB
Key SW
ASIC CPU
LED
Control
panel Touch
LCD
inverter panel
PCB
F-9-1
9.2 Fan
9.2.1 Overview
0018-1307
This machine is provided with a fan to cool the fixing unit.
FM1
F-9-2
9-1
Chapter 9
9.2.2 Fan Control

0018-1308
Heat discharge fan (FM1) rotates at the full speed or the half speed according to the combination of the three control signals (FAN_FULL, FAN_MID, FAN_LOW).
DC Controller PCB
+24V
CPU J219 FM1

FAN_FULL
FAN_MID Fan drive FANDRV
voltage 3
FAN_LOW GND
switching circuit 2
FAN_LOCK
1
F-9-3
T-9-1
FM1 rotation control FAN_FULL FAN_MID FAN_LOW

Full-speed rotation 1 1 1
Half-speed rotation 0 1 1
1) Rotation control at full speed and half speed

Under the condition to satisfy the following all of three items, the fan turns at the full speed when the fixing drive motor turns on and for 30 seconds after the
motor stops. Afterwards, the fan turns at the half speed for 210 seconds, and then the fan stops.
- Environment sensor detects the 27 degree or more.
- The machine equips with the cassette heater.
- Automatic duplex printing mode is executed.
Power switch ON/ Power switch OFF/

Going out of sleep mode Copy start key ON Going into sleep mode
INTR STBY WMUPR PRINT PRINT LSTR STBY
Heat Discharge Fan 30sec 210sec

(FM1)
Registration sensor
(SR302)
Fixing Drive Motor
(M400)
: Full speed (+24V) : Half speed (+14V)
F-9-4
2) Rotation control at half speed only
Under the condition except for the above three items, the fan turns at the half speed when the fixing drive motor turns on and for 210 seconds after the motor
stops, and then the fan stops.
Power switch ON/ Power switch OFF/

Going out of sleep mode Copy start key ON Going into sleep mode
INTR STBY WMUPR PRINT PRINT LSTR STBY
Heat Discharge Fan 210sec

(FM1)
Registration sensor
(SR302)
Fixing Drive Motor
(M400)
: Full speed (+24V) : Half speed (+14V)
F-9-5
E805-0000 (Main body fan error)

When the cooling fan of the main body starts, the fan lock detection signal (FAN_LOCK) has been held at the "H" level for longer than the prescribed time.
9.3 Power Supply
9.3.1 Power Supply
9.3.1.1 Outline
0018-1309
When the main power switch (SW1) is turned on, AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the power supply PCB.
The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +3.3 V, +5 V, and +24 V to operate the machine.
+24 V is supplied to the motors, fan, electromagnetic clutch, solenoid, etc. +5 V and +3.3 V are supplied to the sensor, etc.
There are two types of +24 V voltages: +24 V which is normaly supplied from the low voltage power supply and +24 VR which is cut off when the front cover or
the left door is opened. The +24 VR also plays the role of a door open detection signal (DOPEN). This signal allows the CPU to detect that the front cover or the
9-2
Chapter 9
left door has opened.

T-9-2
Part Name Function

Power supply PCB Generates DC power from AC power.
Option power supply PCB (option) Generates DC power from AC power for the options.
Main power switch (SW1) Supplies AC power to the power supply PCB.
Front cover switch (SW2) Detects opening/closing of the front cover and cuts off +24 VR.
Left door switch (SW3) Detects opening/closing of the left door and cuts off +24 VR.
: AC
: DC
Power supply PCB
SW1 F1 F2
NF NF Option +24Vop Option
P1
power supply - Finisher
PCB
- Cassette feeding
+24V module
+5VR
Low-voltage +3.3VR
power supply Reader Motor
RL1 Sensor
circuit controller
PCB DADF
+5V
Heater drive +3.3V Control panel
circuit Image
FAX board
Processor
PCB
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
+24V
+5VR
+3.3VR Laser unit
SW2 DC
controller Motor
PCB Clutch
SW3 Solenoid
+24VR Fan
+5VR Sensor
+3.3VR
TP1 HVT
PCB
H1 Inner2waytray
H2
Duplex unit
+24V
F-9-6
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB

0018-1310
Output 24V 5V 5VR 3.3V 3.3VR
Rated output voltage 24V 5.1V 5.1V 3.4V 3.4V
Output voltage tolerance +10%, -5% +3%, -4% +3%, -4% +3%, -3% +3%, -3%
Rated output current 3.5A 1.0A 1.0A 2.0A 0.75A
Overcurrent protection trigger current 9.0A 4.0A 4.0A 4.0A 4.0A
Overvoltage protection trigger voltage 32.5V 8.0V 8.0V 5.5V 5.5V
9.3.2 Protection Function
9.3.2.1 Protective Mechanisms

0018-1311
The power supply PCB is provided with an overcurrnet/overvoltage protection function to automatically cut off the output voltage when a trouble such as a short
circuit occurs on in the load.
When the overcurrnet/overvoltage protection function is activated, turn off the main power switch, solve the trouble with the load, and then turn on the main power
switch.
Further, the power supply circuit has two fuses which blow to stop power supply when an excessive current flows in the AC line.
9-3
Chapter 9
9.4.4 Lower Right Cover

9.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 9.4.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (Lower)
0018-0018

9.4.1 Rear Cover
9.4.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover 2) Open the front cover.
0017-9966
3) Remove the two hooks [2], and then detach the right cover (lower) [3].
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 - Screw [4], 5 pcs.
1) Detach the rear cover [1].
- 4 screws [2] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-7
[2] [4]
F-9-10
9.4.2 External Cover
9.4.5 Left Rear Cover
9.4.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover
0017-9964 9.4.5.1 Removing the Rear Left Cover

1) Detach the lower-left cover [2] by opening the rear support [1] with a
slightly strong force applied in the direction of the arrow. 1) Detach the rear left cover [1].
- 3 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-8
9.4.3 Upper Right Cover F-9-11
9.4.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (Upper) 9.4.6 Reader Front Cover
0018-0019

9.4.6.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover
1) Detach the rear cover. imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
0017-9967

3) Detach the right cover (lower). 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
4)Detach the right cover (upper). 2) Detach the reader front cover [1].
- Screw [2], 1 pc. - Screw [2], 2 pcs.
[2] [2]
[1]
F-9-9
[1]
F-9-12
9-4
Chapter 9
9.4.7 Reader Rear Cover 10) Detach the reader rear cover [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
9.4.7.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
0017-9968
[2]

4) Detach the right cover (upper).
7) Detach the small cover [1].
- Screw [2], 1 pc.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-15
9.4.8 Delivery Tray
9.4.8.1 Removing the Delivery Tray

0017-9965

4) Detach the delivery tray [1].
- Screw [2], 2 pcs.
F-9-13
8) Disconnect the ground cable [1] of the ADF harness.
- Screw [2], 1 pc.
9) Remove the ADF harness [3].
[4] [1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-9-16
9.4.9 Left Door
9.4.9.1 Removing the Left Door (Non Duplex Unit Type)

0017-9984

[5]
[3] 1) Draw out the drum unit.
F-9-14 2) Detach the rear cover.
When installing the ADF harness [3], fit the harness band [5] in the groove
in the reader rear cover.
9-5
Chapter 9
4) Release the duplex unit harness [1]. 3) Lift the left door with both hands to release it from the door rotation shaft
- Screw [2], 1 pc. [1], and then remove the left door.
- Reusable band [4], 1 pc.
- Wire saddle [5], 1 pc.
[2]
[3] [1]
F-9-19
[1]
9.4.9.2 Removing the Left Door (With Duplex Unit Type)
[4] [5] imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
0017-9985
F-9-17
2) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1].
MEMO: 3) Detach the left cover (rear).
When a duplex unit (option) is installed, remove it before pulling out the 4) Disconnect the relay harness [2] from the connector [1]of the duplex unit
hinge shaft for each access. harness.
5) Disconnect the ground cable [3].
- Screw [4], 1 pc.
6) Remove the reusable band [5] from the duplex unit harness at the rear-left
of the main body, and then return the duplex unit harness [6] to the left
door side.
[5] [3] [4]
[6]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-20
F-9-18
9-6
Chapter 9
4) Release the duplex unit harness [1]. 3) Lift the left door with both hands to release it from the door rotation shaft
- Screw [2], 1 pc. [1], and then remove the left door.
- Reusable band [4], 1 pc.
- Wire saddle [5], 1 pc.
[2]
[3] [1]
F-9-23
[1]
9.4.10 Main Drive Unit
[4] [5]
F-9-21 9.4.10.1 Removing the Main Drive Unit
2) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1]. 0017-9979

MEMO:
When a duplex unit is installed, remove it before pulling out the hinge shaft 1) Open the front cover.
for each access. 2) Turn the developing assembly locking lever clockwise to open the left
door.
6) Remove the main motor.
7) Remove the registration clutch.
8) Open the left door fully.
9) Remove the gear unit [1] and gear [2].
- E-ring [3], 1 pc.
[1] [2] [3]
[1]
F-9-24
F-9-22
9-7
Chapter 9
10) Pull out the handle [1] at the back of the machine, remove the screw [2], 13) Release the gear stopper [1] from the shaft, and then remove the gear [2].
and then remove the stopper [3].
[2]
[2]
[1] [3]
F-9-25
11) Remove the harness [1] from the wire saddle [2].
- Connectors [3], 2 pcs.
[1]
[1]
F-9-28
14) Remove the main drive unit [1].
- Screw [2], 6 pcs.
[2] [1] [2]
[2] [3] [3]

F-9-26
12) Remove the handle unit [1].
- Screw [2], 3 pcs.
[1]
[2]
F-9-29
Since the gears in the main drive unit are not secured, gears will fall if the
main drive unit is inclined. If gears should fall, install them at the positions
shown below.
[2] [2]
F-9-27
9-8
Chapter 9
9.4.11 Fixing/Duplex Drive Unit 2) Turn over the operation panel unit[1].
- Screw [1], 2 pcs.
9.4.11.1 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit
0017-9980 [2]

4) Remove the left door.
6) Detach the RAM cover.
7) Remove the SDRAM.
8) Detach the LAN cover.
9) Detach the IP cover.
10) Remove the image processor PCB with the PCB mount.
11) Release the claw [1] on the gear cover, and then remove the gear cover
[2] by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-33
3) Disconnect the flexible cable holder [1] and disconnect the connector [3]
of the flexible cable [2] to remove the operation panel unit [4].
F-9-30 [1] [4]

12) Release the gear stopper [1], and then remove the gear [2].
[2] [1]
[2] [3]
F-9-34
F-9-31
13) Remove the fixing drive unit [1]. 9.4.13 DC Controller PCB
- Screw [3], 4 pcs. 9.4.13.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB
0017-9972

[3] [1] [3]
[3] [2] [3]

F-9-32
9.4.12 Operation Panel Unit
9.4.12.1 Removing the Operation Panel Unit (Touch

Panel Type)
0017-9971
1) Detach the reader front cover.
9-9
Chapter 9
1) Detach the rear cover. 3) Detach the delivery tray.

2) Remove the DC controller PCB [1]. 4) Disconnect the connector (J16) [1] on the power supply PCB.
- Screw [3], 4 pcs.
[3] [2] [3]
[1]
F-9-38
5) Disconnect the connector (J53) [1] on the power supply PCB.
6) Remove the option power supply PCB [2].
- Screw [3], 3 pcs.
[3] [2]
[3] [2] [1] [3]

F-9-35
9.4.14 Powwer Supply PCB
9.4.14.1 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB

0017-9969

4) Remove the power supply PCB [1].
- Screw [3], 6 pcs.
[3] [1] [3]
F-9-39
[3] [2] [3]
9.4.16 HVT PCB
9.4.16.1 Removing the HVT PCB

0017-9974

4) Remove the power supply PCB.
[3] [1]
F-9-36
[3]
F-9-37
9.4.15 Option Power Supply PCB
9.4.15.1 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB

0017-9973

9-10
Chapter 9
5) Remove the HVT PCB. 8) Remove the fixing motor [1].

- Connector [2], 1 pc. - Connector [2], 1 pc.
[1] [2]
[3]
F-9-40
[3] [2] [1]

F-9-42
When installing the HVT PCB, check that the contacts on the high voltage
electrode plate [1] touch the contacts on the PCB. 9.4.19 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
9.4.19.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (Non

Duplex Unit Type)
0017-9975
1) Open the left door until it stops.

2) Remove the transfer/registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[1] [1]
9.4.17 Main Drive Motor
9.4.17.1 Removing the Main Motor

0017-9982

2) Remove the main motor [1].
- Screw [3], 3 pcs.
[2] [1]
[2] [2]
F-9-43
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the harness from the wire
saddle [2].
[3] [2]
F-9-41
9.4.18 Fixing Drive Motor
9.4.18.1 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor

0017-9983

3) Detach the RAM cover.
4) Remove the SDRAM.
5) Detach the LAN cover.
6) Detach the IP cover.
7) Remove the image processor PCB with the PCB mount.
[1]
F-9-44
9-11
Chapter 9
4) Remove the duct [1]. 4) Disconnect the relay harness [2] from the connector [1].
- Screw [2], 2 pcs. 5) Disconnect the ground cable [3].
- Screw [4], 1 pc.
[1] 6) Remove the reusable band [5] from the duplex unit harness at the rear-left
door side.
[5] [3] [4]
[6]
[1]
[2]
F-9-45
5) Remove the fixing heart discharge fan [1].
[2]
F-9-47
7) Remove the transfer/registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[1]
[1]
F-9-46
9.4.19.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (With [2] [2]
Duplex Unit Type)
0017-9976

2) detach the rear cover.
F-9-48
9-12
Chapter 9
8) Remove the duplex unit [1] from the left door. 1) Open the left door until it stops.
- Screw [2], 6 pcs. 2) Remove the transfer/registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
[2] [2]
[2] [2]
F-9-49 F-9-52
9) Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the harness from the wire 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the harness from the wire
saddle [2]. saddle [2].
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
F-9-50 F-9-53
10) Remove the fixing heart discharge fan [1]. 4) Remove the duct [1].
- Screw [2], 2 pcs.
[1]
[1]
F-9-51
9.4.20 Fan Filter

[2]
9.4.20.1 Removing the Fan Filter (Non Duplex Unit) F-9-54
0017-9977
9-13
Chapter 9
5) Remove the fan filter [1] from the duct. 4) Disconnect the relay harness [2] from the connector [1].
5) Disconnect the ground cable [3].
- Screw [4], 1 pc.
6) Remove the reusable band [5] from the duplex unit harness at the rear-left
door side.
[5] [3] [4]
[1]
F-9-55
MEMO: [6]
When a duplex unit is used, first remove the duplex unit and next remove
the fan filter from it.
[1]
9.4.20.2 Removing the Fan Filter (With Duplex Unit Type)
0017-9978

2) Detach the rear cover. [2]
3) Detach the left cover (rear). F-9-56
7) Rremove the transfer/registration unit [1].
- Screw [2], 4 pcs.
[1]
[2] [2]
F-9-57
9-14
8) Remove the duplex unit [1] from the left door.
- Screw [2], 6 pcs.
[2] [1] [2]
[2] [2]
F-9-58
9) Remove the fan filter from the duplex unit.
Chapter 10 RDS
Contents
Contents
10.1 RDS............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Application Operation Mode.................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.3 Communication Test ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.4 Communication Log................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.5 Detail of Communication Log.................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.6 Initialization of e-RDS ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.7 SOAP Communication Function.............................................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.8 Retransmission at the time of SOAP Transmission Error........................................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.9 e-RDS Setting Screen............................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.10 Report Output of Communication Error Log......................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.11 Sleep Operation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.12 Alarm Filtering, Alert Filtering.............................................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.1.13 CA Certificate ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.1.14 Settings of Network Connection (Installation/Maintenance)................................................................................................. 10-5
10.1.15 Settings of e-RDS (Installation/Maintenance) ....................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.16 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.17 Error Message list .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-6
Chapter 10
10.1 RDS
10.1.1 Overview
0017-8264
imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
Product Overview
Embedded RDS (henceforth: e-RDS) is the front-end module of e-Maintenance embedded with a network module of a device controller.
Product Package Configuration

Embedded with a network module of a device.
Features
e-RDS is embedded with a network module of a device controller, which works as a front-end module of e-Maintenance without any hardware other than device.
With use of e-RDS, device information such as counter information, failure information, consumables information of device controllers are transmitted to a back-
end server called Universal Gateway (centralized device information management host computer, henceforth: UGW) using SOAP protocol. (https(SSL) commu-
nication)
10.1.2 Application Operation Mode

0017-8265
Whether to enable (ON) /disable (OFF) the Operation Mode is selectable by setting from e-RDS setting display from the service mode (E-RDS SWITCH).
- OFF (default) : e-RDS is disabled.
- ON : All e-RDS operations are enabled.
By setting from UGW, operations including counter transmission, log transmission, and alert transmission can be controlled.
Note that the communication test (COM-TEST) is required prior to start of e-RDS operation.
(For detail, see 'Settings of e-RDS'.)
10.1.3 Communication Test

0017-8266
By implementing a communication test (COM-TEST) from the service mode, service technicians can test the connection of the device with UGW.
In case of a communication error, you can find its cause by referring to the communication error log.
e-RDS obtains the schedule information from UGW by performing COM-TEST.

The obtainment of the schedule information from UGW enables e-RDS to start its operation.
10.1.4 Communication Log

0017-8267
In case of a communication error (such as proxy server error), error log is recorded (for 5 cases).
Error code and error information can be displayed on the control panel as a list (service mode: COM-LOG), and printed out as a report.
(service mode: #REPORT > #REPORT OUTPUT > ERDS COM LOG LIST)
10.1.5 Detail of Communication Log

0017-8268
Error code and detail of the communication error log can be displayed on the control panel and printed out as a report.
10.1.6 Initialization of e-RDS

0017-8269
e-RDS setting can be returned to the factory default.
Step
Initialize the e-RDS setting values using the service mode items below:
#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
Initialized setting values and data

Followings are the setting values and internally used data that are initialized:
#E-RDS > E-RDS SWITCH
#E-RDS > RGW-PORT
#E-RDS > RGW-ADDRESS
#E-RDS > COM-LOG
10-1
Chapter 10
Initialization of e-RDS resets all the port and address settings so that they are suitable for UGW, but does not reset the CA certificate data.
For this reason, in case a non-default CA certificate data is installed, you need to delete the certificate (installation of the default certificate) after initialization of
e-RDS.
(As for deletion of certificate, see 'CA certificate'.)
10.1.7 SOAP Communication Function

0017-8270
Following processings are enabled by use of SOAP communication (SSL client communication).
Server authentication is performed by use of CA*1 certificate issued by VeriSign.
In case the server certificate or CA certificate is expired, the device is not connected to UGW.
*1: CA stands for Certificate Authority, which are the institutions which issue electronic certificate used in e-commerce etc.
(1) Communication Test

- Perform the communication test
(2) Transmit all or a part of the following data based on the schedule information obtained from UGW.
- Counter details data
- Service mode counter
- Parts counter
- Mode counter
- ROM version
- Schedule information
- Application debug log
- Environment log (Device condition log)
(3) In case of detecting jam, or alert/service call error from the device, transmit the following to UGW.
- Transmission of alert code (transmit the counter information simultaneously)
Transmit an alert code in case of a change in the status of the device.

Main alert codes are toner LOW/OUT, jam, and door open.
At error recovery, transmit again the data that indicates the recovery.
- Transmission of jam log (transmit the counter information simultaneously)
- Transmission of service call (Error code) log (transmit the counter information simultaneously)
(4) Change of device schedule information

- Check whether there is a processing to execute.
- Update the schedule information.
- Return the result of the operation.
(5) Filtering reception from UGW

- Alert filtering
T-10-1
Transmission Detail List:

Transmission Detail / Process Detail Transmission Timing Remarks
Communication test Either at the time of execution of the service mode
communicatonTest of the device or upon a request from UGW with
'getOperationList'
Counter details data collection/transmission Once every 16 hours. The detailed counter data for each paper size
postGlobalClickCount such as Total.
Service mode counter collection/transmission Once every 16 hours. The counter data tied to the service mode
postSeviceModeCounter number. Mainly used for billing.
Mode counter collection/transmission Once every 16 hours. The counter data by operation mode.
postModeCounter
Parts counter collection/transmission Once every 16 hours. The counter data indicating the amount of
postPartsCounter usage by part.
ROM version Once every 7 days.
postFirmwareInfo
Schedule information transmission Once every 16 hours.
postConfiguration
Debug log At the time that the log has been accumulated The log data output by an application for
postDebugLog 5kbyte analyzing a malfunction.
Alert code At the time of change in the device condition The data when a status change occurs.
postAlert
10-2
Chapter 10
Transmission Detail / Process Detail Transmission Timing Remarks

Jam log At the time of jam occurrence Includes the jam code, date of occurrence,
postJamLog total counter at occurrence, paper feeding slot,
and paper size.
Service call log At the time of service call occurrence Includes the error code, error subcode, date of
postServiceCallLog occurrence, total counter at occurrence, paper
feeding slot, and paper size.
Operation list check Once every 16 hours.
getOperationList Upon a request from UGW
Schedule information update At the time of communication test
getConfiguration
Environment log (Device condition log) transmission Once every 12 hours. The environment information inside the
postEnvironmentLog device such as temperature and humidity.
Alert filtering Upon a request from UGW When requested from UGW with
getAlertCodeNotificationList 'getOperationList'
- The timing of transmission to UGW varies according to the device.

- The timing of transmission to UGW cannot be set on the side of the device.
10.1.8 Retransmission at the time of SOAP Transmission Error

0017-8271

In case the SOAP transmission error occurs due to the fault at UGW side at the time of the alert code transmission, store the last 3 data failed to transmit in the
RAMDISK, and retransmit it with the predefined intervals.
In addition, in case the SOAP transmission error occurs at the time of the jam log or service call log transmission, retransmit the data failed to transmit with the
predefined intervals. (When transmitting these 2 types of data, RAMDISK is not used, and the number of retransmission is not restricted.)
10.1.9 e-RDS Setting Screen

0017-8272
(1). Setting Items

The forms and default values of the setting items related to the e-RDS in the service mode are as follow:
T-10-2
Service Mode
Description
Setting Items (Meaning)
E-RDS SWITCH e-RDS OFF/ON 0: OFF/1: ON
When the setting is ON, transmit the counter information and error information to UGW.
Default value: 0 (OFF)
RGW-ADDRESS URL of UGW
(RDS-Gateway ADDRESS) Default value: the actual URL of UGW
Number of characters: 129 bytes (Including NULL. 1-byte code only)
RGW-PORT Port number of UGW
(RDS-Gateway PORT) Default value: 443
Setting range: 1 to 65535
COM-TEST Execution of communication test
(Communication Test) Judge whether the connection with UGW is established, and display the result with either 'COM-TEST OK' or
'COM-TEST NG'.
COM-LOG Detail of the communication test result
(Communication Log) Display the error log for the communication with UGW.
As the error information, occurred time, error code, and error detail information are displayed.
Max. number of log: 5
Error information: max. 128 characters (Excluding NULL)
(2). Screen Menu
10-3
Chapter 10
An example for the transition of the menu related to the e-RDS in the service mode.
arrow key
#E-RDS #E-RDS #E-RDS
E-RDS SWITCH RGW-ADDRESS RGW-PORT
OK key
#E-RDS SWITCH #RGW-ADDRESS :A #RGW-PORT
001 1 https://xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 001 443
#E-RDS #E-RDS
COM-TEST COM-LOG
#E-RDS No:1 Ecode:870F2052

COM-TEST OK 2006 03/24 11:56
F-10-1
(3). Communication Error Log Selection Screen

The communication error log is displayed by selecting #E-RDS > COM-LOG in the service mode, and pressing the OK key.
The error log to be displayed is as follow:

Communication error log : transmission error of counter and various logs up to the present, as well as the error occurred date, error code, and error information
at the communication test.
By pressing the arrow key ( key, key), the communication error log from No.1 to No. 5 can be checked.
(Only the No. in which an error is registered can be selected.)
Example of Operation
arrow key
No:1 Ecode:870F2052 No:2 Ecode:87053563
2006 03/24 11:56 2006 03/24 10:23
OK key
It transits to the Communication Error Log Detail Screen.

F-10-2
By pressing the OK key, it transits to the Communication Error Log Detail Screen.
Max. number of the communication error log: 5
(4). Communication Error Log Detail Screen

The detail information of the communication error log is displayed.
For the message to be displayed, see the 'Error Message List'.
By pressing the Menu key, it returns to the Communication Error Log Selection Screen.
Detail error information: max. 128 characters (excluding NULL)
For instance, in case of the detail error '*Server response error(0x800f0200): getConfiguration Not Found Agent(AgentID = E250SD01)', it is too long to fit in
a screen; thus, display it with multiple screens as shown below. Switch each screen with the arrow key.
arrow key arrow key

*Server response er etConfiguration Not D = E250SD01 )
ror(0x800f0200) : g Found Agent(AgentI
F-10-3
10.1.10 Report Output of Communication Error Log

0017-8273
The communication error log can be output as report.
Operation:
#REPORT > #REPORT OUTPUT > ERDS COM LOG LIST
10.1.11 Sleep Operation

0017-8274

Even in the sleep mode (power saving), the e-RDS executes the transmission if there is a message to be sent.
10-4
Chapter 10
10.1.12 Alarm Filtering, Alert Filtering

0017-8275
With the instruction from UGW (getOperationList), change the alarm level for the specified alarm code, and transmit only the specified alert code.
10.1.13 CA Certificate
0017-8276
(1). Overview of functions

CA certificate (CA-KEY) is included in the system software System (Default CA certificate. For UGW).
The CA certificate other than the default is installable with SST.

[Outline of the step]
* See 'Downloading System Software' for details.
1. Move it from SST to CA Certificate Install > Flash File System.
2. Turn the power off/on.
Read the CA Certificate file from Flash file system during initialization, and register CA Certificate through the key management module.
3. Check the information in the service mode #NETWORK > #CERTIFICATE > #CA-CERTIFICATE to see if the same one as the installed CA Certificate
has been registered.
(2). The number of CA Certificates stored in the device

The upper limit of CA Certificates stored in the device : 1
(3). Saving the certificate

When executing Service Mode > #CLEAR > CA-KEY and turning off/on the power, the default CA Certificate is loaded on the Flash memory.
If necessary, install CA Certificate with SST.
(4). Update of the certificate

The registered CA Certificate is renewed when overwriting with SST.
(5). Deleting the certificate

The default CA Certificate is automatically installed when deleting CA Certificate in the service mode and turning off/on the power.
Deleting CA Certificate therefore means installation of the default CA Certificate.
10.1.14 Settings of Network Connection (Installation/Maintenance)

0017-8277
Before setting e-RDS, the network setting of the device needs to be surely made.
(1). Display Additional Functions screen
- Press [Additional Functions] key.
- Enter System Manager ID and the password if required.
(2). Display TCP/IP Settings screen
- Select [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the LCD panel.
(3). Setting the items regarding IP address
- Select [IP ADDRESS Settings] to display IP ADDRESS Settings screen.
- Press each item of IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, DHCP to make the settings.
- Press [OK] after completing the settings to return to TCP/IP Settings.
(4). DNS SERVER
- Select [DNS SERVER] to display DNS SERVER screen.
- Press the necessary items to make the settings.
- Press [OK] after completing the settings to return to TCP/IP Settings screen.
(5). Proxy Settings
- Select [Proxy Settings] to display Proxy Settings screen.
(Press [down] key until [Proxy Settings] is displayed on TCP/IP Settings screen. Thereafter, press [Proxy Settings].)
- Press the necessary items to make the settings.
- Press [OK] after completing the settings to return to TCP/IP Settings screen.
(6). Return to the Basic Features screen (initial screen)
- Press [Additional Functions] key, or press [Done] button until Additional Functions screen closes.
When changing the above Network Settings, it is necessary to turn off/on the power of the device.
10.1.15 Settings of e-RDS (Installation/Maintenance)

0017-8278
(1). Display the menu screen of e-RDS by the service mode of the device.
(1)-1. Enter the service mode:
[Additional Functions] key > 2 key > 8 key > [Additional Functions] key
10-5
Chapter 10
(1)-2. Initialization
#CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
If necessary, install or delete CA Certificate and turn off/on the power.

(1)-3. Display the menu screen of e-RDS
Press the arrow key to move to the menu (#E-RDS) of e-RDS.
(2). Set E-RDS SWITCH to 1 in order to enable e-RDS.
(3). If necessary, enter URL of UGW in RGW-ADDRESS (The setting has normally been done).
(4). Enter the port number of UGW in RGW-PORT (normally the setting done).
(5). Select COM-TEST and press OK key to execute the test of communication with UGW.
(6). If the result is 'COM-TEST NG', correct the settings of RGW-ADDRESS/RGW-PORT and repeat COM-TEST until it becomes 'COM-TEST OK'. If necessary,
check the network settings of the device, the status of network connection and availability of the communication to UGW.
10.1.16 Troubleshooting
0017-8279
No.1
Q. Communication test fails.
A. Check the firmware version.
Check the network settings.
Check the results of communication test.
10.1.17 Error Message list

0017-8280
The followings are error information displayed on the 'Communication Error Log Detail Screen'.
(The term "server" used in this section refers to UGW.)
- When OK is pressed on the 'Communication Error Log Selection Screen' where a communication error log is displayed, the screen changes to the 'Communi-
cation Error Log Detail Screen'.
- When an error character string on the 'Communication Error Log Detail Screen' is so long that the entire message cannot be displayed on a screen at one time,
use the arrow keys to switch between screens. The amount of error information displayed on the 'Communication Error Log Detail Screen' is 128 characters at
maximum.
Error character strings from No.3 onward listed on the table below will be displayed in the following order.
[*][Error character string] : [Method name] [Server detail error]
Character strings bracketed in [] are replaced by the following.
[*]:
An '*' (asterisk) is added to the beginning of the error character string for errors occurred during communication test.
[Error character string]:

For No.1 and 2 of the [Error character string] below, only the error character strings are displayed. The rest of the error character strings are displayed in the
order described above.
T-10-3
Error Character Strings Error Description Cause Measures

SUSPEND: Communication e-RDS is ON but e-RDS is ON but e-RDS was activated Perform and complete Communication test
test is not performed Communication test is not without performing Communication test. (COM-TEST).
1 completed. (The device is rebooted.)
Event Registration is Failed. Event registration failure A processing (Event Registration) inside Turn OFF and then ON the device.Otherwise
2 error the device has been failed. reinstall the device system software.
URL Scheme error(not https) URL scheme specification The URL header of the server registered is Correct the header of the server URL to https.
error not https. Service Mode
3 > #E-RDS
> RGW-ADDRESS
Server connection error Server connection error Displayed when a TCP / IP - Check the network connection.
communication error occurs. - Check the port number for RGW-PORT.
This error also occurs as a result of the - Check the server status.
Proxy server dysfunction while the proxy - When the Proxy server is in use, check the
server is in use. Proxy server address.
4 - When the Proxy server is in use, check the
status of the Proxy server address.
10-6
Chapter 10

URL server specified is illegal Server-specified URL error A different URL than the one specified by Check with the server helpdesk.
5 the server has been registered.
Proxy connection error Proxy connection error Cannot connect to the Proxy server. Check the server IP address and port number and
correct the settings accordingly.
The device needs rebooting when network-
6 related settings such as Proxy settings are
modified.
Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication error Authentication for the Proxy server has Check the user name and password to log in to
7 failed. the Proxy server and re-set them.
Proxy address resolution error Proxy address resolution Proxy server address resolution by DNS - Check the network configurations of the
error has failed. device. (Check if PING by host name passes
from computer to the device.)
- Check the DNS settings.
- Check if the host name set in RGW-ADDRESS
8 is registered in the DNS server.
- Check if the Proxy server address is correct.
Server certificate error Server certificate error During SSL negotiation, server certificate - Check that CA certificate has been installed.
notified by the server cannot be Service Mode
authenticated by CA certificate of the > #NETWORK
device. > #CERTIFICATE
> #CA-CERTIFICATE
9
- Install CA certificate corresponding the server.
Server certificate verify error Server certificate verify During SSL negotiation, host name Check host name in the URL set in RGW-
(URL check) error written in server certificate notified by the ADDRESS.
server and URL host name set in RGW- Service More
10 ADDRESS have been different. > #E-RDS
> RGW-ADDRESS
Server certificate expired Server certificate expired - CA certificate registered in the device is - Check expire date of CA certificate.
expired. Service Mode
- Time and date on the device is invalid > #NETWORK
against the term specified in the > #CERTIFICATE
certificate. > #CA-CERTIFICATE
11 If the certificate is expired, register a valid CA

certificate on the device.
- Set the correct time and date on the device.
Unknown error Unknown communication Unknown communication error has Wait for a while and try again.
12
error occurred.
Server response error (NULL) Server response error(When Server response error This error can happen when Send function and e-
server error code processing RDS function are performed simultaneously.
has failed) Wait for a while to try again and check that Send
13 OK is displayed next time sending is performed.
Server response error Server response error Displayed when server returns some kind Wait for a while and try again. Requires different
([Hexadecimal number]) of error although communication to the actions according to the error returned from the
[Server detail error] server was successful. server.
[Hexadecimal number]
Error code returned from the server.
14
[Server detail error]
Detailed character string of the error
returned by the server.
Device internal error Device internal error Internal error such as unable to acquire the Turn OFF and then ON the device.Or reinstall
15 memory has occurred. the device system software.
10-7
Chapter 10

Server schedule is invalid Invalid server-instructed Schedule setting value instructed by the Report detailed information on error occurred to
schedule server during Communication test is the support division.
16 invalid. After countermeasures are taken on the server
side, perform Communication test again.
Server response time out Server response time out Due to network congestion etc., response In case this occurred when implementing the
from server does not return within a communication test, retry after a certain period
specified period of time. of time.
This error has been found to occur due to
17 simultaneous operation of Send function and e-
RDS function in some cases.
Service not found Service is not found (invalid Cannot access server due to wrong path Check the server URL including path, and set it
path) for server URL. again.
18 Service mode
> #E-RDS
> RGW-ADDRESS
E-RDS switch is setted OFF e-RDS is not enabled. Executed communication test (COM- Enable operation switch of e-RDS and execute
TEST) while e-RDS operation switch (E- communication test again.
19 RDS-SWITCH) is turned OFF. Service mode
> #E-RDS
> E-RDS SWITCH
Server schedule is not exist Schedule of the target device Schedule of target device is not registered Check with Server Helpdesk
20 does not exist within server. in server.
Network is not ready, try later Network is not ready Tried communication while connection to Check to see that connection to network is
network is not established (at such timing established. Furthermore, retry connection after
as immediately after startup of device). long-enough period of time.
(During the 60 seconds after startup of a
device, connection to network may not be
21 established.)
URL error URL setting error A host name of URL set as a server is Check server URL including path, and set it
invalid. again.
22 Service mode
> #E-RDS
> RGW-ADDRESS
Server address resolution error Server address resolution - Can access DNS server - Check network status of device (Check to see
error - Failed in address resolution of host name that device responds to ping by host name from
set as RGW-ADDRESS PC)
- Check DNS setting
- Check to see that host name set in RGW-
23 ADDRESS is registered in DNS server
- Check to see that URL set in RGW-ADDRESS
is valid.
Server specified list is too big Alarm/alert filtering Ten or more alarm/alert filtering cases are Check with Server Helpdesk
24 information specified by registered.
server is too big
Server specified list is wrong Alarm/alert filtering Data values registered in alarm/alert Check with Server Helpdesk
25 information specified by filtering are invalid
server is invalid
10-8
Chapter 10
[Method Name]:
T-10-4
Method Name Description

1 postServiceModeCount Obtain software counters for copy/print charge
2 postModeCount Obtain mode counter
3 postPartsCount Obtain parts counter
4 postFirmwareInfo Obtain ROM version
5 getOperationList Check whether there is an operation execution command for you in UGW
6 postOperationOutcome Transmit execution result of operation commanded in getOperationList
7 postConfiguration Periodical environment information
8 postGlobalClickCount Obtain counter details data
9 postJamLog Obtain jam notification
10 postServiceCallLog Obtain service call notification
11 postAlert Obtain alert notification
12 postDebugLog Obtain debug log
13 getConfiguration Obtain schedule information
14 communicationTest Communication test
15 postEnvironmentLog Environment log transmission
16 getAlarmLevelConversionList Alarm filtering

17 getAlertCodeNotificationList Alert filtering
[Detail of server error]:

Display detailed error information from error in case there is an error response from UGW. However, in case the character number exceeds 128, character strings
after 128th are omitted.
In case of the other error, nothing is displayed here.
Below is the example of the actual characters displayed:

Example) Unexpected error: postGlobalClickCount()
10-9
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection
Contents
Contents
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ....................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Consumables.............................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Periodical Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Chapter 11
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
11.1.1 Overview
0018-0089
The machine has parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of functional performance. (The loss of the function of any of these parts
will significantly affect the machine performance, regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage.)
If possible, schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit.
The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit.
11.1.2 Reader Unit

0018-0090
The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
11.1.3 Printer Unit

0018-0091
The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
11.2 Consumables
11.2.1 Overview
0018-0092
The machine has parts that may require replacement once or more during the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by
referring to their indicated estimated lives.
- Checking the Timing of Replacement
Use the following service mode item to check the timing of replacement:
#COUNTER > DRBL-1
- FX-UNIT: Fixing Unit
- TR-ROLL: Transfer roller
- DV-UNIT-C: Developing unit
- M-PU-RL: Manual feed pickup roller
- M-SP-PD: Manual feed separation pad
11.2.2 Reader Unit

0018-0093
The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.
11.2.3 Printer Unit

0018-0094
11-1
Chapter 11
As of Jun. 2007
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks
[1] Cassette feed roller FF6-1621-000 1 100K The 2-stage cassette type uses two rollers.
[2] Cassette separation roller FF6-1621-000 1 100K The 2-stage cassette type uses two rollers.
[3] Manual feed pickup roller FL2-3202-000 1 150K
[4] Manual feed separation pad FL2-3201-000 1 150K
[5] Transfer roller FC6-4313-000 1 150K
[6] Fixing unit (100V) FM3-3652-000 1 150K
Fixing unit (120V) FM3-3651-000 1 150K
Fixing unit (230V) FM3-3650-000 1 150K
The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The parts number may change because of changes in design.
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
F-11-1
11.3 Periodical Service
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing

0018-0095
The reader and printer unit does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit.
11-2
Chapter 12 Measurement and Adjustments
Contents
Contents
12.1 Scanning System........................................................................................................................................................ 12-1

12.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS (Touch panel type)............................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass (With ADF)................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 Image Formation System ........................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................. 12-1
12.3 Electrical Adjustments............................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB (Touch panel ....................................................................................... 12-1
12.3.2 Procedure after Replacing the USB Memory (Touch panel type) ........................................................................................... 12-1
12.3.3 Actions to Take before All Clearing (Backing up the User Data) ........................................................................................... 12-1
Chapter 12
12.1 Scanning System 12.3 Electrical Adjustments
12.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS (Touch panel 12.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor
type) PCB (Touch panel
0018-0097 0018-0101
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following If you have replaced the image processor PCB with a new one, perform the
steps to perform inter-channel output correction: following operations:
1) Enter the service mode. - Using the service support tool, download the latest firmware (System/Boot)
Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional and language files.
functions key on the operation panel. - Delete the languages not used at the destination (Service mode > CLEAR
2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE". > FILE SYSTEM).
3) Press [OK]. - Input the all value printed on the service label affixed to the rear cover.
4) Press the [2] key to display "SCAN TEST". Make the following adjustments:
5) Press the [1] key to display "SHADING". - Correction of output between CIS channels
6) Press [OK]. 1) Enter the service mode.
After completion of the above procedure, the contact sensor output is com- Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional
pensated and parameters are set automatically. functions key on the operation panel.
After completion of automatic adjustment, "OK" is displayed. 2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE".
3) Press [OK].
12.1.2 Procedure after Replacing the Copyboard Glass 4) Press the [2] key to display "SCAN TEST".
(With ADF) 5) Press the [1] key to display "SHADING".
0018-0098
6) Press [OK].
imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480 After completion of the above procedure, the contact sensor output is com-
pensated and parameters are set automatically.
After replacing the copyboard glass, enter the correction values (X, Y, Z) of After completion of automatic adjustment, "OK" is displayed.
the standard white plate which are indicated on the back of the new copy- - Read position adjustment (Stream reading: Only when the ADF is installed)
board glass in the service mode. 1) Enter the service mode.
Correction value (X): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.213 Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional
Correction value (Y): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.214 functions key on the operation panel.
Correction value (Z): Service mode>#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC>No.215 2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE".
Also, rewrite the values on the service label. 3) Press [OK].
4) Press the [2] key to display "SCAN TEST".
5) Press the [3] key to display "SHEET POS ADJ".
6) Press [OK].
820686679349 The optical system starts scanning. Several seconds later, automatic adjust-
ment of the reading position finishes and "OK" appears.
correcton correcton
va l u e ( Y ) If automatic adjustment fails, "NG" appears. Perform the following
F-12-1
procedure:
Clean the white roller of the DADF and the document glass of the host
12.2 Image Formation System machine, and then retry auto adjustment.
12.3.2 Procedure after Replacing the USB Memory (Touch

12.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing panel type)
Assembly imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
0018-0102
0018-0099

If you have replaced the USB with a new one, perform the following opera-
<Going through the Developer Idling Mode> tions:
- Using the service support tool, download language files.
- Delete the languages not used at the destination (Service mode > CLEAR
> FILE SYSTEM).
After replacing the developing assembly, go through the following steps in
the developing assembly idle rotation mode before installing the toner MEMO:
cartridge. You also need to perform these operations after formatting the damaged
USB memory.
1) Plug the power cord into the outlet.
2) Open the front cover. 12.3.3 Actions to Take before All Clearing (Backing up the
3) With the front cover open, turn on the main power switch. User Data)
4) When a message appears on the operation panel display, press the fol- 0018-0103
lowing keys to enter the service mode: imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480
Additional Functions key > 2 key > 8 key > Additional Functions key
5) Select "#PRINT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
6) Select "#PRINT SW" using the + or - key, and hen press the OK key.
Confirm that the following message is displayed:
Message: #PRINT SW 001 00000000 - Performing the all-clear operation in the service mode (#CLEAR > ALL)
7) Press the following keys and confirm the message: erases/initializes the user data such as address data and user mode settings.
# key > 1 key > 1 key Be sure to back up the user data with the data export function before starting
Message: #PRINT SW 011 00000000 the all-clear operation, and then load the user data with tbe data import
8) Position the cursor to Bit-1 (second from right) using the + or - key, and function.
press the 1 key, and then confirm the following message: - To export and import user data, a PC and a USB cable are required. Have
Message: #PRINT SW 011 00000010 them on hand.
9) Press the OK key. Confirm that "SW 011" changes to "SW 012".
Message: #PRINT SW 012 00000000
10) Press the Reset key to exit the service mode.
11) Close the front cover. The machine will run in the developer idling a. Exporting user data
mode for about 1 minute. 1) Output a user data list in the following user mode.
12) When the machine stops, the idling mode ends.
Install, the toner cartridge following the above-mentioned procedure. > Report Setting > Plint List > User Data List
12-1
Chapter 12
2) Press the following keys to enter the service mode.
> 2 key > 8 key >

3) Select "#SYSTEM" using or , and then press the OK.
4) Select "#SYSTEM SW" using or , and then press the OK.
5) Press the following keys to display "SW003."
# > 0 key > 3 key
Message: #SYSTEM SW003 00001000
6) Position the cursor at Bit-6 (second from left) using or , and then
press the 1 key.
7) Press the OK key. Check that "SW003" changes to "SW004".
9) Turn off the main power switch, and then turn it on again.
10) Start the PC and connect it to this machine with a USB cable.
11) Open My Computer on the PC to check that the "Removable Disk" icon
is displayed. If the "Removable Disk" icon is not displayed, repeat the
above procedure starting with step 1.
12) Double-click the "Removable Disk" icon, and then copy the user data
(address_book.abk and user_data.dat) onto the Desktop.
13) Close the window on the Desktop.
14) Turn off the main power switch of this machine.
15) Disconnect the USB cable from this machine.
b. Importing user data

1) Press the flowing keys to enter the service mode.
> 2 key > 8 key >
2) Select "#SYSTEM" using or , and then press the OK.
3) Select "#SYSTEM SW" using or , and then press the OK.
4) Press the following keys to display "SW003".
# > 0 key > 3 key
5) Check that Bit-6 (second from left) is set to set to "1". If Bit-6 is not set to
"1", position the cursor at this bit using or and then press the 1 key.
6) Press the OK key. Check that "SW003" changes to "SW004".

8) Turn off the main power switch, and then turn it on again.
9) Open My Computer on the PC to check that the "Removal Disk" icon is
displayed.
10) Write the user data (address_book.abk and user_data.dat) copied onto
the Desktop as described in "a. Exporting user data" over the removable
disk.
11) Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.
12) Turn off the main power switch of the machine.
13) Perform steps 1) to 4) again to reset Bit-6 of "SW003" to "0".
14) Press the OK key. When "SW003" changes to "SW004", press the Reset
key to exit the service mode.
15) Check the user data list output as described in "a. Exporting user data" to
make sure that the user data has been loaded into the machine properly.
12-2
Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
13.1 Initial Checkup........................................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1.1 Site Environment...................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Checking the Paper................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems............................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.6 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2.1 Cluth/Solenoid.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids ......................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2.2 Motor........................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.2.2.1 List of Motors ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-3
13.2.3 Fan............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-4
13.2.3.1 List of Fans ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-4
13.2.4 Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.4.1 List of Sensors............................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-4
13.2.5 Switch....................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.5.1 List of Switches........................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others............................................................................................................................................................. 13-7
13.2.7 PCBs......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.7.1 List of PCBs ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-8
Chapter 13
13.1 Initial Checkup
13.1.1 Site Environment

0018-0104
a. There must be a source of power whose voltage is as specified (+/-10%). The power plug must never be disconnected day and night.
b. The machine must not be in an area subject to high humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier). The site must not be too cold or subject to dust.
The machine must not be near a source of fire.
c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
d. The machine must not be exposed to the rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be provided.
e. The area must be well ventilated. The machine must be on a level floor.
f. Be sure that there is a source of power that can be used by the machine.
13.1.2 Checking the Paper

0018-0105
a. Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon.

b. Be sure that the paper is not moist. Try using paper fresh out of package.
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper

0018-0107
a. There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited within a specific limit.
b. If transparencies are used, be sure that they are placed in the manual feed tray in the correct orientation.
13.1.4 Checking the Durables

0018-0108
Refer to the table of durables, and replace those that have reached the end of their lives.
13.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems

0018-0109
<Reader>
- Check whether the optical system (contact sensor/white panel/copyboard glass) is free from scratches, stain, foreign objects.
- Check whether the contact sensor unit moves smoothly. Check whether the rails are free from dirt.
- Check whether the contact sensor is not flickering.
- Check whether the optical system is free from dew condensation.
<Process>
- Check whether the drum unit and toner bottle are installed securely.
- Check whether the photoconductor drum is free from scratches and stain.
<Transfer>
- Check whether the transfer roller is free from scratches, stain, and deformation.
<Fixing>
- Check whether the fixing film and pressure roller are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the fixing thermistor is broken.
- Check whether the thermo switch is conductive.
<Paper transport >

- Check whether the paper transport path is free from foreign objects such as paper chips.
- Check whether the paper pickup, feed, and separation rollers are free from paper dust. Also check whether these rollers are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and
deformation.
- Check whether the registration roller and paper path are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the transport guide is free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the leading edge of paper is not folded, curled, wavy, or damp.
- Check whether use of the Canon-recommended paper/transparency solves the problem.
<Machine>
- Check whether the drive system load is heavy.
- Check whether gears are worn or cracked?
<Cassette>
- Check whether the cassette is installed properly. Check whether the paper size is set properly. Check whether the same symptom occurs when the cassette is
replaced with the cassette verified to be normal.
- Check whether the middle plate of the cassette moves smoothly. Check whether it is deformed.
- Check whether the side and rear alignment plates are adjusted properly.
- Check whether the cassette heater switch is turned on (when a cassette heater is installed).
<Service Mode>
- Check whether various adjustment values are the same as those printed on the service label.
- Check whether the output between CIS channels has been corrected.
(Service mode>TEST MODE>"2"(SCANTEST)>"1")
- Check whether the read position has been adjusted properly. (Stream reading: Only when the ADF is installed)
(Service mode>TEST MODE>"2"(SCANTEST)>"3"(SHEET POS ADJ))
- Check whether the error has been cleared.
(Service mode>CLEAR>ERR)
<General>
- Check whether the power cord is plugged in the outlet securely.
- Check whether the specified AC voltage is applied to the outlet.
- Check whether sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids are operating normally. Check whether connectors are connected properly.
13-1
Chapter 13
(Check the power supply and signal routes with reference to the general circuit diagram.)
- Check whether all cables are routed properly and all screws are not loose.
- Check whether all outer covers are attached.
- Check whether the main power switch and the power switch on the operation pane are turned on.
- Check the power cables and signal cables of options are connected properly.
- Check whether no fuse on PCBs is blown.
- Check whether the user uses the machine properly.
13.1.6 Others
0018-0110
If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems.
a. condensation on the BD sensor is likely to cause problems associated with E100
b. condensation on the dust-proof glass is likely to cause poor image density in sub scanning direction
c. condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause light images
d. condensation on the pickup or feed guide can cause paper feed problems
If the problem given in d. above has occurred, dry wipe the units in the feed system. Do not open the package containing a toner cartridge, developing unit, or drum
unit right after it has been brought in from a cold to warm place to avoid condensation. Be sure to leave it alone for a while (1 to 2 hr), opening it after it has become
fully used to the temperature of the site.
13.2 Outline of Electrical Components
13.2.1 Cluth/Solenoid
13.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids

0018-0111
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no clutch/solenoid.
<Printer Unit>
Symbol Name Function

CL201 Manual pickup clutch Drives the manual pickup roller.
CL202 Cassette feed clutch Drives the cassette feed roller.
CL203 Registration clutch Drives the registration clutch.
SL201 Manual pickup solenoid Drives the manual pickup roller.

SL202 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Drives the cassette 1 pickup roller.
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB

CL201 FK2-1070 J219
CL202 FK2-5367 J211
CL203 FK2-5350 J210
SL201 FK2-1072 J219
SL202 FK2-1082 J209
CL203
CL201
SL201
SL202
CL202
F-13-1
13-2
Chapter 13
13.2.2 Motor
13.2.2.1 List of Motors

0018-0113
<Reader Unit>

M401 Reader motor Drives the carriage.
Symbol Part No. Reader controller PCB Error

M401 FK2-1066 J409
M401
F-13-2
<Printer Unit>

M201 Fixing motor Drives the fixing unit.
M203 Polygon motor Drives the laser scanner.
M204 Main motor Drives the main parts of the printer.
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Error

M201 FK2-5348 J202 E007, E808
M203 Scanner unit J205
FM3-3695
M204 FK2-5347 J208 E010
M201
M203
M204
F-13-3
13-3
Chapter 13
13.2.3 Fan
13.2.3.1 List of Fans

0018-0114
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no fan.
<Printer Unit>
T-13-1

FM1 Heat discharge fan Cools fixing unit.
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Error

FM1 FK2-5368 J219 E805
FM1
F-13-4
13.2.4 Sensor
13.2.4.1 List of Sensors

0018-0115
13-4
Chapter 13
<Reader Unit>
T-13-2

SR401 CIS HP sensor Detects the CIS home position.
SR402 Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (rear) Detects opening/closing of the copyboard cover.
SR403 Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (front) Detects opening/closing of the copyboard cover.
SR404 Original sensor 1 Detects the original size (AB or INCH/AB).
SR406 Original sensor 3 Detects the original size (all destinations).
SR408 Original sensor 5 Detects the original size (INCH/A).
SR409 Original sensor 5 Detects the original size (INCH).
SR410 Original sensor 5 Detects the original size (A).
CIS1 CIS Reads the original.
T-13-3
Symbol Part No. Reader controller PCB Jam code

SR401 WG8-5696 J406
SR402 WG8-5696 J405
SR403 WG8-5696 J405 000f
SR404 FH7-7569 J407
SR405 FH7-7569 J407
SR406 FH7-7569 J413
SR407 FH7-7569 J413
SR408 FH7-7569 J1926
SR409 FH7-7569 J1927
SR410 FH7-7569 J1928
CIS1 FM2-3369 J408
SR407 SR408
SR406
SR403 SR404/SR409
SR402
SR405/SR410
SR401
CIS1
F-13-5
13-5
Chapter 13
<Printer Unit>
T-13-4

SR101 Fixing film speed sensor Detects the fixing film speed.
SR202 Fixing delivery sensor Detects fixing delivery.
SR203 No.1 delivery sensor Detects delivery.
SR204 Cassette 1 paper sensor Detects presence/absence of cassette 1 paper.
SR206 Waste toner full detection sensor Detects the waste toner full status.
SR207 No.1 paper full sensor Detects the No.1 paper full status.
SR208 Manual paper sensor Detects presence/absence of manually fed paper.
SR209 Registration sensor Detects registration paper.
SR210 Timing sensor Detects refeeding.
[1] Humidity sensor PCB Detects humidity.
TH1 Fixing main thermistor Detects the fixing heater temperature.

TH2 Fixing sub thermistor Detects the fixing heater temperature.
TP1 Thermo switch Cuts off the heater power supply line when an abnormal temperature is
detected.
T-13-5
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Jam code

SR201 FG3-3501 J217
SR202 WG8-5696 J217 010c, 0210, 0214, 1118
SR203 WG8-5696 J221 010c, 0210, 0214, 1118
SR204 WG8-5696 J213
SR206 WG8-5696 J216
SR207 WG8-5696 J201
SR208 WG8-5696 J219
SR209 WG8-5696 J212 0104, 0208, 010c, 0214, 1118
[1] WP2-5254 J222
T-13-6
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Power supply PCB

TH1,TH2 Fixing film unit J217
FM3-3654(120V)
TP1 J13
FM3-3653(230V)
SR207
SR203 [1]
TH1, TH2, TP1
SR208
SR101
SR204
SR209 SR202 SR206
F-13-6
13-6
Chapter 13
13.2.5 Switch
13.2.5.1 List of Switches

0018-0116
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no switch.
<Printer Unit>

SW2 Front cover switch Detects opening/closing of the front cover.
SW3 Left door switch Detects opening/closing of the left door.
SW4 Cassette 1 size detection switch Detects the cassette 1 paper size.
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Power supply PCB

SW2 FM2-4433 J12
SW3 FM2-4020 J12
SW4 WC2-5332 J213
SW2
SW3 SW4
F-13-7
13.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
13.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others

0018-0117
13-7
Chapter 13
<Reader Unit>
Symbol Name Part No. Function

Prevents dew condensation on the ADF
H3 Reader heater (left) NPN
reading glass.
Prevents dew condensation on the
H4 Reader heater (right) NPN
copyboard glass.
H4
H3
F-13-8
<Printer unit>

H1 Fixing main heater Used as the main heater for fixing.
H2 Fixing sub heater Used as the sub heater for fixing.
H6 Cassette heater Prevents paper in the cassette from absorbing moisture.
VA1 Varistor Used as a varistor.
SP1 Speaker Used as a speaker (for fax unit).
13-8
Chapter 13
Symbol Part No.

Fixing film unit
H1,H2 FM3-3654(120V)
FM3-3653(230V)
H6 FM3-3712(100V)
FM3-3714(230V)
Symbol Part No. Modem PCB

VA1 FH5-3543
SP1 FK2-1265 J1203
H1, H2
VA1 SP1
H6
F-13-9
13.2.7 PCBs
13.2.7.1 List of PCBs

0018-0118
<Reader Unit>

[1] Reader controller PCB FM2-4792 controls the reader unit/ADF
[1]
F-13-10
13-9
Chapter 13
<Printer unit>

[1] Laser driver PCB Scanner unit controls the laser unit drive
FM3-3695
[2] BD PCB generates the BD signal
Image processor PCB FM3-3320(LCD type) processes output image data for the printer unit
[3]
FM3-3319(Touch panel type)
[4] 128MB RAM FM3-3324 temporarily retains image data
[5] LAN PCB FM3-3323 network interface/printer function control
Seriar interface PCB FM2-4062(SERIAL INTERFACE-A2) coin vendor interface
[6]
FM3-3326(Serial Interface Kit-H1)
[7] Modem PCB FM3-3321 control the fax
PCL PCB FM3-3328(LCD type) PCL function control
[8]
[9] NCU PCB FM3-3332 controls the line switching operation
modular PCB FM2-4777(120V) fax line interface
[10]
FM2-4772(230V)
DC controller PCB FM3-2992:120V/18cpm controls the printer unit/option
FM3-2993:230V/18cpm
FM3-2994:120V/22cpm
FM3-2995:230V/22cpm
[11]
FM3-2996:120V/25cpm
FM3-2997:230V/25cpm
FM3-2998:120V/30cpm
FM3-2999:230V/30cpm
Option power supply PCB FK2-1085(120V) Option power supply
[12]
FK2-1086(230V)
[13] Heater PCB FM2-4021 heater power switch
Operation panel PCB Operation panel unit controls the operation panel
FK2-5340(LCD type: USA/others)
FK2-5341(LCD type: Europe)
[14] FK2-5342(LCD type: China)
FK2-5343(LCD type: Taiwan)
FK2-5344(LCD type: Korea)
Power supply PCB FK2-5355(120V) printer power supply
[15]
FK2-5356(230V)
[16] HVT PCB FM3-2987 high-voltage power supply
[17] FAX PANEL PCB FM3-2991 control the fax panel
13-10
[3]
[2] [4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[13]
[12] [11]
F-13-11
[14]
[17]
[15]
[16]
F-13-12
Chapter 14 Error Code
Contents
Contents
14.1 Error Code Table ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1.1 List of Error Codes................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Error Code Details ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Error Code Details.................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.3 Jam Code ................................................................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit) ........................................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher) .............................................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF) ................................................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit)........................................................................................................................................ 14-6
14.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray) ............................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.4 Finisher Error Codes.................................................................................................................................................. 14-7
14.4.1 Error Code Details.................................................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.5 Fax Error Codes....................................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.5.1.1 Error Code Outline....................................................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.5.2 User Error Code ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.5.2.1 User Error Code ........................................................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.5.3 Service Error Code ................................................................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.5.3.1 Service Error Code....................................................................................................................................................................................14-10
Chapter 14
14.1 Error Code Table
14.1.1 List of Error Codes

0018-0390

T-14-1
Error Code Detail Code Error Name/Explanation of Error

E000 0000 Fixing temperature abnormal rise
0000 Fixing unit temperature rise detection (by main thermistor)
E001
0001 Fixing unit temperature rise detection (by sub thermistor)
E002 0000 Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise
0000 Low fixing temperature detection after standby (by main thermistor)
E003
0001 Low fixing temperature detection after standby (by sub thermistor)
E007 0000 Fixing film rotation error
E010 0000 Main motor rotation error
0001 Waste toner full detection
E019
0002 Waster toner full detection sensor failure
E052 0000 Duplex unit connection error
E100 0000 BD cycle out of range
0001 Error on writing and readout ROM of image processor PCB (main ROM).
E196
0002 Error on writing and readout ROM of image processor PCB (option ROM).
E197 0000 Erroneous communication with printer engine
E261 0000 Zero-cross signal error
E500 0001 Finisher communication error
E520 0000 Offset error
E531 0000 Stapling error
0001 Paper surface not detected (standard tray)
0002 Not moved within the specified time (standard tray)
E540
0003 Sensor not reached within 3 seconds (standard tray)
0005 Encoder clock failure (standard tray)
0001 Paper surface not detected (optional tray)
0002 Not moved within the specified time (optional tray)
E542
0003 Sensor not reached within 3 seconds (optional tray)
0005 Encoder clock failure (optional tray)
E575 0000 Stack delivery error
E584 0000 Shutter failure
E716 0000 Erroneous communication with optional cassette
0000 Erroneous communication with card reader (serial communication)
E719
0002 Erroneous communication with coin vender (serial communication)
E730 0000 Inside error of the image processor PCB (PDL system error)
E733 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and printer
E736 0000 CCU communication error
E739 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and network board
0001 Language file/boot ROM/USB memory error
0002
E744
0003
0004
E805 0000 Fan failure
E808 0000 Fixing drive circuit failure
14-1
Chapter 14
14.2 Error Code Details
14.2.1 Error Code Details

0018-0393

T-14-2
Display
Detail Code Main Cause/Symptom Countermeasure
Code
E000 0000 Startup error
The temperature detected by the main or sub thermistor does - Check the fixing film connector.
not rise to the specified value during startup control. - Replace the fixing film unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
E001 0000 Abnormally high temperature (detected by main thermistor)

The main thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
(240 deg C) during temperature control. - Replace the fixing film unit.
0001 Abnormally high temperature (detected by sub thermistor)

The sub thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
(295 deg C) during temperature control. - Replace the fixing film unit.
E002 0000 Low temperature during temperature control.

The target temperature is not reached during temperature - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
control. - Replace the fixing film unit.
E003 0000 Abnormally low temperature (detected by main thermistor)

After the temperature detected by the main thermistor has - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
reached the specified value, it does not reach the specified value - Replace the fixing film unit.
during initial rotation. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0001 Abnormally low temperature (detected by sub thermistor)

After the temperature detected by the sub thermistor has - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
reached the specified value, it does not reach the specified value - Replace the fixing film unit.
during initial rotation. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
E007 0000 Fixing film sensor failure

The fixing film sensor is faulty. - Check the connector of the fixing film sensor.
- Replace the fixing film sensor.
E010 0000 Main motor failure

The main motor is faulty. - Check the connector of the main motor.
- Replace the main motor.
E019 0000 Waste toner full detection
The waste toner full state was detected. Replace the drum unit.
0001 Waster toner full detection sensor is faulty.
The waste toner full state was detected continuously for five or - Check the connector of the waster toner full sensor.
more seconds while the main motor was turning. - Replace the waste toner full sensor.
E052 0000 Erroneous connection to duplex unit

Disconnection of the duplex unit was detected after power-on, - Check the connectors of the duplex unit and DC controller PCB.
detection of normal connection to the duplex unit, and start of - Replace the duplex controller PCB.
communication. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
E100 0000 BD detection PCB failure

The BD detection PCB is faulty. - Check the connector of the BD detection PCB.
- Replace the laser scanner unit.
14-2
Chapter 14
Display
Code
E196 0001 Image processor PCB failure
Error on writing and readout ROM of image processor PCB - Putting the switch on/off of the power supply.
(mainn ROM). - Replace the image processor PCB.
0002 Image processor PCB failure

Error on writing and readout ROM of image processor PCB - Putting the switch on/off of the power supply.
(option ROM). - Replace the image processor PCB.
E197 0000 Printer engine communication error

Erroneous communication between the DC controller PCB and - Check the connectors of the DC controller PCB and image
image processor PCB was detected. processor PCB.
- Replace the DC controller PCB for normal connection.
- Replace the image processor PCB.
E261 0000 Zero-cross signal error
If failed to detect zero-cross signal cycle of the power supply - Replace the power supply PCB.
when initializing. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
When the input of the zero-signal failed continuously for three
seconds while controlling the temperature adjustment.
E716 0000 Erroneous communication with optional cassette

Disconnection of the optional cassette was detected after - Check the connectors of the optional cassette PCB and DC
power-on, detection of normal connection to the optional controller PCB.
cassette, and start of communication. - Replace the optional cassette PCB for normal connection.
E719 0000 Erroneous communication with card reader (serial communication)

- Disconnection from the card reader has been detected since - Check the connectors of the card reader and image processor PCB.
communication started after confirmation of normal connection - Replace the card reader for normal connection.
to the card reader (after power-on). - Replace the image processor PCB.
- A serial communication error has occurred. (The serial
communication error cannot be recovered.)
0002 Erroneous communication with coin vendor (serial communication)

- Disconnection from the coin vendor has been detected since - Check the connection between the image processor PCB and serial
communication started after confirmation of normal connection PCB.
to the coin vendor (after power-on). - Check the connectors of the serial PCB and coin vendor for normal
- A serial communication error has occurred. (The serial connection.
communication error cannot be recovered.) - Replace the serial PCB.
- Check the coin vendor.
E730 0000 Inside error of the image processor PCB (PDL system error)
The inside of the image processor PCB is faulty. - Putting the switch on/off of the power supply.
E733 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and printer

Cannot communicate with the printer at startup. - Check the connectors of the DC controller PCB and image
processor PCB for normal connection.
- Check the power supply of the printer (Check whether initialization
is performed at startup).
- Replace the DC controller PCB or image processor PCB.
E736 0000 CCU communication error

The installed modem PCB is incompatible. - Check the connectors of the image processor PCB and modem.
- Replace the modem PCB.
14-3
Chapter 14
Display
Code
E739 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and network board
The installed network board is incompatible. - Check the connectors of the image processor PCB and LAN PCB
for normal connection.
- Replace the LAN PCB.
E744 Language file/boot ROM/USB memory error
0001 The language file version does not match Bootable. Download a language file of the correct version.
0002 The language file is longer than the permitted size. Download a language file of the correct version.
0003 The language file version does not match Bootable. Download a language file of the correct version.
0004 Language file read error Download a language file of the correct version.
E805 0000 Fan failure
The fan is faulty. - Check the fan connector.
- Replace the fan.
E808 0000 Fixing drive circuit failure
- The heater does not turn on. - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
- A fixing drive motor failure was detected. - Replace the fixing film unit.
- Replace the fixing drive motor.
- Replace the power supply PCB.
14-4
Chapter 14
14.3 Jam Code
14.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit)

0018-0394

T-14-3
Code Name Sensor No. Description

0104 Delay jam in paper SR209 The registration sensor cannot detect the leading edge of paper from the moment paper pickup starts to the
pickup section moment the jam detection time is reached.
0208 Stationary jam in paper SR209 The registration sensor cannot detect the no paper status specified time before the leading edge of the picked
pickup section up paper reaches this sensor.
010c Delay jam in deliver SR202, - The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within the specified time after turning on of the
section SR203, registration clutch.
SR209 - The fixing delivery sensor detected absence of paper within the specified time after the sensor had detected
presence of paper within the specified time after turning on of the registration clutch.
- The No.1 delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within the specified time after turning on of the
fixing delivery sensor.
0210 Stationary jam in SR202, - The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the specified time after turning off of the
delivery section SR203 registration clutch.
- The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the specified time after the sensor detected
the leading edge of paper.
- The No.1 delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the specified time after the sensor detected
the leading edge of paper.
0214 Stationary jam in SR202, Paper was detected in the paper transport path during initial rotation, during automatic delivery, at the end
machine SR203, of cleaning, or at reception of an emergency stop command.
SR209
1118 Door open jam SR202, The door was opened when there was printing paper in the transport path.
SR203,
SR209,
SW2, SW3
14.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher)

0018-0395

T-14-4

0130 Delayed feed jam PI5 The inlet sensor is not turned on within the specified time after reception of a paper ejection signal from
the host machine.
0231 Staying paper jam PI5 The inlet sensor is not turned off even if paper is fed by the specified distance after the leading edge of
the paper from the host machine has passed through the sensor.
0033 Stack ejection jam PI1 When a paper stack is ejected, the HP sensor is not turned off within the specified time.
0035 Staple jam Stapler HP The stapler HP sensor was turned off once after start of stapler operation, but the HP has not been reached
sensor within the specified time.
(built in
stapler)
1036 Power-on jam PI5 The inlet sensor detected paper at power-on.
1137 Door open jam SW1 The front cover switch detected opening of the front cover during standby or copy operation.
14.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF)

0018-0396

T-14-5

0000 Unknown jam - Other errors
0007 Initial stationary PI6,PI7,PI8 Paper is detected in the transport path before the DADF starts initial operation.
0008 Read sensor delay PI7,PI8 The read sensor does not detect paper when the paper has been fed by the predetermined distance
since reception of a pickup request.
0009 Read sensor stationary PI7 The trailing edge of paper is not detected when the paper has been fed by the predetermined distance
since detection of it by the read sensor.
000a Paper absence (Pull out the document.) PI11 The Document set sensor has been held off since start of pickup.
000c Delivery reversal sensor delay PI6,PI7 The delivery reversal sensor does not detect paper since the paper has been fed by the predetermined
distance since the read sensor was turned on.
000d Delivery reversal sensor stationary PI6 The trailing edge of paper is not detected when the paper has been fed by the predetermined distance
since the delivery reversal sensor detected the paper.
000e ADF cover open PI10 The feeder cover was opened during operation (of the drive system).
000f User ADF open sensor of The ADF was opened during operation (of the drive system).
the reader
unit
0010 Pickup NG - The registration sensor has been held off since paper pickup started.
14-5
Chapter 14
14.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit)

0018-0397

T-14-6

0120 Delay jam at duplex paper sensor 1 SR1002 The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn on within the specified time after the delivery
sensor on the main unit side turns on.
0124 Delay jam at duplex paper sensor 2 SR1003 The duplex paper sensor 2 does not turn on within the specified time after the duplex
reverse motor starts.
0221 Stationary jam at duplex paper sensor 1 SR1002 - The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn off when the specified time has lapsed since
the duplex paper sensor 2 turned on.
- The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn off when the paper with a longitudinal length
of 280 mm reaches the standby position (about 90 mm from the duplex paper sensor 2).
0228 Stationary jam at duplex paper sensor 2 SR1003 The duplex paper sensor 2 does not turn off when the specified time has lapsed since
the feed motor started.
14.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray)

0018-0398

T-14-7

010e Delay jam at No.2 delivery section SR1101 The No.2 delivery sensor does not detect presence of paper within the specified time after turning
on of the fixing delivery sensor.
0212 Stationary jam at No.2 delivery section SR1101 Absence of paper is not detected within the specified time after turning on of the No.2 delivery
sensor.
14-6
Chapter 14
14.4 Finisher Error Codes
14.4.1 Error Code Details

0018-0399

T-14-8
Display Detail
Main Cause/Symptom Countermeasure
code Code
E500 0001 Finisher communication error
Data communication could not be performed - Check the connectors of the finisher controller PCB and DC controller PCB for
normally. It has been retried three times in vain. normal connection.
- Replace the finisher controller PCB.
E520 0001 - Offset motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Offset HP sensor failure
- The offset motor was driven for 1000 ms in the - Check the connector of the offset HP sensor.
HP sensor approach direction, but the offset HP - Check the connector of the offset motor.
sensor did not turn on. - Replace the offset HP sensor.
- Replace the offset motor.
0002 - Offset motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Offset HP sensor failure
- The offset motor was driven for 1000 ms in the - Check the connector of the offset HP sensor.
HP sensor escape direction, but the offset HP - Check the connector of the offset motor.
sensor did not turn off. - Replace the offset HP sensor.
- Replace the offset motor.
E531 0001 - Staple unit failure
- Staple HP sensor failure
- Finisher controller PCB failure
- The staple home position was not left when 400 - Check the connector of the staple unit.
ms have lapsed since start of staple operation. - Replace the staple unit.
0002 - Staple unit failure
- Staple HP sensor failure
- Finisher controller PCB failure
- The staple home position had been left once, but - Check the connector of the staple unit.
it was not reached again when 400 ms have lapsed - Replace the staple unit.
since start of staple operation. In addition, the - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
staple home position could not be reached by
performing reverse operation for 400 ms.
14-7
Chapter 14
Display Detail
code Code
E540 0001 - Standard tray shift motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Standard tray HP sensor failure
- Standard tray clock sensor failure
- Standard tray shift motor load failure
The standard tray was moved but the paper - Check the connector of the standard tray HP sensor.
surface was not detected. - Check the connector of the standard tray clock sensor.
- Check the connector of the standard tray shift motor.
- Replace the standard tray HP sensor.
- Replace the standard tray clock sensor.
- Replace the standard tray shift motor.
0002 - Standard tray shift motor or finisher controller PCB failure
Cannot move (to the pickup position) within the - Check the connector of the standard tray HP sensor.
specified time. - Check the connector of the standard tray clock sensor.
The standard tray was operated, but it did not - Check the connector of the standard tray HP sensor.
reach the sensor within 300 ms. - Check the connector of the standard tray clock sensor.
The encoder clock signal was not detected two or - Check the connector of the standard tray HP sensor.
more times when the standard tray was operated - Check the connector of the standard tray clock sensor.
for 300 ms. - Check the connector of the standard tray shift motor.
14-8
Chapter 14
Display Detail
code Code
E542 0001 - Optional tray motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Optional tray HP sensor failure
- Optional tray clock sensor failure
- Optional tray shift motor load failure
The optional tray was operated, but the paper - Check the connector of the optional tray HP sensor.
surface was not detected. - Check the connector of the optional tray clock sensor.
- Check the connector of the optional tray shift motor.
- Replace the optional tray HP sensor.
- Replace the optional tray clock sensor.
- Replace the optional tray shift motor.
0002 - Optional tray motor or finisher controller PCB failure
Cannot move (to the pickup position) within the - Check the connector of the optional tray HP sensor.
specified time. - Check the connector of the optional tray clock sensor.
- The optional tray was moved upward, but it did - Check the connector of the optional tray HP sensor.
not reach the HP sensor within 3000 ms. - Check the connector of the optional tray clock sensor.
- The encoder clock signal was not detected two or - Check the connector of the optional tray HP sensor.
more times when the optional tray was operated - Check the connector of the optional tray clock sensor.
for 300 ms. - Check the connector of the optional tray shift motor.
E575 0001 - Stack delivery motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Stack delivery HP sensor failure
- The stack delivery motor was driven for 2000 ms - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP sensor.
in the stack delivery direction (HP sensor - Check the connector of the stack delivery motor.
approach direction), but the stack delivery HP - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP sensor.
sensor did not turn on. - Replace the stack delivery motor.
0002 - Stack delivery motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Stack delivery HP sensor failure
- The stack delivery motor was driven for 2000 ms - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP sensor.
in the HP sensor escape direction, but the stack - Check the connector of the stack delivery motor.
delivery HP sensor did not turn off. - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP sensor.
- Replace the stack delivery motor.
E584 0001 - Shutter drive motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Shutter open detection sensor failure
- Shutter clutch failure
- The shutter open sensor did not turn on when - Check the connector of the shutter open sensor.
1000 ms have lapsed since the shutter unit had - Check the connector of the shutter clutch.
performed open operation, resulting in incomplete - Check the connector of the shutter motor.
open operation. - Replace the shutter open sensor.
- Replace the shutter clutch.
- Replace the shutter drive motor.
0002 - Shutter drive motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Shutter open detection sensor failure
- Shutter clutch failure
- The shutter open sensor did not turn off when - Check the connector of the shutter open sensor.
1000 ms have lapsed since the shutter unit had - Check the connector of the shutter clutch.
performed close operation, resulting in - Check the connector of the shutter motor.
incomplete close operation. - Replace the shutter open sensor.
- Replace the shutter clutch.
- Replace the shutter drive motor.
14-9
Chapter 14
14.5 Fax Error Codes
14.5.1 Outline
14.5.1.1 Error Code Outline

0018-0400
An error code is used to indicate a fault in a machine, and is indicated in the machine's LCD or reports, showing the nature (symptoms) of the fault. Using the error
code, the user or the service man can readily find out how to correct the fault by simply referring to the User's Manual or service manual.
An error code may be either of the following two types:
User Error Codes
A fault indicated as a user error code is one that can easily be corrected by the user, as by operating the machine. It takes the form of "#+number."
Service Error Codes
If a fault calls for a service man for correction, it is indicated as a service man error code in the form of "##+number" or "SYSTEM ERROR E+number."
Memo
A service error code expressed in the form of "##+number" will not appear on the LCD, Error Tx Report, or Activity Report while the machine remains
in factory default state. To check a service error code, shift bit 0 of service soft switch #1 SSSW SW01 to '1'.
Memo
Display only the error codes which are newly incorporated in this machine as well as which require remedies unique to the product. For the causes and
countermeasures of other error codes, refer to the separate G3/G4 Facsimile Error Code List (Rev. 2).
14.5.2 User Error Code
14.5.2.1 User Error Code

0018-0401

T-14-9
No. Tx/Rx Description

#0001 [Tx] an original has jammed.
#0003 [Tx/Rx] tine-out for copying or sending/receiving a single page has occurred.
#0005 [Tx/Rx] time-out for initial identification (T0/T1) has occurred.
#0009 [Rx] recording paper has jammed or is absent.
#0012 [Tx] recording paper is absent at the other party.
#0018 [Tx/Rx] auto call initiation has failed.
#0037 [Rx] image memory overflow at time of reception has occurred.
#0059 [Tx] The number you dial and connected number (CSI) does not match.
#0995/0099 [Tx/Rx] a memory communication reservation has been cancelled.
14.5.3 Service Error Code
14.5.3.1 Service Error Code

0018-0402

T-14-10

##0100 [Tx] at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.
##0101 [Tx/Rx] the modem speed does not match that of the other party.
##0102 [Tx] at time of transmission, fall-back cannot be used.
##0103 [Rx] at time of reception, EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT).
##0104 [Tx] at time of transmission, RTN or PIN is received.
##0106 [Rx] at time of reception, the procedural signal is received for 6 sec while in wait for the signal.
##0107 [Rx] at time of reception, the transmitting party cannot use fall-back.
##0109 [Tx] at time of transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP is received, and the procedural signal has been sent
more than specified.
##0111 [Tx/Rx] memory error has occurred.
##0114 [Rx] at time of reception, RTN is transmitted.
##0200 [Rx] at time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec.
##0201 [Tx/Rx] DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.
##0220 [Tx/Rx] system error (main program out of control) has occurred.
##0232 [Tx] encoding error has occurred.
##0237 [Rx] decoding error has occurred.
##0261 [Tx/Rx] system error has occurred.
14-10
Chapter 14

##0284 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of TCF.
##0285 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOP.
##0286 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOM.
##0287 [Tx] at time of transmission DCN is received after transmission of MPS.
##0288 [Tx] after transmission of EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0289 [Tx] after transmission of EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0290 [Tx] after transmission of MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.
##0670 [Tx] at time of V.8 late start, the V.8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected to be detected, and the CI signal is expected
to be transmitted in response; however, the procedure fails to advance, and the line is released because of T1 time-out.
##0671 [Rx] at time of V.8 arrival, procedure fails to move to phase 2 after detection of CM signal from caller, causing T1 time-out and
releasing line
##0672 [Tx] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release
the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0673 [Rx] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the
line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0674 [Tx] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter stops, causing
the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0675 [Rx] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter stops, causing the
machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0750 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-NULL, causing the procedural signal
to be transmitted more than specified.
##0752 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-NULL.
##0753 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-NULL,
or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0754 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-NULL.
##0755 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to
be transmitted more than specified.
##0757 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS-MPS.
##0758 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or
T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0759 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS.
##0760 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-EOM, causing the procedural signal to
##0762 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOM.
##0763 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or
##0764 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOM.
##0765 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-EOP, causing the procedural signal to
##0767 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOP.
##0768 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOP, or
##0769 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOP.
##0770 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-NULL, causing the procedural signal
##0772 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
##0773 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-NULL,
##0774 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
##0775 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-MPS, causing the procedural signal to
##0777 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
##0778 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission EOR-MPS, or
##0779 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
##0780 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOM, causing the procedural signal
##0782 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
##0783 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-EOM,
##0784 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
##0785 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOP, causing the procedural signal to
##0787 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
14-11
Chapter 14

##0788 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-EOP, or
##0789 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
##0790 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, ERR is transmitted after transmission of EOR-Q.
##0791 [Tx/Rx] while ECM mode procedure is under way, a signal other than a meaningful signal is received.
##0792 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, PPS-NULL cannot be detected over partial page processing.
##0793 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, no effective frame is received while high-speed signal reception is under way, thus causing time-out.
##0794 [Tx] at time of ECM reception, PPR with all 0s is received.
##0795 [Tx/Rx] a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.
14-12
Chapter 15 Service Mode
Contents
Contents
15.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1

15.1.1 Outline of Service Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Using the Mode (Touch Panel Type) ....................................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 Default Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.1 Service Mode Menus................................................................................................................................................................ 15-2
15.3 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW)........................................................................................................................ 15-9
15.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-9
15.3.2 SSSW-SW01: ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.2.1 List of Functions ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0....................................................................................................................................................................15-10
15.3.3 SSSW-SW03 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.3.1 List of Functions .......................................................................................................................................................................................15-10
15.3.4 SSSW-SW04 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.5 SSSW-SW05 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.3.6 SSSW-SW12 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.3.7 SSSW-SW13 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-13
15.3.8 SSSW-SW14 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-13
15.3.9 SSSW-SW25 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-13
15.3.10 SSSW-SW28 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-14
15.3.10.1 List of Functions .....................................................................................................................................................................................15-14
15.3.10.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0..................................................................................................................................................................15-14
15.3.11 SSSW-SW30 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-15
15.3.11.1 List of Functions .....................................................................................................................................................................................15-15
Contents
15.3.11.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 ................................................................................................................................................................. 15-15

15.3.12 SSSW-SW33 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-15
15.3.12.1 List of Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-15
15.3.12.5 Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 - Bit4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-16
15.3.13 SSSW-SW34 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-16
15.3.13.1 List of Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-16
15.4 Menu Switch Settings (MENU)...............................................................................................................................15-17
15.4.1 Menu Switch Composition..................................................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer> ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor> .......................................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level>......................................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit>....................................................................................................................... 15-17
15.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit> .................................................................................................................................. 15-17
15.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal> ....................................................................................................................... 15-18
15.5 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.) ..................................................................................................15-18
15.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition ........................................................................................................................................ 15-18
15.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN transmission condition (3)> . 15-18
15.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)> ............................................................................................................................... 15-18
15.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)> ............................................................................................................................. 15-19
15.5.5 <010: line connection identification length> ......................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)>..................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer>.......................................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover> ........................................................................................ 15-19
15.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short)><019: pseudo ...
15-19
15.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (short)><022: pseudo CI
signal pattern OFF time length (long)> ........................................................................................................................................ 15-19
15.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover>............................................................................................................. 15-19
15.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover> ................................................................................. 15-19
15.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time>.............................................................................. 15-19
15.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length> ............................................................................................... 15-19
15.5.15 <055: Acquisition period of environmental log data> ......................................................................................................... 15-19
15.5.16 <056 - 061: Count type select > ........................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15.6 Scanner Function Settings (SCANNER) .................................................................................................................15-23
15.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch .............................................................................................................................................................. 15-23
15.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration ........................................................................................................................ 15-23
15.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning> .................................................................................................................... 15-25
15.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point> ........................................................................ 15-25
15.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment> ........................................................................................................................ 15-25
15.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment>.................................................................................................................... 15-25
15.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction>........................................................................................................................ 15-25
15.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change> ............................................................................................................................. 15-25
15.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>.......................................... 15-25
15.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>.................................... 15-25
15.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction ((copy:scanning on ADF)> ........................................................................ 15-25
15.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine:scanning on ADF)> .................................................................. 15-25
15.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine:scanning on ADF)>........................................................................... 15-26
15.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard:scanning on ADF)>.................................................................... 15-26
15.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>........................................ 15-26
15.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>.................................... 15-26
15.6.17 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready>........................................................................... 15-26
15.6.18 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready> ........................................................................... 15-26
Contents
15.6.19 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready> ...................................................................... 15-26
15.6.20 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)> .................................................................................................................................... 15-26
15.6.21 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)>................................................................................................................................. 15-26
15.6.22 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)> ................................................................................................................................... 15-26
15.6.23 <213: XYZ correction value (X) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions)) ....................................... 15-27
15.6.24 <214: XYZ correction value (Y) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions)......................................... 15-27
15.6.25 <215: XYZ correction value (Z) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions) ......................................... 15-27
15.7 Printer Function Settings (PRINTER) ..................................................................................................................... 15-27
15.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW) .................................................................................................................................... 15-27
15.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05.............................................................................................................................................................................................15-27
15.7.1.1.1 List of Functions ...............................................................................................................................................................................15-27
15.7.1.1.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 7............................................................................................................................................................15-28
15.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14.............................................................................................................................................................................................15-28
15.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15.............................................................................................................................................................................................15-29
15.7.1.4 SSSW-SW18.............................................................................................................................................................................................15-30
15.7.2 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.) ................................................................................................................ 15-30
15.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)> ...........................................................................................................................15-31
15.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)>..........................................................................................................................................15-31
15.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)> ....................................................................................................................................15-31
15.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>....................................................................................................................15-31
15.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)> ...............................................................................................................................15-31
15.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)>...........................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)>..........................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.12 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)>.............................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.13 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)> ...........................................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.14 <053: Margin adjustment at the leading edge of the copy>....................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.15 <054: Margin adjustment at the trailing edge of the copy>....................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.16 <055: Margin adjustment at the right edge of the copy>........................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.17 <056: Margin adjustment at the left edge of the copy> ..........................................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.18 <058:: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual feed tray)>...............................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.19 <059:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Cassette)>..............................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.20 <060:Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Option cassette)>....................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.21 <061:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Duplex unit)> ........................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.22 <062:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For plain paper)> ...................................................................................................15-32
15.7.2.23 <063:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For rough paper)> ..................................................................................................15-33
15.7.2.24 <064:Mode for preventing the temperature rise of the end > .................................................................................................................15-33
15.7.2.25 <065:Mode for reducing sand image>....................................................................................................................................................15-33
15.7.2.26 <066:Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode>.................................................................................................................................15-33
15.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST)....................................................................................................................................................... 15-33
Contents
15.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility ............................................................................................................................................ 15-33

15.8 Network Parameter Settings (NETWORK) .............................................................................................................15-34
15.8.1 Confirmation of contents of CA certificate............................................................................................................................ 15-34
15.9 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM) .................................................................................................................15-34
15.9.1 Bit Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................................................. 15-34
15.10 Registration of Accessories (ACC)........................................................................................................................15-34
15.10.1 Accessory Registration......................................................................................................................................................... 15-34
15.11 License Management (LMS) .................................................................................................................................15-35
15.11.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-35
15.11.2 Method of confirming license option ................................................................................................................................... 15-35
15.11.3 Inactivity of the transmitted license ..................................................................................................................................... 15-36
15.12 eRDS Parameter Settings (E-RDS)........................................................................................................................15-37
15.12.1 Settings Related to e-RDS.................................................................................................................................................... 15-37
15.13 Counter Indication (COUNTER) ...........................................................................................................................15-37
15.13.1 Counters ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15-37
15.13.2 Clearing Counters................................................................................................................................................................. 15-38
15.14 Report Output (REPORT)......................................................................................................................................15-38
15.14.1 Report Output....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-38
15.14.2 System Data List .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-38
15.14.3 System Dump List................................................................................................................................................................ 15-39
15.14.4 Counter List.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-40
15.14.5 Error Log List....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-40
15.14.6 Spec List............................................................................................................................................................................... 15-42
15.14.7 Service Label........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-45
15.14.8 e-RDS Communication Error Log List ................................................................................................................................ 15-45
15.14.9 Environmental Log Report................................................................................................................................................... 15-45
15.15 Download (DOWNLOAD)....................................................................................................................................15-46
15.15.1 Download ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-46
15.16 Data Initialization Mode (CLEAR)........................................................................................................................15-46
15.16.1 Clear ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-46
15.17 Error Display (ERROR DISPLAY).......................................................................................................................15-47
15.17.1 Error Display ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-47
15.18 ROM Management (ROM) ....................................................................................................................................15-47
15.18.1 ROM Display ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-47
15.19 Test Mode (TEST) .................................................................................................................................................15-47
15.19.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-47
15.19.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-47
15.19.1.2 Test Mode Menu List (Touch Panel Type)............................................................................................................................................. 15-47
15.19.2 DRAM Test .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-49
15.19.2.1 D-RAM Test<(1) D-RAM TEST> ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-49
15.19.3 Scan Test .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-50
15.19.3.1 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST) .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-50
15.19.4 Print Test .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-50
15.19.4.1 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST) ................................................................................................................................................................. 15-50
15.19.5 Modem Test ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-51
15.19.5.1 Modem Test ((4) MODEM TEST)......................................................................................................................................................... 15-51
15.19.6 Faculty Test .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-53
15.19.6.1 Function Test ((6) FUNCTION TEST) .................................................................................................................................................. 15-53
15.19.7 Cleaning Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-57
15.19.7.1 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)....................................................................................................................................... 15-57
Chapter 15
15.1 Outline
15.1.1 Outline of Service Mode

0018-0183
The items that follow may be checked/set using the machine's service mode, which is designed the way the service mode used in fax machines is designed in terms
of contents and operation.
The displayed menus are different by the model.
#SSSW
Use it to register/set basic fax functions (e.g., error control, echo remedy, communication error correction).
Use it to make settings related counter functions.
#MENU
Use it to register/set items related to functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL equalizer, transmission level).
#NUMERIC PARAMETER
These setting items are for inputting numeric parameters such as the various conditions for the RTN signal transmission.
#SPECIAL
These setting items are for telephone network control functions. (Do not change the settings.)
#NCU
These setting items are for telephone network control functions such as the selection signal transmission conditions and the detection conditions, for the
control signals sent from the exchange. (Do not change the settings.)
#FAX
Do not use.
#SCAN
These setting items are for image adjustment in scanning.
#PRINT
These setting items are for image adjustment in printer assembly and for special mode for the field-related measures.
#NETWORK
Use it to confirm the contents of the installed CA certificates.
#CODEC
Do not use.
#SYSTEM
These are used for the import/export of user information through USB.
#ACC
Register the accessories.
#COUNTER
Use it to check estimates for maintenance/parts replacement.
#LMS
Use it to set the inactivity of the transmitted license and the license inactivity without transmitting.
#E-RDS
This is a setting items related to e-RDS (Embedded RDS).
#REPORT
Use it to generate reports on various service data.
#DOWNLOAD
Use it to download firmware to the ROM of a PCB in question.
#CLEAR
Use it to reset various data to initial settings.
#ERROR DISPLAY
15-1
Chapter 15
The error and detailed code which have happened now are displayed.
#ROM
Displays ROM information, such as version numbers and checksums.
#TEST MODE
Makes various status checks, such as contact sensor, sensor and print status.
15.1.2 Using the Mode (Touch Panel Type)

0018-0184
<Operation at the time of Bit SW> <Operation at the time of Parameter>

1) Selecting Service Mode 1) Selecting Service Mode
Press the Additionalfunctions Press the Additionalfunctions
key, 2key, 8key, Additional functions key, 2key, 8key, Additional functions
key sequentially. key sequentially.
#SSSW #SSSW
2) Selecting a Menu Item

2) Press [OK] on the Select the Menu item using the
touch panel. [left arrow]/[right arrow] on the
touch panel.
#SSSW #NUMERIC Param.
001 000000000
3) Selecting a Menu Item 3) Press [OK].

Press [OK].
#NUMERIC Param.
001 0
#SSSW
033 000000000
4) Selecting a Prarameter
4) Selecting a Bit Switch Select the Prarameter using the
Select the bit using the [left arrow]/[right arrow].
[left arrow]/[right arrow] on
the touch panel. #NUMERIC Param.
002 0
#SSSW
033 000000000 5) Registering/Setting Data
5) Registering/Setting Data Enter data using the keypad,
Enter data using the keypad, and then press [OK].
and press the [OK]. #3 NUMER I C P a r am.
002 10
#SSSW
033 000000001 6) Press the [Stop]/[Additional
6) Press the [Stop]/[Additional functions]/[Reset] key to end
functions]/[Reset] key to end the service mode.
the service mode.
F-15-1
15.2 Default Settings
15.2.1 Service Mode Menus

0018-0185
#SSSW
No. Initial setting Function
SW01 00000000 error/copy control
SW02 not used
SW03 00000000 echo remedy setting
SW04 10000000 communication fault remedy setting
SW05 00000000 standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW06 - SW11 not used
SW12 00000010 page timer setting
SW13 00000000 meter/inch resolution setting
SW14 00000001 inch/meter resolution setting
15-2
Chapter 15
#SSSW
No. Initial setting Function
SW25 00000000 report indication resolution setting
SW28 00000000 V.8/V.34 protocol settings
SW29 not used
SW30 00000000(JPN)/ Assigning a New Dial Tone Detection Method
00000011(EURO)/
00000001(Other country/region)
SW31- SW32 not used
SW33 00000000 counter function settings
SW34 10000000 waste toner full display setting
#MENU
No. Initial setting Range of Function
setting
01: - 04: not used
05: 0 ON/OFF NL equalizer setting
06: 0 0: DIAL line monitor setting
1: SERVICEMAN [1]
2: SERVICEMAN [2]
3: OFF
07: 10 0-15 transmission level setting

08: 0 0: 3429 V.34 baud rate
1: 3200
2: 3000
3: 2800
4: 2743
5: 2400
09: 0 0: 33.6kbs V.34 transmission speed
1: 31.2kbs
2: 28.8kbs
3: 26.4kbs
4: 24.0kbs
5: 21.6kbs
6: 19.2kbs
7: 16.8kbs
8: 14.4kbs
9: 12.0kbs
10: 9.6kbs
11: 7.2kbs
12: 4.8kbs
13: 2.4kbs
10: 1 0: 50Hz pseudo CI signal frequency setting
1: 25Hz
2: 17Hz
11: - 20: not used
#NUMERIC Param.
No. Initial setting Range of setting Function
001: not used
002: 10 (10%) (1 - 99) RTN signal transmission condition (1) setting
003: 15 (15lines) (2 - 9) RTN signal transmission condition (2) setting
004: 12 (12times) (1 - 99) RTN signal transmission condition (3) setting
005: 4 (4sec) (1 - 60) NCC pause time (pre-ID code) setting
006: 4 (4sec) (1 - 60) NCC pause time (post-ID code) setting
007: - 009: not used
010: 5500 (55sec) (0 - 9999) line connection identification time length
011: 3500 (35sec) (0 - 9999) T.30 T1 timer (for reception)
012: not used
013: 1300 (13sec) (500 - 3000) T30 EOL timer
014: not used
015: 120 (1200ms) (0 - 999) hooking detection time setting
016: 4 (4sec) (0 - 9) fax/tel switch-over function: between line acquisition and pseudo RBTtransmission
017: 100 (1000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: ON time setting
018: 0 (0ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (short) setting
15-3
Chapter 15
#NUMERIC Param.
No. Initial setting Range of setting Function
019: 200 (2000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
020: 100 (1000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: ON time setting
021: 0 (0ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: OFF time (short) setting
022: 200 (2000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
023: 4 (0 - 7) fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission level
024: 20 (-20dBm) (0 - 20) fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission level
025: 60 (60sec) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
026: not used
027: 0 (0 - 20) V21 low-speed flag preamble detection time length
028: - 054: not used
055: 60 (min) (0 - 480) acquisition period of enviormental log data
056: 101 (0 - 999) count type select 1
062: - 080: not used
#SPECIAL Do not change.
#NCU Do not change.
#FAX Not used.
#SCAN
No. Initial setting Range setting Explanation
#SCAN SW SW1 00000000 Outputting an Image for ADF Squareness Adjsutment
SW2 - SW50 Not used
15-4
Chapter 15
#SCAN
#SCAN 001: - 023: Not used
NUMERIC 024: 385 300 to 450, one CIS scan position during ADF scanning.
unit=0.1mm
026: 22 6 to 48, one Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point.
unit=0.1mm
027: - 030: Not used
031: 35 0 to 70, one Vertical scan start position adjustment
unit=0.1mm
032: 115 50 to 150, one Horizontal scan start position adjustment
unit=0.1mm
033: 16 0 to 32, one Vertical scan magnification correction
unit=0.1%
034: Not used
035: - 036: 474 Reader motor speed adjustment

037: - 040: Not used
041: 35 0 to 70, one Vertical scan start position adjustment (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1mm
042: 220 170 to 270, one Horizontal scan start position adjustment (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1mm
043: 24 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (copy)

unit=0.1mm
044: 36 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine)
unit=0.1mm
045: 47 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (fine)

unit=0.1mm
046: 47 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (standard)

unit=0.1mm
047: 16 0 to 32, one Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)

unit=0.1%
048: 16 0 to 32, one Horizontal scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)

unit=0.1%
049: - 053: Not used

054: 16 0 to 32, one Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is used)
unit=0.1%
055: - 192: Not used

193: 0 0: LEGAL ADF special paper, standardized size: LGL misidentification-ready
1: FOOLSCAP
2: M_OFFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: FOLIO
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFFICIO
7: B_OFFICIO
194: 0 0: LTR ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR misidentification-ready

1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
195: 0 0: LTR_R ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR_R misidentification-ready
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
196: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (red)
197: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (green)
198: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (blue)
199: - 212: Not used
213: 8273 1 to 9999 XYZ correction value (X) of standard white plate
214: 8737 1 to 9999 XYZ correction value (Y) of standard white plate
215: 9427 1 to 9999 XYZ correction value (Z) of standard white plate
15-5
Chapter 15
#PRINT
#PRINT SW SW01 - SW04 Not used
SW05 10000000 Horizontal scanning priority record
SW06 - SW13 Not used
SW14 00000000 Special mode setting
SW15 00000000 Delivery setting
SW16 - SW17
SW18 Fixing temperature adjustment resolution setting
SW19 - SW50 Not used
#PRINT 01: - 30: Not used
NUMERIC 31: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
mm
32: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (cassette)
mm
33: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)
mm
34: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
mm
35: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)
mm
mm
mm
mm
39: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)
mm
40: - 44: Not used
45: 16 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4% Fixing film speed adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
46: 16 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4% Fixing film speed adjustment (cassette)
47: - 52: Not used
53: 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 5 Adjustment of margin at leading edge of copy
deg C
54: 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 5 Adjustment of margin at trailing edge of copy
deg C
55: 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 5 Adjustment of margin at right edge of copy
deg C
56: 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 5 Adjustment of margin at left edge of copy
deg C
57: Not used
58: 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual feed tray)
mm
59: 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Cassette)
mm
60: 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Optional cassette)
mm
61: 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Duplex unit)
mm
62: 7 0 to 14, one unit = 5 deg Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (For plain paper)
C
63: 7 0 to 14, one unit = 5 deg Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (For rough paper)
C
64: 0 0 to 5 Mode for preventing the temperature rise of the end
65: 0 0 to 3 Mode for reducing sand image
66: 0 0 to 3 Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode
67: - 70: Not used
15-6
Chapter 15
#PRINT
#PRINT CST U1 0 0: G_LTR Paper size group U1 special, standard-size paper entry
29: A-LTR
31: G-LTR
40: 8K
U2 0 0: FLSP Paper size group U2 special, standard-size paper entry
24: FLSP
26: OFI
27: E-OFI
28: B-OFI
36: A-OFI
37: M-OFII
39: 16K
U3 0 0: G-LGL Paper size group U3 special, standard-size paper entry
25: AFLS
32: GLTRR
30: ALTRR
35: FORIO
34: G-LGL
#SYSTEM
Setting Function
#NETWORK SW not used

#NET NUMERIC not used
#CERTIFICATE #CA-CERTIFICATE contents confirmation of the installed CA certificate
#CODEC Not used.
#SYSTEM
No. Initial setting Range of Function
setting
#SYSTEM SW SW01- SW02 not used
SW03 00001000 Import/export of the user information via USB
#SYSTEM 001: -100: not used
NUMERIC
#ACC
Item Initial setting Range of setting Function
CARD 0 0 - 99999 Card reader installation setting
CC-SPSW 0 0 or 1 Control card I/F support setting
COIN 0 0 or 1 Coin vendor change setting
CONTROL 0 0 or 1 Pinter output control setting at the time of support of control card I/F
#COUNTER
Item Function
TOTAL total counter
PICK_UP pickup-related counter
FEEDER feeder counter
JAM jam-related counter
MISC other counter
DRBL-1 durables counter
15-7
Chapter 15
#LMS
Item Function
INACTIVE Not used
ERACE Not used
#REPORT
Setting Function
#REPORT SW Not used
#REPORT OUTPUT SERVICE DATA LIST Output of service data list
SYSTEM DATA LIST Output of system data list
SYSTEM DUMP LIST Output of system dump list
COUNTER LIST Output of counter list
ERROR LOG LIST Output of error log list
SPEC LIST Output of spec list
SERVICE LABEL Output of service label
ERDS COM LOG LIST Output of communication error log information related to e-RDS
ENV. LOG LIST Output of environmental log information
#REPORT NUMERIC Not used
#DOWNLOAD Download mode
#CLEAR
Item Level2 Function
TEL & USER DATA Use it to clear all areas under user registration/setting.
SERVICE DATA Use it to clear the counters (numerator), date, and start
data form the system dump list.
COUNTER Use it to clear the maintenance/parts counter data and each mode counter data.
SOFT-CNT Not used.

TYPE Use it to clear the user data and the service data by specified settings.
HST ACTIVITY Use it to clear the contents of the communications control
report.
ACCOUNT Use it to clear each print history.
JAM Use it to clear the contents of the jam history.
ERR Use it to clear the contents of the error (E code) history.
ALARM Use it to clear the contents of the alarm history.
ENVIROMENT Initializes the enviroment log data.
CARD Use it to clear the control cars error data.
ERR E355 Not used.
E719 Use it to clear the management information at the time of card reader removal.
PWD Use it to clear the system administrator's password.

FILE SYSTEM*1 Delete unnecessary language files in the USB memory.
FORMAT*1 USB MEMORY Format the USB memory. (This mode is used when the USB memory error is damaged and
E744 occurs.)
LICENSE DRIVE Not used.
CA-KEY Initializes an installed CA certification.
ERDS-DAT The settings related to e-RDS are cleared to the factory settings.
ALL Clears user and service data (except for some scan parameters and print parameters), and the
counter setting/registration data in the system dump list, except for the print count.
#ERROR DISPLAY Display the service error code.
15-8
Chapter 15
#ROM
Item Function
MAIN Use it to indicate the version of the ROM (SYSTEM) on the image processor PCB.
MAIN2 Use it to indicate the version of the ROM (BOOT) on the image processor PCB.
OPROM Use it to indicate the version of option ROM.
ECONT Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
#TEST MODE [1] - [9]

Item Function
(1) DRAM [1] - [2] Data check in D-RAM
(2) SCAN TEST [1] - [8] CS automatic correction and document scan position adjustment
(3) PRINT TEST [1] - [9] Output of test prints
(4) MODEM TEST [1] - [9] modem/NCU related tests
(5) AGING TEST not used
(6) FACULTY TEST [1] - [9] Various functional tests
(0) ROLLER CLEAN Printer and ADF roller cleaning
15.3 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW)
15.3.1 Outline
15.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition

0018-0186
The items registered and set by each of these switches comprise 8-bit switches. The figure below shows which numbers are assigned to which bits. Each bit has a
value of either 0 or 1.
t2
t1
t7
t6
t5
t4
t3
t0
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
#SSSW
001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F-15-2
Do not change service data identified as "not used"; they are set as initial settings.
15.3.2 SSSW-SW01:
15.3.2.1 List of Functions

0018-0188

T-15-1
Bit Function 1 0
0 service error code output not output
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
15-9
Chapter 15
15.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0

0018-0189
Selects whether or not service error codes are output.

When output is selected, service error codes is report.
15.3.3 SSSW-SW03

0018-0190

T-15-2
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 tonal signal before CED signal transmission transmit do not transmit

0018-0191
Use it to enable/disable transmission of a 1080-Hz tonal signal before transmission of the CED signal.
Select 'transmit' if errors occur frequently because of an echo when reception is from overseas.
Memo:
Any of the following error code may be indicated because of an echo at time of reception
##0005, ##0101, ##0106, ##0107, ##0114, ##0200, ##0201, ##0790
15.3.4 SSSW-SW04

0018-0192

T-15-3
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 the number of final flag sequences of protocol signals 2 1
3 Reception mode after CFR signal transmission high speed high speed/low speed
4 the length of the period of ignoring low speed signals after 1500 ms 700 ms
CFR output
5 CI signal frequency check at the time of PBI setting Check Not
6 CNG signal for manual transmission Not transmitted Transmitted
7 CED signal for manual reception Not transmitted Transmitted

0018-0193
Use it to select the number of last flag sequences for a protocol signal (transmission speed at 300 bps). Select '2' if the other party fails to receive the protocol signal
properly.
Memo:
15-10
Chapter 15
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission

##0100, ##0280, ##0281, ##0750, ##0753, ##0754, ##0755, ##0758, ##0759, ##0760, ##0763 ##0764, ##0765, ##0768, ##0769,##0770, ##0773, ##0775, ##0778,
##0780, ##0783, ##0785, ##0788

0018-0194
Use it to select an appropriate reception mode after transmission of the CFR signal.
If errors occur frequently at time of reception because of the condition of the line, select 'high speed' for reception mode and, at the same time, selects 'do not receive'
for 'ECM reception.'
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of line condition
##0107, ##0114, ##0201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; if errors still occur, change this bit.
When 'high speed' is selected, only high-speed signals (images) will be received after transmission of the CFR signal.

0018-0195
Use it to select the time length during which low-speed signals are ignored after transmission of the CFR signal.
If the condition of the line is not good and, therefore, the reception of image signals is difficult, select '1500 ms.'

0018-0196

In the countries that need approval of CI signal frequency check, no checking on frequency set at PBX when changing the frequency to PSTN setting and PBX
setting for frequency checks.

0018-0197

Selects whether or not to transmit CNG signal during manual transmission.
In manual transmitting to a fax with the FAX/TEL switching mode, if there are frequent errors due to failure to switch to fax mode, select "Transmitted" for the
CNG signal.

0018-0198
Selects whether or not to transmit CED signals during manual reception. If the other fax does not transmit even when you start manual reception, select "Transmit-
ted" for the CED signal.
15.3.5 SSSW-SW05

0018-0200

T-15-4
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 Conversion from mm to inch (text mode) convert do not convert
2 Conversion from mm to inch (text/photo mode) convert do not convert
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -

0018-0201

Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text mode.
Scanning direction in conversion follows the Bit 2 setting of SW14.
15-11
Chapter 15

0018-0202
Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text/photo mode while bit 1 is set to '1'.
15.3.6 SSSW-SW12

0018-0203

T-15-5
Bit Function 1 0
0 Time-out period for one page upon transmission 1 0
1 Time-out period for one page upon transmission 1 0
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 Time-out period for one page upon reception 1 0
5 Time-out period for one page upon reception 1 0
6 not used - -
7 Respective page timer settings for transmission and for enable do not enable
reception
The machine will stop the ongoing communication if the transmission/reception of a single original page takes 32 min or more. To use the timer for a purpose other
than this function, refer to the tables that follow, and select an appropriate time length.
When 'do not enable' is selected using bit 7, the time-out length for a single page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit 0 and bit 1.
T-15-6
Time-Out Length for Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Transmission/Reception
8 min 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 0 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 0 * * * * * 1 1
T-15-7
Transmission (in text
mode)
8 min 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 1 * * * * * 1 1
T-15-8
Reception
8 min 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 min 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 min 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 min 1 * 1 1 * * * *
15-12
Chapter 15
15.3.7 SSSW-SW13

0018-0204

T-15-9
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 Convert "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the received convert do not convert
image data
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -

0018-0205
It converts "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the received image data.
15.3.8 SSSW-SW14

0018-0206

T-15-10
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 direction of scanning for inch/mm conversion both main and sub sub scanning
scanning directions direction only
3 not used - -
4 inch-configuration resolution declaration declare do not declare
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -

0018-0207
Use it to specify whether to convert or not convert an inch-configuration resolution into a millimeter-configuration resolution for image read in G3 transmission:
either in sub scanning direction only or in both main and sub scanning directions. The setting is valid only when bit 1 of SW05 of #SSSW is set to '1'.

0018-0208
Use it to specify whether to declare or not declare an inch-configuration resolution to the other machine for G3 communication: if 'declare' is selected, the machine
will indicate that it reads and records at an inch-configuration resolution using the DIS, DCS, or DTC signal.
15.3.9 SSSW-SW25

0018-0209
15-13
Chapter 15
T-15-11
Bit Function 1 0
0 procedure of V.8 on the initiation side receiver's number initial call number
1 not used - -
2 If void CSI has been received, handle as non-received Yes No

CSI.
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -

0018-0210
Transmitted telephone number could be selected on the report indication after the transmission.
If the "Initiation number" is selected, report will indicate the telephone number of the initiation side.
If the "Receiver's number" is selected, report will indicate the phone number (CSI signal data) which is sent by the receiver's side.

0018-0211
At "1" on this Bit, ignore the void CSI if received and if the dial has been made at this point, the dialed number will be indicated on the LCD/ Report screen.
At "0" on this Bit, even though the dialed number is acknowledged, LCD/Report screen will indicate nothing.
15.3.10 SSSW-SW28

0018-0212

T-15-12
Bit Function 1 0
0 Caller V.8 protocol NO YES
1 Called party V.8 protocol NO YES
2 Caller V.8 protocol late start NO YES
3 Called party V.8 protocol late start NO YES
4 V.34 reception fallback Prohibited Not prohibited
5 V.34 transmission fallback Prohibited Not prohibited
6 not used - -
7 not used - -

0018-0213
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when calling. If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol is inhibited at calling and the V.21 protocol is used.

0018-0214

Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when called. If NO is selected, the V8 protocol is inhibited when called and the V.21 protocol is used.

0018-0215
If ANSam signal is not received during transmission, select whether to use the V.8 protocol when the other fax machine declares the V.8 protocol in DIS signal. If
NO is selected, the CI signal is not transmitted and the V.8 protocol is not used even if the DIS that specifies the V.8 protocol is received.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual transmission regardless of this setting.
15-14
Chapter 15

0018-0216
Select whether to declare the V.8 protocol in DIS signal for reception. If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol cannot be used because it is not declared in DIS signal.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual reception regardless of this setting.

0018-0217
Select whether the receiver falls back during V.34 reception. If 'Prohibit' is selected, the receiver does not fall back.

0018-0218
Select whether the transmitter falls beck during V.34 transmission. If 'Prohibit' is selected, teh transmitter does not fall back.
15.3.11 SSSW-SW30

0018-0219

T-15-13
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 New dial tone detection method Detect with the new Detect with the
method. existing method.
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

0018-0220
When "Detect with the new method" is selected, tone is detected for 3.5 seconds before call origination in order to discriminate between dial tone and voice. If dial
tone is detected and the time since line seizure is 3.5 seconds or longer, call origination takes place immediately. If the time since line seizure is less than 3.5 seconds,
call origination takes place after waiting for 1 second. (If the time since line seizure reaches 3.5 seconds during the 1-second waiting period, call origination takes
place immediately. By default, "Detect with a new method" is assigned for this SW.
15.3.12 SSSW-SW33

0018-0221

T-15-14
Bit Function 1 0
0 count B4 (Print) as large size Yes No
1 indicate serial No. on counter check screen Yes No
2 count B4 (Scan) as large size Yes No
3 the counter display type change in Japan and USA Yes No
4 Yes No
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
15-15
Chapter 15
Bit Function 1 0
7 not used - -

0018-0222
Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Print) should be counted as large-size paper.

If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.

0018-0223
Use it to specific whether to indicate the machine serial No. on the Counter Check screen, appearing when the Counter key is pressed.
If 'yes' is selected, the serial No. will be indicated.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, the serial No. will not be indicated.

0018-0224
Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Scan) should be counted as large-size paper.

If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.
15.3.12.5 Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 - Bit4

0018-0225

Select whether to switch the counter display type in effect in Japan and USA to the conventional or new type. Select "Yes" to display counters in the new type.
Select "No" to display counters in the conventional type.
T-15-15
Bit4 Bit3
Conventional type 0 0
New type 1 0 1
New type 2 1 0
15.3.13 SSSW-SW34

0018-0226

T-15-16
Bit Function 1 0
0 Display the waste toner full YES NO

warning
1 Switch the waste toner full Drum replacement required E019 displayed on an service
warning message displayed on an call
operator call
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
The default setting of this SSSW varies depending on the destination of the product.
Product for Japan: 00000000
Product for countries in Euro zone: 00000011
Products for other countries/regions: 00000001
15-16
Chapter 15

0018-0227
You can select whether a waste toner full warning is to be displayed.

When "1" is selected, a waste toner full warning is displayed.
When "0" is selected, a waste toner full warning is not displayed.

0018-0228
Select whether to display the waste toner full warning as a drum replacement required message or as E019 displayed on an operator call. Select 1 to display a rum
replacement required message on an operator call. Select 0 to display E019 on an service call.
15.4 Menu Switch Settings (MENU)
15.4.1 Menu Switch Composition

0018-0229

T-15-17
No. Function Range of settings

005 NL equalizer 1: ON, 0: OFF
006 telephone line monitor 0:DIAL, 1:SERVICEMAN1, 2:SERVICEMAN2, 3:OFF
007 transmission level (ATT) from 0 to 15 (ex: 15= -15 dBm)
008 V.34 modulation speed upper 0:3429, 1:3200, 2:3000, 3:2800, 4:2743, 5:2400
limit
009 V34 data speed upper limit 0:33.6 kbps, 1:31.2 kbps, 2:28.8 kbps, 3:26.4 kbps, 4:24.0 kbps,
5:21.6 kbps, 6:19.2 kbps, 7:16.8 kbps, 8:14.4 kbps, 9:12.0 kbps,
10:9.6 kbps, 11:7.2 kbps, 12:4.8 kbps, 13:2.4 kbps
010 Frequency of pseudoring signal 0:50 Hz, 1:25 Hz, 2:17 Hz
15.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer>

0018-0230
Use it to enable-disable the NL equalizer.

If errors occur often during communication because of the condition of the line, enable (ON) the NL equalizer.
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission because of the line condition:
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
15.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor>

0018-0231

Use it to s the telephone line monitor function:
DIAL: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of transmission to DIS.
SERVICEMAN [1]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of communication to the end of it.
SERVICEMAN [2]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line2 (Option).
OFF: do not generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker.
15.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level>

0018-0232
Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).

Raise the transmission level if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of the condition of the line. (It means close to 8)
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765,
##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of the line condition:
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
15.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit>

0018-0233
Use it to set an upper limit to the modulation speed (baud rate) for the V.34 primary channel.
15.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit>

0018-0234

Use it to set an upper limit to the data transmission speed for the V.34 primary channel between 2.4K and 33.6K bps in increments of 2400 bps. (0: 2.4K to 13:
33.6K bps).
15-17
Chapter 15
15.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal>

0018-0235
You may select a frequency for the pseudo CI signal.

Some types of external telephones do not ring when the fax/tel switch-over function is ON. To sound the ring, change the pseudo CI signal.
15.5 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.)
15.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition

0018-0236

T-15-18
No. Item Range of settings

002 RTN transmission condition(1) 1% to 99%
003 RTN transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 item
004 RTN transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 lines
005 NCC pause time length (pre-ID code) 1 to 60 sec
006 NCC pause time length (post-ID code) 1 to 60 sec
010 line condition identification time length 0 to 9999 (10 msec)
011 T.30T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (10 msec)
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000 (10 msec)
015 hooking detection time length 0 to 999
016 time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover 0 to 9
017 pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999
018 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(short)
019 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(long)
020 pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999
021 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(short)
022 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long) 0 to 999
023 CNG detection level at time of fax/tel switchover 0 to 7
024 pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover 10 to 20
0 to 20 (120/230V)
025 Answering machine connection function signal detection 0 to 999
time
027 preamble detection time length for V21 low-speed flag 20 (x 10ms)
055 acquisition period of environmental log data 0 to 480 (60min)
056 display the type of soft counter 1 101 (Fixed)
057 Display the type of soft counter 2 0 to 999
15.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN transmission condition (3)>
0018-0237
Use it to set RTN signal transmission conditions. Raise these parameters for more lenient conditions if errors occur frequently at time of reception because of trans-
mission of the RTN signal.
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of RTN signal transmission
##0104, ##0107, ##0114, ##0201
RTN signal transmission condition (1) affects the ratio of error lines to the total number of lines per single page of received images.
RTN signal transmission condition (2) affects the standard value (*2) of burst errors (*1).
RTN signal condition (3) affects the number of errors not reaching the standard value of burst errors.
*1: transmission error occurring cover several lines.

*2: for instance, if '15' is set, a single burst error will represent an error occurring continuously cover 15 lines.
If any of these lines is detected while an image signal is being received, the RTN signal will be transmitted after receiving the protocol signal of the transmitting
party. Higher parameters restrict the transmission of the RTN signal.
15.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)>

0018-0238
15-18
Chapter 15
Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between access code and ID code when the NCC (New Common Carrier) line is used for dialing.
15.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)>

0018-0239
Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between ID code and telephone number of the other party when the NCC (New Common Carrier) line is
used for dialing.
15.5.5 <010: line connection identification length>

0018-0240
Use it to set the time for identifying the line connection. Raise this parameter if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of the condition of the line.
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated because of the condition of the line
##0005, ##0018
The line condition identification time is between when the dial signal is transmitted and when the line condition is cut for the transmitting party, while it is between
when the DIS signal is transmitted and when the line is cut for the receiving party.
15.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)>

0018-0241
Set the T1 timer for the receiver (wait time after DIS transmission starts until a significant signal is received).
15.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer>

0018-0242
Set it so that the 1-line transmission time is longer for reception to prevent reception errors caused by a long data length per line (e.g., computer FAX).
15.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover>

0018-0244
Allows setting of the time from seizing the line till pseudo RBT is sent, when the Fax/ Tel switching function is operating.
15.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short)><019:
pseudo
0018-0245
Use it to set the pattern of the pseudo RBT signal transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
15.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (short)><022:
pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)>
0018-0246
Use it to set the pseudo CI signal pattern transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
15.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover>

0018-0247

Use it to set the CNG detention level for a fax/tel switchover.
15.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover>

0018-0248
Use it to set the pseudo transmission level for a fax/tel switchover.
15.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time>

0018-0249
Sets the signal detection time for the answering machine connection function operation. When the answering machine connection function is operating, if the func-
tion does not operate normally because the fax does not detect CNG signal sent from the line, raise this parameter to increase the signal detection time.
15.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length>

0018-0250
Use it to detect the time of detection after which command analysis is started after detecting V.21 low-speed command preambles continuously for a specific period
of time.
15.5.15 <055: Acquisition period of environmental log data>

0018-0251
Use it to change the acquisition period of environmental log data.
15.5.16 <056 - 061: Count type select >

0018-0252
15-19
Chapter 15
Use it to confirm the count type indicated on the Counter Check screen, which appears in response to a press on the Counter key.
When '0' is selected, count type will not be indicated.
No.56: Use it to indicate the type of software counter 1 of the control panel. The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed.
No.57: Use it to change the type of soft counter 2* of the control panel to suit the needs of the user.
*:The default type settings of soft counter is different from models.
<Soft Counter Specifications>
The soft counters are classified a follows in terms of input numbers:
100s: total
200s: copy
300s: print
400s: copy + print
500s: scan
700s: received file print
800s: report pint
900s: transmitted scan
Guide to the Table

- 1:Count sheets of all sizes by one.
- 2:Count sheets of the large size by two.
- C:full color
- Bk:black mono
- L:large size (larger than A4/LTR)
- S:small size (A4/LTR or smaller)
MEMO:
To make a change so that B4 papers (for print) will be counted as large-size, use service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 0 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
To make a change so that B4 papers (for scan) will be counted as large-size, use service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 2 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
Seri Counter type Print system

al Bk 1-sided L Bk 1-sided S Bk 2-sided L Bk 2-sided S
No.
on
Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo
coun
copy print print rt copy print print rt copy print print rt copy print print rt
ter
print print print print
chec
k
scree
n
101 Total1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
102 Total2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
103 Total (L) 1 1 1 1
104 Total (S) 1 1 1 1
108 Total (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
109 Total (Bk2) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
112 Total (Bk/L) 1 1 1 1
113 Total (Bk/S) 1 1 1 1
114 Total1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
115 Total2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
116 L (2-sided) 1 1 1 1
117 S (2-sided) 1 1 1 1
126 TotalA1 1 1 1 1 1 1
127 TotalA2 2 2 2 1 1 1
128 TotalA (L) 1 1 1
129 TotalA (S) 1 1 1
132 TotalA (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
133 TotalA (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
136 TotalA (Bk/L) 1 1 1
137 TotalA (Bk/S) 1 1 1
138 TotalA1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1
139 TotalA2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 1 1 1
140 L A (2-sided) 1 1 1
141 S A (2-sided) 1 1 1
150 TotalB1 1 1 1 1 1 1
151 TotalB2 2 2 2 1 1 1
152 TotalB (L) 1 1 1
153 TotalB (S) 1 1 1
156 TotalB (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
157 TotalB (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
160 TotalB (Bk/L) 1 1 1
161 TotalB (Bk/S) 1 1 1
15-20
Chapter 15

No.
on
coun
ter
chec
k
scree
n
162 TotalB1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1
163 TotalB2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 1 1 1
164 LB (2-sided) 1 1 1
165 SB (2-sided) 1 1 1
201 Copy(Total1) 1 1
202 Copy(Total2) 2 1
203 Copy(L) 1
204 Copy(S) 1
205 CopyA (Total1) 1 1
206 CopyA (Total2) 2 1
207 CopyA (L) 1
208 CopyA (S) 1
209 Local copy(Total1) 1 1
210 Local copy(Total2) 2 1
211 Local copy(L) 1
212 Local copy(S) 1
221 Copy(Bk1) 1 1
222 Copy(Bk2) 2 1
227 Copy(Bk/L) 1
228 Copy(Bk/S) 1
237 Copy(Bk/L/2-sided) 1
238 Copy(Bk/S/2-sided) 1
249 CopyA (Bk1) 1 1
250 CopyA (Bk2) 2 1
255 CopyA (Bk/L) 1
256 CopyA (Bk/S) 1
265 CopyA (Bk/L/2-sided) 1
266 CopyA (Bk/S/2-sided) 1
277 Local copy(Bk1) 1 1
278 Local copy(Bk2) 2 1
283 Local copy(Bk/L) 1
284 Local copy(Bk/S) 1
293 Local copy(Bk/L/2-sided) 1
294 Local copy(Bk/S/2-sided) 1
301 Print (Total1) 1 1 1 1
302 Print (Total2) 2 2 1 1
303 Print (L) 1 1
304 Print (S) 1 1
305 PrintA (Total1) 1 1 1 1
306 PrintA (Total2) 2 2 1 1
307 PrintA (L) 1 1
308 PrintA (S) 1 1
313 Print (Bk1) 1 1 1 1
314 Print (Bk2) 2 2 1 1
319 Print (Bk/L) 1 1
320 Print (Bk/S) 1 1
329 Print (Bk/L 1 1
330 Print (Bk/S/2-sided) 1 1
331 PDL print (Total1) 1 1
332 PDL print (Total2) 2 1
333 PDL print (L) 1
334 PDL print (S) 1
339 PDL print (Bk1) 1 1
340 PDL print (Bk2) 2 1
345 PDL print (Bk/L) 1
346 PDL print (Bk/S) 1
355 PDL print (Bk/L/2-sided) 1
15-21
Chapter 15

No.
on
coun
ter
chec
k
scree
n
356 PDL print (Bk/S) 1
403 Copy+Print (Bk/L) 1 1 1
404 Copy+Print (Bk/S) 1 1 1
405 Copy+Print (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
406 Copy+Print (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
411 Copy+Print (L) 1 1 1
412 Copy+Print (S) 1 1 1
413 Copy+Print (2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
414 Copy+Print (1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
421 Copy+Print (Bk/L) 1 1 1
422 Copy+Print (Bk/S) 1 1 1
701 Recieved print (Total1)
702 Recieved print (Total2)
703 Recieved print (L)
704 Recieved print (S)
709 Recieved print (Bk1)
710 Recieved print (Bk2)
715 Recieved print (Bk/L)
716 Recieved print (Bk/S)
725 Recieved print (Bk/L/2- 1
sided)
726 Recieved print (Bk/S/2- 1
sided)
801 Report print (Total1)
802 Report print (Total2)
803 Report print (L)
804 Report print (S)
809 Report print (Bk1)
810 Report print (Bk2)
815 Report print (Bk/L)
816 Report print (Bk/S)
825 Report print (Bk/L) 1
826 Report print (Bk/S) 1
Serial Counter type Scan system

No. on
Bk 1-sided L Bk 1- C 1-sided L C 1-
counte
sided sided
r check
S S
screen
Total Pull E- FileS E- FileS E- Total Total Pull E- FileS E- E- Total

scan scan mail hare mail hare mail scan scan scan mail hare mail FileS mail scan
scan DBsc FileS DB FileS scan DB FileS hare FileS
an hare BoxF hare scan hare DB hare
DB scan DB DB scan DB
scan Box scan BOX
scan
501 Scan (Total1) 1 1
505 Bk scan (Total1) 1 1
506 Bk scan (Total2) 2 1
507 Bk scan (L) 1
508 Bk scan (S) 1
509 C scanTotal (1) 1 1
510 C scanTotal (2) 2 1
511 C scan (L) 1
512 C scan (S) 1
915 Transmission scan total2 1
(C)
(Bk)
15-22
Chapter 15
Serial Counter type Scan system

No. on
Bk 1-sided L Bk 1- C 1-sided L C 1-
counte
sided sided
r check
S S
screen
Total Pull E- FileS E- FileS E- Total Total Pull E- FileS E- E- Total

scan scan mail hare mail hare mail scan scan scan mail hare mail FileS mail scan
scan DBsc FileS DB FileS scan DB FileS hare FileS
an hare BoxF hare scan hare DB hare
DB scan DB DB scan DB
scan Box scan BOX
scan
(C)
918 Transmission scanTotal3 1
(Bk)
(C)
(Bk)
(C)
(Bk)
939 Remote scan (C) 1
940 Remote scan (Bk) 1
945 Transmission scan/E-mail
(C)
946 Transmission scan/E-mail 1
(Bk)
15.6 Scanner Function Settings (SCANNER)
15.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch

0018-0253

<SCAN SW SSSW01>
T-15-19
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Outputting an Image for ADF Perpendicularity output not output

Adjsutment
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
Specify whether to output an image for ADF perpendicularity adjustment.
15.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration

0018-0254
No. Function Default Setting range Unit
001: - 023: Not used

024: CIS scan position during ADF scanning. 385 300-450 one unit=0.1mm
025: Not used
026: Distance from the standby position of CIS to the 22 6-48 one unit=0.1mm
shading start point.
027: - 030: Not used
15-23
Chapter 15
031: Vertical scan start position adjustment 35 0-70 one unit=0.1mm
032: Horizontal scan start position adjustment 115 50-150 one unit=0.1mm
033: Vertical scan magnification correction 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
034: Not used
035: - 036: Reader motor speed adjustment 474
037: - 040: Not used

041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (scanning 35 0-70 one unit=0.1mm
on ADF)
042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment 220 170-270 one unit=0.1mm
(scanning on ADF)
043: Horizontal scan end position correction 24 0-200 one unit=0.1mm

(copy:scanning on ADF)

(superfine:scanning on ADF)

(fine:scanning on ADF)

(standard:scanning on ADF)
047: Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%

on ADF)
048: Horizontal scan magnification correction 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%

(scanning on ADF)
049: - 053: Not used

054: Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
used)
055: - 192: Not used

193: ADF special paper, standardized size: LGL 0 0 : LEGAL
misidentification-ready 1 : FOOLSCAP
2 : M_OFFICIO
3 : A_FOOLSCAP
4 : FOLIO
5 : G_LEGAL
6 : A_OFFICIO
7 : B_OFFICIO
194: ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR 0 0 : LTR

misidentification-ready 1 : G_LTR
2 : A_LTR
195: ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR_R 0 0 : LTR_R

misidentification-ready 1 : FOOLSCAP
2 : OFFICIO
3 : E_OFFICIO
4 : G_LTR_R
5 : A_LTR_R
196: shading target value (red) 272 0-511
15-24
Chapter 15
197: shading target value (green) 272 0-511
198: shading target value (blue) 272 0-511
199: - 212: Not used
213: XYZ correction value (X) of standard white plate 8273 1-9999
214: XYZ correction value (Y) of standard white plate 8737 1-9999
215: XYZ correction value (Z) of standard white plate 9427 1-9999
216: - 350: Not used
If any operation error occurs after changing the setting value, change the setting value to the original one.
15.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning>

0018-0255
This value is used when automatic scan position adjustment (TESTMODE>"2"SCAN TEST>"3"SHEET POS ADJ) fails.
15.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point>
0018-0256
White shading can be adjusted finely.
Normally, do not change the setting value. If any operation error occurs after changing the setting value, change the setting value to the original one.
15.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment>

0018-0257

Adjust the position at which vertical scanning of a book starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the left-side margin of the image becomes.
15.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment>

0018-0258
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a book starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the top margin in the image becomes.
15.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction>

0018-0259
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a book. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the vertical scanning direction.
15.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change>

0018-0260

Though no market adjustment work needs to be carried out, enter factory defaults at image processor PCB replacement.
15.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0018-0261
Adjust the position at which vertical scanning of a document fed from the ADF starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the left-side margin of the
image becomes.
15.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0018-0263
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a document fed from the ADF starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the top margin of the image
becomes.
15.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction ((copy:scanning on ADF)>

0018-0264
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a document being copied ends (when scanning on a document fed from ADF). The larger the adjustment value,
the narrower the bottom margin of the image becomes.
15.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine:scanning on ADF)>

0018-0265
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document scanned in superfine mode ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the bottom
margin of the image becomes.
15-25
Chapter 15
15.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine:scanning on ADF)>

0018-0266
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document scanned in fine mode ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the bottom margin
of the image becomes.
15.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard:scanning on ADF)>

0018-0267
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document set to the standard scan resolution ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the
bottom margin of the image becomes.
15.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0018-0268
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the vertical scan-
ning direction.
15.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0018-0269
Correct the magnification of horizontal scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the horizontal
scanning direction.
This menu is used to adjust the ADF feed motor speed. If you changed the adjustment value in this mode, the adjustment value selected for SCAN NUMERIC>54
must also be incremented/decremented by the same amount.
Do not change the adjustment value extremely.
15.6.17 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready>

0018-0271
Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LEGAL").
0: LEGAL
1: FOOLSCAP
2: M_OFFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: FOLIO
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFFICIO
7: B_OFFICIO
15.6.18 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready>

0018-0272
Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LTR").
0: LTR
1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
15.6.19 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready>

0018-0274
Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LTRR").
0: LTR_R
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
15.6.20 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)>

0018-0275
This is market-related measures taken to improve shadow images generated by a thick original such as a book or a folded or wrinkled original. When taking the
measures, assign the same values for R, G, and B. After changing the values, be sure to turn off the power and turn it on again.
15.6.21 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)>

0018-0276
15.6.22 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)>

0018-0277
15-26
Chapter 15
15.6.23 <213: XYZ correction value (X) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions))
0018-0278
If you replaced the image processor PCB, enter values indicated on the service label. If you have replaced the document glass, enter values indicated on the new
document glass and write the values on the service label.
820686679349
correcton correcton
va l u e ( Y )
F-15-3
15.6.24 <214: XYZ correction value (Y) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions)
0018-0279
820686679349
correcton correcton
va l u e ( Y )
F-15-4
15.6.25 <215: XYZ correction value (Z) of standard white plate> (if equipped with SEND functions)
0018-0281
820686679349
correcton correcton
va l u e ( Y )
F-15-5
15.7 Printer Function Settings (PRINTER)
15.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (SSSW)

15.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05
15.7.1.1.1 List of Functions
0018-0282
T-15-20
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
15-27
Chapter 15
Bit Function 1 0
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 priority on recording in sub scanning direction place do not place
15.7.1.1.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 7

0018-0283
Use it to enable/disable placement of priority on recording in sub scanning direction.

T-15-21
place: if B4 recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and an A4 extra-long image
(*) is received, printing will be on the B4 recording paper.
do not place: if B5 horizontal recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and a B4 image is
received, printing will be by division and on B5 horizontal recording paper.
*: Image B4 or shorter and that cannot be printed by division and on A4 recording paper.
15.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14
0018-0285
T-15-22
Bit Function 1 0
0 Transfer bias pressure reduction mode Enable Disable
1 Developing assembly idling mode Enable Disable
2 Black belt addition mode Enable Disable
3 Post-rotation reduction mode Enable Disable
4 Flicker reduction mode Enable Disable
5 Silent mode Enable Disable
6 Terminal temperature rise noise reduction mode Enable Disable
7 Not used - -

0018-0286
Select whether to enable or disable transfer bias pressure reduction mode.

Select "Enable" to avoid image defects (black spots) produced by transfer bias leaks occurring in a low-pressure region, such as one at a high altitude. This setting
regulates the transfer bias to keep it from exceeding a predetermined level during printing.
0018-0287
Select whether to enable or disable developing assembly idling mode. Select "Enable" to drive the main motor for a specified period of time to apply idling and
developing bias (AC + DC) to prevent the thinning of the image density when the unit is installed or the developing unit is replaced in a low-temperature, low-
humidity region. This mode works only on a new developing assembly and before a toner cartridge is loaded.
0018-0288
Select whether to enable or disable black belt addition mode. If the user uses paper that causes fixed toner on paper to be fused and adhered to drum, selecting
"Yes" will clean the drum by forming a black band on the drum surface during the reverse rotation which is performed after printing on 50 sheets.
15-28
Chapter 15
Implementation of this mode could result in a drum life falling short of its life expectancy.

0018-0289
Select whether to enable or disable post-rotation reduction mode. Selecting "Enable" will reduce the noise caused by the polygon motor by stopping the motor
immediately after post-rotation.
0018-0290
Select whether to enable or disable flicker reduction mode. Select "Enable" and enter a count to modify fusing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking
during printing.
Implementation of this mode would degrade the throughput.

0018-0291
Select whether to enable or disable silent mode. Select "Enable" to modify the registration loop amount and thus reduce noises or squeaks the registration rollers
produce after picking paper from the individual paper inlets.
0018-0292
Select whether to enable or disable noise reduction mode during terminal temperature rises. Select "Enable" to start slowdown at a temperature lower than normal
when printing on smaller-sized paper than B4. Slowdown control thus enabled prevents the thermal degradation of the fusing film grease, assuring smooth sliding
among the fixing film, heater and film guide to cut squeaks.
15.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15
0018-0293
T-15-23
Bit Function 1 0
0 Inhibit automatic delivery tray replacement while running Enable Disable

jobs
1 Halt stapling job when out of staples Enable Disable
2 Inhibit tray full indication while the stapled document Enable Disable
count is exceeded
3 IFAX Permission of split recording of text data Enable Disable
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

0018-0294
Select whether to inhibit automatic delivery tray replacement while running jobs with an inner two-way tray mounted in position. Select "Enable" to inhibit auto-
matic tray replacement.
0018-0295
Select whether to halt stapling job when a finisher installed has run out of staples. Select "Enable" to halt staple jobs when the finisher has run out of staples.
15-29
Chapter 15

0018-0296
Select whether to display a tray full message when the maximum allowable stapled document count is exceeded with a finisher installed. Select "Enable" not to
display the message.
0018-0297
Select whether split recording is to be enabled when text data such as a header and body text is recorded. Selecting "Set" may split text data when a small paper size
such as A5 is selected. In this case, a page may be split in the middle of a character string.
15.7.1.4 SSSW-SW18
0018-0298
T-15-24
Bit Function 1 0
0 Limit temperature of temperature adjustment Enable Disable
1 Shift of the temperature adjustment when at auto duplex Enable Disable
2 Thin post card mode Enable Disable
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

0018-0299
If there is no progress after shifting the target figure of the temperature adjustment using "Temperature Adjustment UP/DOWN Mode", # PRINTER> Numeric>
Parameter 62, 63, cancel the inner limit of the fixed temperature adjustment.
To cancel the inner limit of the fixed temperature adjustment, select "Setting".
0018-0300
If there is no progress after shifting the target figure of the temperature adjustment using "Temperature Adjustment UP/DOWN Mode", # PRINTER> Numeric>
Parameter 62, 63, cancel the 2nd face of the duplex inner limit of the fixed temperature adjustment.
Select "Setting" to cancel the 2nd face of the duplex inner limit of the fixed temperature adjustment.
0018-0301
When selecting the post cards, besides the 'Reply post card', 'Post card', and the 'Four face post card', 'Thin post card' could be selected. Select 'Setting' and 'Thin
post card' would be selected.
15.7.2 Numeric Parameter Settings (NUMERIC Param.)

0018-0303
No. Function Default Setting range

01: - 30: Not used
31: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray) 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 mm
32: Top registration adjustment (cassette) 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 mm
33: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit) 50 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
15-30
Chapter 15
No. Function Default Setting range

34: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
35: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
39: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
40: Target fixing temperature adjustment (multi) 6 -30 to 0, one unit = 5 deg C
41: Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1) 6 -30 to 0, one unit = 5 deg C
45: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray) 16 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4%
46: Fixing film speed change (cassette) 16 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4%
47: - 52: Not used
53: Adjustment of margin at leading edge of copy 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 0.1 mm
54: Adjustment of margin at trailing edge of copy 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 0.1 mm
55: Adjustment of margin at right edge of copy 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 0.1 mm
56: Adjustment of margin at left edge of copy 0 0 to 9999, one unit = 0.1 mm
57: Not used
58: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 mm
tray)
59: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Cassette) 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 mm
60: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Optional 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 mm
cassette)
61: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Duplex 100 85 to 115, one unit = 0.5 mm
unit)
62: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode (For 7 0 to 14, one unit = 5 deg C
normal paper)
63: Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For thick 7 0 to 14, one unit = 5 deg C
paper)
64: Mode for preventing the end temperature rise 0 0 to 5
65: Mode for reducing sand image 0 0 to 3
66: Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode 0 0 to 3
67: - 70: Not used
15.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0018-0304

Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from a manual feed tray. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
15.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)>

0018-0305
Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from cassettes. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
15.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)>

0018-0306
Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from a duplex unit. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
15.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0018-0307

Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from a manual feed tray. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image be-
comes.
15.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)>

0018-0308

Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from cassette 1. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image becomes.

0018-0309

0018-0310
15-31
Chapter 15

0018-0311
15.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)>

0018-0312
Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from a duplex unit. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image becomes.
15.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0018-0313
Lower the fixing temperature from the target temperature setting to reduce the chances of fixing offsets and curled or stuck delivered sheets occurring with paper
picked from a manual feed tray.
15.7.2.12 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)>

0018-0314
Change the fixing film speed to reduce the chances of streaks appearing in the trailing edge of images caused by shocks from the fixing roller out of position while
picking paper from a manual feed tray.
15.7.2.13 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)>

0018-0315
Change the fixing film speed to reduce the chances of streaks appearing in the trailing edge of images caused by shocks from the fixing roller out of position while
picking paper from a cassette.
15.7.2.14 <053: Margin adjustment at the leading edge of the copy>

0018-0316

Adjust the margin at the leading edge of the copy. Increasing the value makes the margin at the leading edge larger.
15.7.2.15 <054: Margin adjustment at the trailing edge of the copy>

0018-0317
Adjust the margin at the trailing edge of the copy. Increasing the value makes the margin at the trailing edge larger.
15.7.2.16 <055: Margin adjustment at the right edge of the copy>

0018-0318
Adjust the margin at the right edge of the copy. Increasing the value makes the margin at the right edge larger.
15.7.2.17 <056: Margin adjustment at the left edge of the copy>

0018-0319

Adjust the margin at the left edge of the copy. Increasing the value makes the margin at the left edge larger.
15.7.2.18 <058:: Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Manual feed tray)>
0018-0320
If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the manual feed tray, registration loop noise and abrasion could be reduced by adjusting
the volume of the registration loop. By making the value larger, loop volume will become bigger.
15.7.2.19 <059:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Cassette)>

0018-0321
If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the cassette, registration loop noise and abrasion could be reduced by adjusting the
volume of the registration loop. By making the value larger, loop volume will become bigger.
15.7.2.20 <060:Adjustment of the registration loop volume (Option cassette)>

0018-0322
If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the option cassette, registration loop noise and abrasion could be reduced by adjusting
15.7.2.21 <061:Adjustment of the registration loop volume. (Duplex unit)>

0018-0323

If there is a registration loop noise and abrasion while feeding the paper from the duplex unit, registration loop noise and abrasion could be reduced by adjusting
15.7.2.22 <062:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For plain paper)>

0018-0324

For plain paper relation, the volume of the temperature adjustment offset could be changed by 5 deg C at a time to aim the fixed temperature.
For plain paper relation : Normal, Normal Lo, rough paper Lo, thin post card, and OHP mode.
0 to 6: -35 to -5 deg C (1unit=5deg C)
15-32
Chapter 15
7: 0 deg C
8 to 14: +5 to +35 deg C (1unit=5deg C)
15.7.2.23 <063:Temperature adjustment UP/DOWN mode. (For rough paper)>

0018-0325
For rough paper relation, the volume of the temperature adjustment offset could be changed by 5 deg C at a time to aim the fixed temperature.
For rough paper relation: rough paper, super rough paper, super rough paper H, post card, post card H, and envelope mode.
0 to 6: -35 to -5 deg C (1unit=5deg C)
7: 0 deg C
8 to 14: +5 to +35 deg C (1unit=5deg C)
15.7.2.24 <064:Mode for preventing the temperature rise of the end >
0018-0326
Set when the fixed film squeaks. Lower the target fixing temperatue and extend sheet-to-sheet time except A4/A3/11X17/LTR size.
0: Normal
1 to 5: Mode for responding film squeak. (reference to the table below)
T-15-25
Setting Print temperature control Sheet-to-sheet temperature control Sheet-to-sheet time

1 Target temperature-10 deg C Print temperature control -20 deg C 0 sec extension
15.7.2.25 <065:Mode for reducing sand image>

0018-0327
Set when sand image *1 has occurred on the print image.

Restraining the scatter of the toner by increasing the electric current of the AC electrification; the sand image could be reduced.
Sand image *1: Multiple black dots and white dots appear on half tone. Or multiple black dots appear on white background.
0: Normal.
1 to 3: Reducing mode. (Same operation to set 1 to 3)
There is a possibility that when using the "Reducing mode", the life of the drum will not meet the specified pieces.
15.7.2.26 <066:Temperature/ Humidity sensor fixed mode>

0018-0328

Changing to high-pressure environment by using the temperature/ humidity sensor. But when there is an image trouble at the point of changing the environment,
fix the temperature and the humidity and do not allow the change of the high-pressure output.
0: Normal
1: Fixed environment of LL. (Temperature of 10 deg C and humidity of 10%)
2. Fixed environment of NN. (Temperature of 20 deg C and humidity of 50%)
3. Fixed environment of HH. (Temperature of 30 deg C and humidity of 80%)
15.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST)
15.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility

0018-0329
With a special paper compatibility kit (cassette size adjuster) installed, set the cassette paper size lever to paper size groups U1 to U3 to set the paper sizes listed
below.
Paper size group Setting (*default) Paper name Marking
U1 0* Government LETTER G-LTR

29 Argentine LETTER A-LTR
31 Government LETTER G-LTR
40 8K 8K
U2 0* FOOLSCAP FLSP
24 FOOLSCAP FLSP
26 OFFICIO OFI
27 Ecuadorian OFFICIO E-OFI
28 Bolivian OFFICIO B-OFI
36 Argentine Offico A-OFI
37 Mexican OFFICIO M-OFI
39 16K 16K
15-33
Chapter 15
Paper size group Setting (*default) Paper name Marking
U3 0* Government LEGAL G-LGL

25 Australian FOOLSCAP AFLS
30 Argentine LETTERR ALTRR
32 Government LETTERR FLTRR
34 Government LEGAL G-LGL
35 FORIO FORIO
15.8 Network Parameter Settings (NETWORK)
15.8.1 Confirmation of contents of CA certificate

0018-0356
Selecting the service mode "#NETWORK>#CERTIFICATE>#CA-CERTIFICATE" enables confirmation of the contents of the installed CA certificate.
15.9 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM)
15.9.1 Bit Switch Settings

0018-0357
SSSW-SW03 functional configuration

T-15-26
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Imports and exports user information via USB. Enable Disable
7 Not used - -
Bit 6 details
Select whether to enable the host machine to work as a USB storage device or not. If the host machine is plugged into a PC with this setting enabled, it allows user
registration data (user data and telephone registration data) to be imported and exported to and from the PC, except for the data embedded in the department man-
agement information and user management IDs in the system management information.
15.10 Registration of Accessories (ACC)
15.10.1 Accessory Registration

0018-0358
The table below gives summary description of the accessories available.
15-34
Chapter 15
Item Explanation
#ACC CARD Card reader installation setting

Enter a card number to use.
(0 to 9999. One hundred cards are registered with the department ID beginning from the input card number in sequence.)
*1:1,000 cards if option ROM is mounted.
When a card number is entered, the following kinds of management information are initialized:
- Card name (department ID), beginning from the input card number.
- Password associated with the card
CC-SPSW Control card I/F support setting

Set whether to support the control card I/F (CC-V) or not.
0: Do not support.
1: Support.
COIN Coin vendor change

Set the control card set display appearing on the operator station for vendor use.
0: Control card use
1: Coin vendor use
CONTROL Set the PDL printer output control where the control card I/F (CC-V) is supported.
0: Enable printing without a card mounted.
1: Enable printing with a card mounted in position.
15.11 License Management (LMS)
15.11.1 Outline
0018-0359

LMS (License Management Service)
License Management System is to acquire a figure row from sending the information of the license certificate number, which is in the same package as option
product, machine serial number and the name of the main machine to the server that has a license issue function on the Internet.
Option function will be able to be used by inputting the acquired figures from the main machine operation board through license registration screen in the users
mode.
License option function is implemented on all the main system of the products, which is shipped from the factory, but it would not activate unless input operation
has been made through the license registration screen.
Acquisition of the license key and registration of the device is basically done by the user. Detailed procedure is described in the users guide. However, as for ref-
erence, summary of the procedure is mentioned below.
(1) Access to LMS from the below URL and follow the direction on the screen to acquire the license key.
URL for LMS
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
MEMO:
To acquire the license key, 16 digit figures on the license access number certificate and the device serial number (for example: ABC01234), which the license is
going to be installed is necessary.
Device serial number will indicate on "Serial Number" when pressing the counter confirmation key on the main machine.
(2) Copy the license key of 24 digit figures, which is indicated on the WEB browser to the designated column on license access number certificate.
Reconfirm that there is no miss-copy of the 24 digit figures. Explain to the user that license access number certificate should be kept with care.
(3) Input the copy of the license key from; user mode > system management setting> license registration and press enter. The license key will be registered and
function will activate.
If the function do not activate, error message will indicate. Confirm the points below due to contents of the error message.
"Value of the license key is incorrect. Confirm license key"

>> Using the license key, which was issued to another device?
>> Incorrect license key was input?
>> Proper license key used?
"This function is already active"
>> Isn't the relevant kit already active?
(4) Switch off the main power supply and after 10 seconds switch on the power supply again.
(5) Registered license will be active when after the power supply of the main device switch has been cut off once and put on again. Once the license starts properly,
press counter confirmation key then press device configuration and confirm that in the option column that the relevant kit has been indicated.
15.11.2 Method of confirming license option

0018-0360
Confirmation could be made whether the license option is active or not in the SOFT-ID PRM item by outputting the SPEC REPORT from the service mode.
Output method:
Select '# REPORT' from service mode.
Select '# REPORT OUTPUT'.
Select '# REPORT OUTPUT SPEC LIST' and press 'OK'.
15-35
Chapter 15
Check the SOFT-ID RPM column from the SPEC REPORT output. License is active on the items which indicates 'ON/ON'.
Related items:
BIT 00: BDL-IMAGE(1200) -> CARPS2
BIT 05: BW-SEND -> SEND
BIT 06: CL-SEND -> SEND
BIT 09: BDL-IMAGE( 600) -> CARPS2
15.11.3 Inactivity of the transmitted license

0018-0361
Inactivity of the transmitted license
Situation of using this service mode

This service mode is to be used exceptionally on the assumption that when malfunction occurs on the device (caused by device) and the license to be transferred to
the substitute device and to inactivate the license.
This operation is called ' Inactivity of the transmitted license'. Transmission could be selected to the same device and could be used to cease the function temporary.
But if the license is made inactive by mistake, it is necessary to call the dealer to reactivate.
Take utmost precaution when inactivating the license

To inactive the license, operation through the service mode has to be made and to prove the function is inactive; issue of the function inactive certificate key is
necessary.
This operation is valid to any of the each optional function and at the point of issuing the function inactive certificate key the function will be inactive and could
not be used.
New license key to install to the transmitted device will be issued when the information of function inactive certificate key, serial number of the transmission origin
device, serial number of new destination of transmitting device and the reason for transmitting is given to the dealer. Take a note of the new license key and after
the registration to the new transmitted device, inform the user that the new license key should be kept with care.
Operation procedures
(1) Go into the service mode and indicate the below mentioned service mode. (Key operation to go into the service mode is to be pressed one at a time. Orders are
*, 2, 8, *).
After going into the service mode, use the arrow on the both sides of the touch panel and press 'OK' if the decision is made.
(2) Indicate '#LMS'.
(3) Press 'OK' and indicate '#LMS INACTIVE'.
(4) Indicate 'BDL-IMAGE (CARPS 2 for Japanese market) or 'SEND'.
(5) Press 'OK'.
(6) Press '2' from the numeric keypad and press 'OK'.
#SEND
001 1 Press '2' from the numeric

keypad and press 'OK'.
OK
F-15-6
1.Take a note of the license transmit number which will be indicated with 24 digits.
2.The indicated number is just for this operation and it would not be saved.
3.If the power is switched off, the indicated number will disappear and if the note of the number has not been taken, transmission of the license will be impossible.
4.Even pressing the reset key to clear the indication, there will be no recovery of the number.
Example of the transmitted license indication:
F-15-7
(7) Switch the power supply OFF/ON of the main machine.
Reference:
At procedure (4) when indicating the license option, it indicates ' 001 1'. The last digit '1' shows that the license is active.
After transmitting the license the last digit will change to '2', which means that the license has been transmitted.
If the option is standard equipped, the last digit will indicate '3', which means that the license could not be transmitted.
(8) Contact the dealer and inform the function inactive certificate key, serial number of the transmission origin device, and serial number of new transmiting device,
which is necessary to transmit the license.
Upon given information above, new license key will be issued, which the license could be registered to the new transmitting device.
(9) Register the new license key to the transmitted device and confirm that the function is active.
15-36
Chapter 15
15.12 eRDS Parameter Settings (E-RDS)
15.12.1 Settings Related to e-RDS

0018-0363
Settings related to e-RDS are described below.

T-15-27
Item Description
E-RDS SWITCH e-RDS OFF/ON setting (0:OFF / 1:ON)When used (ON), the counter information and error information are sent
to UGW.Default: 0 (OFF)
RGW-ADDRESS URL of UGWDefault: URL of actual UGWCharacter string length: 129 bytes (including NULL, one-byte codes
only)
RGW-PORT Port No. of UGW Default: 443Setting range: 1 to 65535
COM-TEST Execution of communication test An attempt is made to connect to UGW, judges whether connection is
successful, and displays "COM-TEST OK" or "COMTEST NG" as the judgment result.
COM-LOG Details of communication test resultThe log of errors in communication with UGW is displayed. The error
information includes the error occurrence time, error code, and details of the error.Maximum log count: 5Error
information length: Max. 128 characters (excluding NULL)
15.13 Counter Indication (COUNTER)
15.13.1 Counters
0018-0364
This copier is furnished with a maintenance/supplies counter set (DRBL-1), which can be used to gain rough measures of when to replace supplies. The counter
set increments by one on counting each sheet of small-sized paper (up to A4/LTR) and by two on counting each sheet of large-sized paper (larger than A4/LTR).
T-15-28
Maintenance counter list
Item Counter Explanation
TOTAL (Total counter) SERVICE1 Service total counter 1

SERVICE2 Service total counter 2
TTL Total counter
COPY Total copy counter
PDL-PRT PDL print counter
FAX-PRT Fax print counter
REP-PRT Report print counter
2-SIDE Double-sided copy/print counter
SCAN Scan counter
PICK-UP (Paper pickup counter) C1 Cassette 1 jam counter
C2 Cassette 2 jam counter
MF Manual feed tray pickup total counter
2-SIDE Double-sided paper pickup total counter
FEEDER (Feeder related counters) FEED Feeder pickup total counter
DFOP-CNT ADF open/close hinge counter
JAM (Jam counters) TTL Unit total jam count
FEEDER Feeder total jam count
SORTER Finisher total jam count
2-SIDE Duplex unit jam counter
MF Manual feed tray jam counter
MISC (Other required counter) WST-TNR Waste toner counter
15-37
Chapter 15
T-15-29
Parts counter list

Item Counter Explanation Service life
DRBL-1 (Unit supplies) FX-UNIT Fixing unit paper pass count 150,000
TR-ROLL Transfer charger roller high-voltage ON count 150,000
DV-UNT-C Developing unit rotation count 150,000
M-PU-RL Manual feed tray pickup roller paper pass count 150,000
M-SP-PD Manual feed tray separation pad paper pass count 150,000
15.13.2 Clearing Counters

0018-0365
- Maintenance/parts counter all clear

Execute service mode > CLEAR > COUNTER to clear all maintenance/parts counters.
- Counter clear on parts replacement

Press the numeric keypad key 0 after displaying the counter for a part just replaced, and the counter will be cleared individually.
15.14 Report Output (REPORT)
15.14.1 Report Output

0018-0366
The table below lists the kinds of reports that are supported.
Item Explanation
SERVICE DATA LIST Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN, PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM,
start date)
SYSTEM DATA LIST Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN, PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM,
start date)
System dump list output
SYSTEM DUMP LIST Transmission count, reception count, record chart count, error count and other outputs
COUNTER REPORT Counter output
ERROR LOG LIST Jam and error history output
SPEC LIST Type setting, print speed, memory size, ROM indication, adjustment data and other outputs
SERVICE LABEL Output of an entry format for the service label affixed to the rear cover as shipped
ERDS COM LOG LIST Output of communication error log information related to e-RDS
ENV. LOG LIST Output of environmental log information
15.14.2 System Data List

0018-0367
Use it to check the settings associated with the service soft switch and service parameters.
15-38
Chapter 15

F-15-8
15.14.3 System Dump List

0018-0368
- System Dump List

Use it to check the history of communications, both successful and error.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
F-15-9
*1: TX, number of total pages transmission.
*2: Total number of pages transmitted/received according to original size.
*3: RX, number of total pages reception.
15-39
Chapter 15
*4: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each modem speed
*5: Total number of pages transmitted/received in connection with different modem speeds (Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*6: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each coding method
*7: Total number of pages transmitted and received in each mode
*8: Total number of pages printed/scanned
*9: Total number of occurrences for error code
T-15-30
Indication
sample
##280 1 7 3 0 0
##280 ##281 ##282

number of errors number of errors number of errors
It provides error information on the 3 most recent communications.

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
. / &01 2 / &01 2

/ &01 2 / &01 2
. / &01 2 / &01 2
/ &01 2 / &01 2
. " !
. " ! 3 3" 3 3" 3 3"
.
. 3 3" 3 3 ! "

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
. / &01 2 / &01 2

/ &01 2 / &01 2
. / &01 2 / &01 2
/ &01 2 / &01 2
. " !
. " ! 3 3" 3 3" 3 3"
.
. 3 3" 3 3 ! "
!

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
F-15-10
*1: service error code.
*2: START TIME, date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY, telephone number sent by the other party.
*4: MAKER CODE, manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE, model code.
*6: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been received.
*7: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been transmitted.
*8: RX, procedural signal received; TX, procedural signal transmitted.
15.14.4 Counter List

0018-0369
Explanation: Maintenance/supplies counter output.

(For more detailed information about the maintenance/supplies counter output, execute service mode > Display counter information > Counters.)
15.14.5 Error Log List

0018-0370
15-40
Chapter 15
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX 001
***************************************
*** JAM/ERR LOG REPORT ***
***************************************
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
JAM
01 04/12 12:17 20:03 4 1 0012 000026 1 A4
20 04/12 12:17 20:03 4 1 0012 000026 1 A4
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
ERR
01 04/12 12:17 15:36 3 0010 0000 000691
20 04/12 12:17 15:36 3 0010 0000 000691
F-15-11
Jam history description (JAM)

Item Explanation
[1] Number The larger the number of a jam, the more recently it has occurred.
[2] Jam date Date of jam occurrence
[3] Jam time
[4] Jam recovery time
[5] Location 3: Host machine, 4: ADF, 5: Finisher
[6] Occurrence category 0: Host machine, 1: ADF, 2: Finisher
15-41
Chapter 15
Jam history description (JAM)

Item Explanation
[7] Jam code Code Jam cause
Host machine 0104 Pickup assembly delay jam
0208 Pickup assembly stationary jam
010c Delivery assembly jam
010e Second delivery assembly delivery delay jam
0210 Delivery stationary jam
0212 Second delivery assembly stationary jam
0214 Host machine retention paper jam
1118 Door open jam
0120 Duplexing paper sensor 1 delay jam
0221 Duplexing paper sensor 1 stationary jam
0124 Duplexing paper sensor 2 delay jam
0228 Duplexing paper sensor 2 stationary jam
ADF 0000 Unknown jam
0007 Initial stationary
0008 Read sensor delay jam
0009 Read sensor stationary jam
000a Paper absence (Pull out the document.)
000c Delivery reversal sensor delay jam
000d Delivery reversal sensor stationary jam
000e ADF cover open error
000f User ADF open error
0010 Pickup NG
Finisher 0130 Inlet sensor delivery delay jam
0231 Inlet sensor delivery stationary jam
0033 Bundle delivery jam
0035 Stapler jam
1036 Power-on jam
1137 Door open jam
[8] Total counter display
[9] Pickup stage position 0: Manual feed tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4
[10] Paper size
Error history description (ERR)

Item Explanation
[1] Number The larger the number of an error, the more recently it has occurred.
[2] Error date Date of error occurrence
[3] Error time
[4] Location 3: Main unit, 5: Finisher
[5] Error code Error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the "Error Code" Chapter.)
[6] Detail code Detail code of the error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the "Error Code"
Chapter.)
[7] Total counter display
15.14.6 Spec List

0018-0371
15-42
Chapter 15
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX 001
[1] *****************************
[2] *** SPEC REPORT ***
*****************************
[3]
TYPE _____ JAPAN
LBP SPEED _____ 25cpm
TOTAL MEMORY _____ 256MB
MAIN _____ WLaa-08-01
_____
[4] OPTION
_____
WLaa-08-01
BOOT WLaa-08-01
LANG _____ WLaa-08-01
LANG LIBRARY (QVGA) _____ 000C0000
LANG FILE (QVGA)
ENGLISH _____ 000C0000
JAPANESE _____ 000C0000
BULGARIAN _____ 000C0000
CATALAN _____ 000C0000
CZECH _____ 000C0000
DANISH _____ 000C0000
SPANISH _____ 000C0000
ESTONIAN _____ 000C0000
FINNISH _____ 000C0000
FRENCH _____ 000C0000
GERMAN _____ 000C0000
GREEK _____ 000C0000
CROATIAN _____ 000C0000
HUNGARIAN _____ 000C0000
ITALIAN _____ 000C0000
DUTCH _____ 000C0000
NORWEGIAN _____ 000C0000
POLISH _____ 000C0000
PORTUGUESE _____ 000C0000
ROMANIAN _____ 000C0000
RUSSIAN _____ 000C0000
SLOVAK _____ 000C0000
SLOVENE _____ 000C0000
SWEDISH _____ 000C0000
TURKISH _____ 000C0000
ECONT _____ 0309
OPT-CAS 1 _____ 0000
OPT-CAS 2 _____ 0000
OPT-CAS 3 _____ 0000
OPT-DUP _____ 0000
OPT-FIN _____ 0000
ACTIBAT FUNCTION
BDL-IMAGE (1200) _____ OFF
[5] FAX _____ ON
NETWORK _____ ON
PCL _____ ON
PC-SCAN _____ ON
BW-SEND _____ OFF
CL-SEND _____ OFF
PAF _____ OFF
BDL-IMAGE (600) _____ OFF
E-RDS _____ OFF
BAR-DIMM _____ OFF
SOFT-ID PRM
TYPE _____ 0 : NONE
[6] OPTION/ENABLE SW
BIT 00: BDL-IMAGE (1200) _____ ON / OFF
BIT 01: FAX _____ ON / OFF
BIT 02: NETWORK _____ ON / OFF
BIT 03: PCL _____ ON / OFF
BIT 04: PC-SCAN _____ OFF / OFF
F-15-12
15-43
Chapter 15
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX 002
BIT 05: BW-SEND _____ OFF / OFF

BIT 06: CL-SEND _____ OFF / OFF
[6] BIT 07: PAF _____ OFF / OFF
BIT 08: BDSS _____ ON / OFF
BIT 09: BDL-IMAGE (600) _____ ON / OFF
BIT 10: COUNTER _____ ON / OFF
BIT 11: E-RDS _____ ON / OFF
BIT 12: BAR-DIMM _____ ON / OFF
BODY No. _____ MTExxxxx
ENGINE CODE _____ 20000016
SIZE TYPE _____ 0 : NONE
PRODUCT NAME _____ XXX
[7] TOTAL
TTL _____ 000688
COPY _____ 000685
FAX-PRT _____ 000000
PDL-PRT _____ 000000
RPT-PRT _____ 000000
READ ADJ PRM
026: _____ 0022
031: _____ 0000
032: _____ 0115
033: _____ 0032
034: _____ 0032
[8] 041: _____ 0000
042: _____ 0219
043: _____ 0075
044: _____ 0075
045: _____ 0075
046: _____ 0075
047: _____ 0032
048: _____ 0032
054: _____ 0032
213: _____ 0000
214: _____ 0000
215: _____ 0000
WRITE ADJ PRM
031: _____ 0050
032: _____ 0050
033: _____ 0050
034: _____ 0100
035: _____ 0100
036: _____ 0100
037: _____ 0100
[9] 038: _____ 0100
[10] 039: _____
_____
0100
OPTYION ROM 16MB
[11] USB MEMORY _____ OFF
DELIVERY FULL SENSOR 1 _____ ON
[12] DELIVERY FULL SENSOR 2 _____ OFF
USB SERIAL No. _____ 00XXXXXXXX
[13] MAC ADDRESS _____ 00 00 85 51 60 1C
BACKUP BATTERY _____ OFF
[14] LUGIA _____ 2
NUMBER OF LOGS
[15] ACTIVITY _____ 0
PRINTJOB ACCOUNT
COPY _____ 0
PDL PRINT _____ 0
RX PRINT _____ 0
_____
[16] REPORT
_____
0
JAM 3
SERVICE CALL _____ 0
ENVIROMENT _____ 0
F-15-13
[1] Type setting
[2] Print speed
[3] Memory size
[4] ROM version (MAIN/BOOT/LANG*1(language liblary/language file version)ECONT/option cassette/duplex unit/finisher)
[5] Activation function ON/OFF
[6] Soft ID information
[7] Total counter (TOTAL/COPY/FAX/PDL/REPORT record counts)
[8] Adjustment data (factory scan/record adjustment values)
[9] Option ROM availability
[10] USB memory availability
[11] No. 1/No. 2 paper full sensor sensor availability
[12] USB serial number
[13] MAC address
[14] Backup battery availability
[15] ROM version (Reader controller PCB)
[16] output the number of histories (communication history, copy/print/report/JOB history of the reception print, jam history, E code history, humidity log)
*1: only for the touch panel model
15-44
Chapter 15
15.14.7 Service Label

0018-0372
Enter the value given in the service label affixed to the rear cover when it has been replaced with a new one.
#PRINT>#PRINT NUMERIC #SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC

FACTORY 1 2 3 FACTORY 1 2 3
031 50 026
032 50 031
033 50 032
034 100 033
035 100 034
036 100 041
037 100 042
038 100 043
039 100 044
045
046
047
#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC 048
054
213
214
body No:BFDxxxxx 215
F-15-14
15.14.8 e-RDS Communication Error Log List

0018-0373

Description: Detailed information output when a communication error occurs
(For the output error message, see "RDS > Error Messages".)
15.14.9 Environmental Log Report

0018-0374
06/27/2007 13:07 FAX 0001
[1] ***********************************************
*** ENVIROMENTT LOG REPORT ***
***********************************************
SERIAL NO XXXxxxx
ENVIROMENT
No. DATE TIME D+Temp E+Hum F+Temp F+Temp
001 0616 0930 D030 E026 F180 F180
002 0616 1030 D028 E025 F181 F181
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
F-15-15
History description
Item Explanation
[1] Serial number Serial number of this machine
[2] Number The larger the number of a enviroment log data, the more recently it has occurred.
[3] Date Data acquisition day
[4] Time Data acquisition time
[5] Temperature (deg)
[6] Humidity (%)
[7] Fixing roller temperature 1
(deg)
[8] Fixing roller temperature 2
(deg)
15-45
Chapter 15
15.15 Download (DOWNLOAD)
15.15.1 Download
0018-0375
The following parts of this unit can be upgraded by executing download mode using the service support tool (SST) (for more information, see the "Upgrading"
section):
Main unit
- Flash ROM (system + boot) mounted on the image processor PCB
Accessory
- ROM mounted on the finisher controller PCB
- ROM mounted on the PCL board
15.16 Data Initialization Mode (CLEAR)
15.16.1 Clear
0018-0376
Group Item Explanation

TEL & USER DATA Clears all user-registered and -set areas of telephone registration data and user data.
(Telephone registration refers to the registration of codes on one-touch dialing,
abbreviated dialing, and group dialing.)
SERVICE DATA Clears the system dump list, except for counters and clear dates.
COUNTER Clears the maintenance counter, parts counter and mode-specific counters.
Initializes the counter (numerator) in the system dump list.
TYPE Initializes user data and service data to suit specified destination settings.
SOFT-CNT Not used
HST ACTIVITY Initializes the activity report
ACCOUNT Clears print histories.
JAM Clears the jam history.
ERR Clear the error (error code) history.
ALARM Clears the alarm history.
ENVIROMENT Initializes the enviroment log data.
CARD Clears department management information held in the controller before the card
reader is demounted.
ERR E355 Not used
E719 Clears card reader errors.
PWD Clears the system administrator's password.
FILE SYSTEM*1 Delete unnecessary language files in the USB memory.
FORMAT*1 USB MEMORY Format the USB memory. (This mode is used when the USB memory error is damaged
and E744 occurs.)
LICENSE Not used
DRIVE
CA-KEY Initializes an installed CA certification.
ERDS-DAT The settings related to e-RDS are cleared to the factory settings.
ALL Clears user and service data (except for some scan parameters and print parameters),
and the counter setting/registration data in the system dump list, except for the print
count.
*1 Only for the touch panel model.
15-46
Chapter 15
15.17 Error Display (ERROR DISPLAY)
15.17.1 Error Display

0018-0377
An error code is displayed when a service error has occurred. The E code is displayed in the upper step, and the detail code is displayed the bottom step.
15.18 ROM Management (ROM)
15.18.1 ROM Display

0018-0378
The table below lists the items of ROM display mode that are supported.
T-15-31
Item Explanation
MAIN Displays the version number of the ROM (SYSTEM) mounted on the image
processor PCB.
MAIN2 Displays the version of the ROM (BOOT) mounted on the image processor
PCB.
ECONT Displays the version number of the ROM mounted on the DC controller PCB.
OPROM Displays the version number of the option ROM.
15.19 Test Mode (TEST)
15.19.1 Overview
15.19.1.1 Outline
0018-0379

Test mode must be executed by keeping track the flow of menu items appearing on the LCD. Menu items in test mode are organized into seven blocks as described
below. Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.
1. D-RAM test ((1) D-RAM)
Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from D-RAM.
2. Scan test ((2) SCAN TEST)
Used to adjust contact sensor output and the position at which a document fed from the ADF is scanned.
3. Print test ((3) PRINT TEST)

Used to generate service test patterns.
4. Modem test ((4) MODEM TEST)
Performs relay actuation, modem DTMF and tonal signal transmission/reception tests.
5. Aging test ((5) AGING TEST)
Not used.
6. Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

Used to verify the operations of microswitches, sensors, speakers and ADF functions.
7. Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)

Used to clean the delivery roller or ADF pickup roller by idling them.
15.19.1.2 Test Mode Menu List (Touch Panel Type)

0018-0380

Test mode menu list
To invoke test mode, follow these steps:
1) Enter service mode.
Sequentially press the Additional functions key, 2 key, 8 key, and Additional functions key on the operation panel.
2) Press the arrow key on the touch panel to display "TEST MODE".
3) Press [OK].
T-15-32
Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.

Group Subgroup Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Explanation
TEST MODE [1] - [9], [#]
(1) DRAM [1] - [2] D-RAM data check
(1) D-RAM TEST Write/read check
(2) D-RAM TEST Read check

(2) SCAN TEST [1] - [8]
15-47
Chapter 15

(1) SHADING Automatic gain adjustment
(3) SHEET POS ADJ CS position adjustment
(4) TRASH DETECT Dust detection
(5), (6), (9), (*) Not used
(3) PRINT TEST [1] - [9]

(1) Not used
(2) All-black output
(3) Not used
(4) Back belt output
(5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (*) Not used
(4) MODEM TEST [1] - [9]
(1) RELAY TEST [1] - [2]
(1) RELAY TEST 1 NCU relay (and switch) ON/OFF test
(2) RELAY TEST 2 230 V common NCU test

(2) FREQ TEST [0] - [6] Frequency test
(0) FREQ TEST 462Hz
(1) FREQ TEST 1100Hz
(4) FREQ TSST 1650Hz
(4) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST [0] - [8] G3 signal transmission test
(0) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 300bps
(5) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST TC7200bps
(5) DTMF TEST [0] - [9], * , # DTMF transmission test
(*) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 12000bps
(#) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 14400bps
(6) MODEM TEST Tonal sign reception test
(8) G3 V.34 Tx TEST V34 G3 signal transmission test
(9) Not used
(5) AGING TEST Not used
(6) FUNCTION TEST [1] - [9]
15-48
Chapter 15

(1) FUNCTION TEST G3 4800bps G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
(3) 6-3 SENSOR [1] - [6] Sensor checks
(1) SENSOR CHECK 0:NORMAL 1:LATCH
(0) SENSOR NORMAL [0] - [2]
(0) CAS 0 REG 0 DEL 0 MULTI 0
(1) TONER 0 FULL 0 2ND-DEL 0000
(2) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000 PATH
0000
(1) SENSOR
LATCH [0] -
[2]
(0) CAS 0 REG 0 DEL 0 MULTI 0
(1) TONER 0 FULL 0 2ND-DEL 0000
(2) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000 PATH
0000
(2) SWITCH CHECK [0] - [1]
(0) CAS 0000 LOCK 0000
(1) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000
(3) DS ON DES of HPS ON BCVS of
(4) REF xxx ANT xxx |ANT-REF| xxx
(5) BSCT on BDAC[ A3] BDSS3-0 [ of of of of ]
(6) NCR Sts: NCR xxxxx DPT MGN OK RDY 0101
(7) LAST of EXIT of REG of CVR of
(8) WID1 on WID2 on LEN1 on LEN2 on
(9) D+Temp xxxx E+Hum xxxx F+Temp xxxx xxxx
(4) ADF FEED TEST ADF delivery operation test
(5) BOOK FEED TEST Book copy operation test
(6) 6-6 SPEAKER FREQ:[1] VOL:[2] Speaker volume and buzzer frequency test
(7) Not used
(8) FUNCTION TEST LAMP TEST ALL Lamp test
(9) LINE TEST [1] - [3] Line signal reception test
(0) ROLLER CLEAN 0:PRT 1:ADF Printer and ADF roller cleaning
(0) PRT ROL CLEAN Press start key
(1) ADF ROL CLEAN Press start key
15.19.2 DRAM Test
15.19.2.1 D-RAM Test<(1) D-RAM TEST>

0018-0381
D-RAM Test((1) D-RAM)

Press the numeric keypad key 1 on the test mode menu to select the D-DRAM test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 2 during the D-DRAM test to carry out the individual tests described below.
Numeric keypad key 1

Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an
error appearing on the touch panel (LCD).

Checks to see if data can be correctly read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an error appearing
on the touch panel (LCD).
15-49
Chapter 15
D-RAM TEST 30208KB

[1] - [2]
D-RAM TEST 30208KB D-RAM TEST 30208KB

complete (no error)
WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC

ADR= BF840201
D-RAM TEST 30208KB
D-RAM TEST 30208KB

complete (error)
F-15-16
15.19.3 Scan Test
15.19.3.1 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST)

0018-0382
Scan test ((2) SCAN TEST)

Press the numeric keypad key 2 on the test mode menu to select the CCD test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1, 3 and 4 during the CCD test to carry out the individual tests described below.

Corrects the LED output of the contact sensor and sets its parameters automatically. (AGC adjustment)
Adjusts the document scan position (only on models with the ADF feature installed). Adjusts the position of the contact sensor for scanning documents fed from
the ADF automatically.

Detects trash at reader scan positions A/B/C.
Pos A: Reference read position
Pos B: About 0.5 mm inside of the roller from the reference position
Pos C: About 1.0 mm inside of the roller from the reference position
15.19.4 Print Test
15.19.4.1 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST)

0018-0383

Print test ((3) PRINT TEST)
Press the numeric keypad key 3 on the test mode menu to select the print test.
Press numeric keypad keys 2 and 4 during the print test to generate test patterns as described below. Two kinds of service test patterns are available. Other test
patterns are reserved for factory/development purposes.

(2) BLACK: All-black output
(4) ENDURANCE: Black belt output
To cancel test printing, press the stop key.
15-50
Chapter 15
Use it to make sure that the print Use it to make sure that the print
pattern does not have white lines pattern does not have contraction/
or uneven image. elongation of an image or dirt/black
line.s
F-15-17
15.19.5 Modem Test
15.19.5.1 Modem Test ((4) MODEM TEST)

0018-0384

MODEM test((4) MODEM TEST)
These tests test modem and NCU transmission and reception. The modem tests check whether signals are sent correctly from the modem by comparing the sound
of the signals from the speaker with the sounds from a normal modem.
End this test by pressing the Stop key.
Keypad Type Description
1 Relay test Use it to turn on/off a selected relay to execute a switch-over test
2 Frequency test The modem sends tonal signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
4 G3 signal transmission test The modem sends G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
5 DTMF signal reception test Use it to generate the DTMF signal coming from the modem using the
telephone line terminal and the speaker.
6 Tonal signal reception test Use it to monitor a specific frequency and the DTMF signal received from
the telephone line terminal by causing them to be indicated on the LCD (i.e.,
the presence/absence as detected). The reception signal is generated by the
speaker.
8 V.34 G3 signal transmission test The modem sends V.34 G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
Relay Test
Press '1'or '2' on the keypad on the Modem test menu to select relay test mode. Use the keypad to operate the various relays of the NCU. '2' on the keypad is used
for 230V machine.
The input key and relay are shown below:
[1] [2]
RELAY TEST1 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3] [4] [5] [6]
F-15-18
15-51
Chapter 15

The input key and relay are shown below:
[1] [2]
RELAY TEST2 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
F-15-19
The touch panel (LCD) is turned on or off in relation to the transmission of the relay operation signal as is operated on the keypad; for this reason, you cannot use
the touch panel (LCD) to check a fault on a single relay.
Frequency Test
A press on '2' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the frequency test.
In this test, signals of the following frequencies from the modem are transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different frequency,
use the keypad.
Keypad Frequency
1 462Hz
2 1100Hz
3 1300Hz
4 1500Hz
5 1650Hz
6 1850Hz
7 2100Hz
MEMO:
The frequency and the output level of individual frequencies are in keeping with the output level set in service mode.
G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on '4' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the G3 signal transmission test. In this test, the following G3 signals from the modem are trans-
mitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different transmission speed, use the keypad.
Keypad Transmission speed
0 300bps
1 2400bps
2 4800bps
3 7200bps
4 9600bps
5 TC7200bps
6 TC9600bps
7 12000bps
8 14400bps
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
DTMF Signal Transmission Test

A press on '5' on the MODEM test menu selects the DTMF signal transmission test. In the test, the following DTMF signals from the modem are transmitted using
the telephone line terminal and the speaker. The number pressed on the keypad selects a specific DTMF signal.
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
Tonal/DTMF Signal Reception Test

A press on '6' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the tonal signal/DTMF signal reception 0 test. In this signal, the tonal signal/DTMF signal received
from the telephone line terminal can be checked to find out if it was detected by the modem.
15-52
Chapter 15
Tonal signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

changes from '0' to '1' in response to detection of a signal of 462 25 Hz.
DTMF signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF 5
The received DTMF signals are indicated starting
from the right using the 2nd character of the display.
F-15-20
V.34 G3 Signal Transmission Test
A press on '8' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selectes the V.34 G3 signal transmission test. The V.34 G3 signals below are sent from the modem using
the modular jack and the speaker by pressing the start key. The Baud rate can be changed with the keypad, and the Speed can be changed with the left/right arrow
key.
Keypad Baud rate
0 3429baud
1 3200baud
2 3000baud
3 2800baud
4 2743baud
5 2400baud
Left/right arrow key Transmission speed
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
< 12000bps
14400bps
16800bps
19200bps
21600bps
> 24000bps
26400bps
28800bps
31200bps
33600bps
15.19.6 Faculty Test
15.19.6.1 Function Test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

0018-0385
Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

Press the numeric keypad key 6 on the test mode menu to select the function test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 3 to 9 during the function test to enter the menus listed below.
15-53
Chapter 15
T-15-33
Keypad Item Explanation
1 G3 signal transmission test Transmits 4800-bps G3 signals to a telephone line and

speaker.
2 Not used
3 Sensor test Sensor actuation test
4 ADF test ADF operation test
5 Book test Host machine operation test
6 Speaker test Speaker operation test
7 Not used
8 Lamp test Contact sensor illumination test
9 Line signal reception test NCU board signal sensor and frequency counter operation test
G3 signal transmission test (6-1: G3 480 bps Tx)

Press numeric keypad key 1 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the G3 signal transmission test. This test transmits 4800-bps G3 signals from the telephone
line connection terminal and speaker.
Sensor test (6-3: SENSOR)

This mode is used to verify the status of the unit sensors from the touch panel (LCD) indications. Press numeric keypad key 3 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to
select the sensor test. The touch panel (LCD) indications change as the associated sensors turn on and off.
15-54
Chapter 15
6-3:SENOR
[1] - [6]
Press numeric keypad key 1. Press numeric keypad key 0. Press numeric keypad key 0.
SENSOR CHECK SENSOR NORMAL CAS 0 REG 0

0:NORMAL 1:LATCH [0] - [2] DEL 0 0 MULTI 0
Select a sensor mode. CAS:Cassette 1 paper sensor (SR204): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
0: NORMAL REG:Registration sensor (SR209): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Indications change from 0 Press numeric keypad key 1. DEL 0 0:
to 1 as the sensors turn on. Fixing delivery sensor (SR202): 1/ Document presence, 0/ Document absence
Indications change from 1 SENSOR LATCH No.1 delivery sensor (SR203): 1/ Document presence, 0/ Document absence
to 0 as the sensors turn off. [0] - [2] MULTI:Manual paper sensor (SR208): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
1: LATCH
Indications change from 0
to 1 as the sensors turn on.
Indications do not change back Press numeric keypad key 1.
from 1 to 0 once the sensors turn
on from the off state. TONER 0 FULL 0
2ND-DEL 0 0
TONER:Waste toner full sensor (SR206): 0/Full, 1/Available

FULL:No. 1 paper full sensor (SR207): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
2ND-DEL 0 0:
No. 2 paper full sensor (SR1102): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
No. 2 delivery sensor (SR1101): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP1 0 0 OP2 0 0
OP3 0 0 PATH 0 0
OP1 0 0:
Cassette 2 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absenc
Cassette 2 paper sensor (SR5): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP2 0 0:
Cassette 3 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP3 0 0:
Cassette 4 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
PATH 0 0:
Duplex paper sensor 1 (SR1002): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Duplex paper sensor 2 (SR1002): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Press numeric keypad key 2 Press numeric keypad key 0.
SWITCH CHECK CAS 0000

[0] - [1] LOCK 0
CAS 0000:Cassette 1 size detection switch

Cassette size switch (PSIZE3): 1/Pressed, 0/Not pressed
LOCK: Cover switch (SW2 and SW3): 1/Cover open, 0/Cover closed
Press numeric keypad key 1.
OP1 0000 OP2 0000

OP3 0000
OP1: Cassette 2 size detection switch

OPX 0000: (X = 1, 2, 3 option cassette level)
Press numeric keypad key 3

DS ON DES of HPS ON
BCVS of
DS: ADF document sensor (P111): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence

DES Read sensor (P17): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence
HPS: CISHP sensor (P401): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence
BCVS: Document platen cover open/close sensor (front) (SR403): On/Cover open, Of/Cover closed
F-15-21
15-55
Chapter 15
REF xxx ANT xxx

|ANT - LEF| xxx
REF: Toner reference voltage (A/D value)

ANT: Toner antenna voltage (A/D value)
ANT - LEF: Differential voltage (A/D value)
BSCT on BDOC[A3 ]
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]
BCST: Document platen cover sensor (SR402): On/Cover open, Of/Cover closed
BDOC: Document size: Paper size indicated in a mix of document size sensors
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]:
Document size sensor (SR404 or SR405): On/Document presence, Of/Document absence
Document size sensor (SR403): On/Document presence, Of/Document absence
Press numeric
keypad key 6. [1]
NCR Sts : 12345678

DPT MGN OK RDY 1234
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[1] Card reader and card availability indication [4] Can status
Card available: Eight-digit card ID OK: Normal scan
No card: Card None ERR: Scan error
No card reader available: NCR None NG: Nonstandard error
(No indication): No card
[2] Card type and card reader status indication [5] Equipment status
DPT: Department card IN: Initialization in progress
PRC: Unit pricing card RDY: Ready
MAX: Upper limit setting card
ERS: Erased card [6] Card reader version indication
SRV: Service card Four-digit number
(No indication): No card
[3] Card type

MGN: Magnetic card
OPT: Optical card
Press numeric
keypad key 7.
LAST of EXIT of
REG of CVR of
LAST: Last document detection sensor(PI3): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1

EXIT: Delivery reversal sensor(PI6): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
REG: Registration paper sensor(PI8): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
CVR: Cover open/close sensor (PI10): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
*1:Only if equipped with ADF functions.
Press numeric
keypad key 8.
WID1 of WID2 of
LEN1 of LEN2 of
WID1: Document width sensor 1 (PI2):On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1

WID2: Document width sensor 2 (PI1): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
LEN1: Document length sensor 1(PI4):On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
LEN2: Document length sensor 2(PI5): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence*1
*1:Only if equipped with ADF functions.
Press numeric
keypad key 9.
D+Temp xxxx E+Hum xxxx
F+Temp
D+Temp: In-machine temperature (Unit: deg C)

E+Hum: In-machine humidity (Unit: %RH)
F+Temp: Fixing roller temperature (Unit: deg C)
F-15-22
ADF feed test (6-4: ADF FEED TEST)
ADF operation verification mode. Press numeric keypad key 4 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the ADF feed test. Place a document on the document
platen and press the start key to transfer the document at the speed matched to the scan resolution setting. In this test, enter a transfer speed between 500 and 2000
(mm/s) from the numeric keypad and verify the transfer speed. Select between the ON and OFF states with the left and right cursor keys to select between single-
sided document feed (OFF) and double-sided document feed (ON).
Book feed test (6-5: BOOK FEED TEST)

Performs a book feed operation with a specified magnification and in a specified size.
Speaker test (6-6: SPEAKER)

Speaker operation verification mode. Press numeric keypad key 6 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the speaker test. In this test, the speaker generates tonal
signals at 100 Hz intervals, from 200 Hz to 5 kHz, in varying sound volumes. Signal output from the speaker is thus verified.
15-56
Chapter 15
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ [1] VOL [2]
Press numeric Press numeric

keypad key 1. keypad key 2.
SPEAKER SPEAKER
FREQ TEST VOL[*] :MIN [#]:MAX
Press the start key Signal tone volume adjustment.

to change the * denotes the minimum, #, the maximum.
transmission frequency The volume is adjustable level by level
using the start key.
F-15-23
Lamp test (6-8: LAMP TEST)
Press numeric keypad key 8 on the FACULTY menu to select the scan lamp illumination mode. The test checks to see if the scan lamp is on or not.
Numeric keypad key 1 selects LAMP TEST ALL. Press the start key to turn on all scan lamps. LAMP TEST AGC is not used.
Line signal reception test (6-9 LINE DETECT)
Press numeric keypad key 9 on the FACULTY menu to select the line signal reception test. In this test, verify the successful operations of the NCU signal sensor
and the frequency counter. Menu 1 detects the CI state, while menu 3 detects the CNG signal.
Test menu 1
Press numeric keypad key 1 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 1. When CI is detected on the telephone line connection terminal, the touch
panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch panel (LCD) also displays the on-hook or off-hook state of an
external telephone set as detected. The touch panel (LCD) displays, from left to right, CI, CI frequency, hook port and FC with indications of 1:ON and
0:OFF.
Test menu 2
Press numeric keypad key 2 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 2. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone line connection terminal,
the touch panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch panel (LCD) displays the status of CML, CNG and
FED detection, from left to right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad key 2 turns on the CML relay to detect CNG.
Test menu 3
Press numeric keypad key 3 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 3. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone line connection terminal,
the touch panel (LCD) display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The touch panel (LCD) displays the status of CML, CNG and
FED detection, from left to right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad key 3 turns off the CML relay to detect CNG.
15.19.7 Cleaning Mode
15.19.7.1 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)

0018-0386

Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)
Press numeric keypad key 0 in test mode to select roller cleaning mode. Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 2 during this test to enter the following menus:
Press the start key clean the ADF pickup/feed rollers by idling.
Press the stop key to exit this mode.

Press the start key clean the unit transfer rollers by idling.
Press the stop key to exit this mode.
15-57
Chapter 16 Upgrading
Contents
Contents
16.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1.1 Overview of Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool........................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 Making Preparations.................................................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.2.1 Registering the System Software ............................................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.2.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.3 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................................. 16-4
16.3.1 Downloading the System Software .......................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure.............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-4
16.3.2 Downloading the Boot Software ............................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.3.2.1 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................16-10
16.3.3 Downloading the Language Module ...................................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.3.3.1 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................16-10
16.3.4 Otehr Upgrade Methods ......................................................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.3.4.1 Downloading the PCL Software ...............................................................................................................................................................16-10
16.3.4.2 Downloading the CA certificate ...............................................................................................................................................................16-11
Chapter 16
16.1 Outline
16.1.1 Overview of Upgrade

0018-0120
This machine and options can be upgraded by downloading system software programs from the personal computer (hereafter called as the PC) in which a service
support tool (hereafter called SST) has been loaded.
System software programs and upgrade tools are listed in the following table:
T-16-1
Type System software type Upgrade tool Remarks
SST
Main unit System (main controller) Yes Main controller also controls the reader.
Boot (boot program) Yes
Language (language module) Yes USB memory
PCL_op Yes 16MB ROM PCB

(Network/PCL standard equipment model only)
Option Fin_U2 (Finisher) Yes Dedicated service tool (Downloader PCB: FY9-2034)
Pay attention to the following points when updagrading.

1. When updagrading Boot, make sure to update Boot first.
2. When updagrading the following software, make sure to update all to the same version.
- System
- Language
- PCL (Network/PCL standard equipment model only)
16.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool

0018-0122
Main unit PC
Image processor PCB

16MB ROM
USB cable
Flash ROM CPU
J303
SST
16MB ROM PCB (*1) System

software
Flash ROM
RS232C
straight cable
USB Memory
Flash Memory Downloader

PCB
FY9-2034
Finisher
Finisher controller PCB
Flash ROM CPU

J918
*1. Network/PCL standard equipment model only

F-16-1
When using the SST, select "#DOWNLOAD" in the service mode to place the main unit in the download mode. (The finisher need not enter the download mode.)
16-1
Chapter 16
16.2 Making Preparations
16.2.1 Registering the System Software

0018-0123
System software programs to be downloaded need to be registered in the SST.

The system software programs are registered with the names listed below.
<Software Programs Preinstalled in Main Unit>

Machine name: MF7400_iR2030
Unit name:
- Main controller: System
- Boot program: Boot
- 16MB ROM PCB: PCL_op (Network/PCL standard equipment model only)
- 32MB ROM PCB: PCL_Common (not used)
- CA certificate (distributed only as necessary)
[Preparation]
Have the following ready:
- PC in which SSTv3.21 or later is installed (Download a CA certificate of version of SSTv3.31 or higher)
- System CD
[System Software Registration Procedure]

1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the system CD in the PC.
3) Start SST.
4) Click the "Register Firmware" button.
F-16-2
16-2
Chapter 16
5) Select the drive in which the system CD is inserted, and then click the "SEARCH" button.
F-16-3
6) A list of system software programs contained in the system CD is displayed. Uncheck the checkboxes of unnecessary folders and system software programs, and
then click the "REGISTER" button.
This machine allows two or more system software programs to be register at the same time. However, it does not allow two or more them to be downloaded at the
same time. If two or more software programs need to be upgraded, download them one by one.
F-16-4
16-3
Chapter 16
7) When the system software program registration result appears, click the OK button.
F-16-5
16.2.2 Connection
0018-0124

1) Turn off the main power switch of this machine, and then disconnect the cables connected to this machine.
2) Connect USB connector on the back of this machine to the PC using the USB cable [1].
[1]
F-16-6
16.3 Downloading System Software
16.3.1 Downloading the System Software
16.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure

0018-0125
16-4
Chapter 16
1) Turn on the power switch of the PC and start SST.

2) When the power switch is turned on, the Found New hardware Wizard appears. Click "Cancel".
F-16-7
3) Select "MFP" in "Target Selection", and then select "MF7400_iR2030" in "Model List".
F-16-8
4) Double-click the "System" folder in "Model List" to check the system software version. Select "USB" in "Interface", and then click the "START" button.
F-16-9
5) Turn on the power switch of the host machine.
6) Press the following keys on the control panel to enter the service mode.
> 2 Key > 8 Key >
16-5
Chapter 16
7) Using or , select "#DOWNLOAD".

8) Press the OK key on the control panel to place the host machine in the downloading wait mode (No indicated on LCD).
9) Press the OK button on the SST screen displayed on the display of the PC.
F-16-10
10) When connection is complete, the following screen appears. Click the OK button.
F-16-11
16-6
Chapter 16
11) Click "System Software Download" on the Selecting a Job screen.
MEMO:
This machine does not use the "Upload the Backup Data" and "Download the Backup Data" functions not displayed on the Selecting a Job screen.
F-16-12
12) Select the version of the system software to download from the list. Check that the selected version is displayed in "Selected Version", and then click the
"START" button.
F-16-13
16-7
Chapter 16
13) When downloading starts, the progress of downloading is displayed by the progress bar.
F-16-14
14) While the received data is being written to the flash ROM after completion of downloading, the following screen is displayed:
F-16-15
Never turn off the power switch of the machine while the data is being written to the flash ROM. If it becomes impossible to start this machine after turning its
power switch off, the image processor PCB must be replaced.
16-8
Chapter 16
15) When writing of the data to the Flash ROM is complete, its result is displayed. Click the OK button.
F-16-16
16) When the Selecting a Job screen appears, click "Return to Main Menu".
F-16-17
16-9
Chapter 16
17) Click the "OK" button to return to the menu screen of SST.
F-16-18
18) If the other firmware is upgraded continuously, follow each downloading procedure. If the downloading is finished, click the "Exit" button and turn OFF/ON
the main power switch.
F-16-19
16.3.2 Downloading the Boot Software

0018-0127
To download the boot software, use the steps given for the system software.
16.3.3 Downloading the Language Module

0018-0126
To download the language software, use the steps given for the system software.
16.3.4 Otehr Upgrade Methods
16.3.4.1 Downloading the PCL Software

0018-0131
16-10
Chapter 16
To download the software for 16MB ROM PCB (Network/PCL standard equipment model only), use the steps given for the system software.
When selecting a download version on the following screen, be sure to select the 16MB ROM version.
Language Country/Region
Version for 32MB ROM Common All
Version for 16MB ROM op All
F-16-20
16.3.4.2 Downloading the CA certificate

0018-0132
- Unless you want to change the CA certificate stored on your computer, your CA certificate will be released and there is usually no need to download it.
- The default CA certificate is maintained within the system software and can be activated by executing Service Mode>#CLAER>CA-KEY and turning the power
OFF/ON, so there is no need to download it again.
- If you have updated your system software, make sure to perform the following procedure to activate the CA certificate in the updated system software.
<Procedure> Execute Service Mode>#CLAER>CA-KEY and turn the power OFF/ON
- If you download a new CA certificate, you do not need to delete the old certificate stored on your computer; simply download as described below.
<Downloading Procedure>
1) Turn on the power switch of the PC and start SST.
2) When the power switch is turned on, the Found New hardware Wizard appears. Click "Cancel".
F-16-21
16-11
Chapter 16
3) Select "MFP" in "Target Selection", and then select "iR2018i" in "Model List".
F-16-22
4) Double click the "CA-KEY" folder in "Model List" to confirm the version of the CA certificate. Select "USB" in "Interface", and then click the "START" button.
F-16-23
5) Turn on the power switch of the host machine.
6) Press the following keys on the control panel to enter the service mode.
> 2 Key > 8 Key >
16-12
Chapter 16
7) Using or , select "#DOWNLOAD".

8) Press the OK key on the control panel to place the host machine in the downloading wait mode (No indicated on LCD).
9) Press the OK button on the SST screen displayed on the display of the PC.
F-16-24
10) When connection is complete, the following screen appears. Click the OK button.
F-16-25
16-13
Chapter 16
11) Click "CA_KET Download" on the Selecting a Job screen.
F-16-26
12) Select the version of the system software to download from the list. Check that the selected version is displayed in "Selected Version", and then click the
"START" button.
F-16-27
16-14
Chapter 16
13) When downloading starts, the progress of downloading is displayed by the progress bar.
F-16-28
Never turn off the power switch of the machine while the data is being written to the flash ROM. If it becomes impossible to start this machine after turning its
power switch off, the image processor PCB must be replaced.
14) When writing of the data to the Flash ROM is complete, its result is displayed. Click the OK button.
F-16-29
16-15
Chapter 16
15) When the Selecting a Job screen appears, click "Return to Main Menu".
F-16-30
16) Click the "OK" button to return to the menu screen of SST.
F-16-31
17) In Service Mode, open #NETWORK > #CERTIFICATE > #CA-CERTIFICATE and check if the information recorded there is the same as the CA certificate
you downloaded.
16-16
Chapter 17 Service Tools
Contents
Contents
17.1 Service Tools ............................................................................................................................................................. 17-1

17.1.1 Special Tools ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17-1
17.1.2 Oils and Solvents...................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
Chapter 17
17.1 Service Tools
17.1.1 Special Tools

0018-0133
In addition to the standard tools set, you will need the following special tools for servicing of the machine:
Tool name Tool No. Rank Shape Uses
Digital multimeter FY9-2002 A For making electrical

checks.
Cover switch TKN-0093 A
Tester extension pin FY9-3038 A As an addition when

making an electrical
check.
Tester extension pin (L- FY9-3039 A As an addition when

shipped) making an electrical
check.
NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 A For checking and

adjusting images.
Key to Notation (rank)

A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.
B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
17.1.2 Oils and Solvents

0018-0134

T-17-1
Name Uses Composition Remarks
Alcohol cleaning; e.g., fluoride-family hydrocarbon - Do not bring near fire.

glass, plastic, alcohol - Procure locally.
rubber; external surface activating agent - IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be
covers water substituted.
Solvent cleaning; e.g., fluorine-family hydrocarbon - Do not bring near fire.

metal; soiling with chlorine-family hydrocarbon - Procure locally.
oil or toner alcohol - MEK may be substituted.
17-1
Chapter 17
17.1.2 Oils and Solvents

T-17-1
Name Uses Composition Remarks
Alcohol cleaning; e.g., fluoride-family hydrocarbon - Do not bring near fire.

glass, plastic, alcohol - Procure locally.
rubber; external surface activating agent - IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be
covers water substituted.
Solvent cleaning; e.g., fluorine-family hydrocarbon - Do not bring near fire.

metal; soiling with chlorine-family hydrocarbon - Procure locally.
oil or toner alcohol - MEK may be substituted.
Lubricant mineral oil (paraffin family) - CK-0524 (100 cc)
Lubricant drive mechanism, silicone oil - CK-0551 (20 g)

sliding
mechanism,
scanner rail
Lubricant gear special oil - HY9-0007

(EM-50L) special solid lubricating agent
lithium soap
17-2
APPENDIX
Contents
1 General Timing Chart ............................................................................................................................. 1

At Time of Printing................................................................................................................................. 1
Reader Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 2
2 General Circuit Diagram......................................................................................................................... 3
General Circuit Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 3
1 General Timing Chart
At Time of Printing
2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1
Main power switch ON Print command received
WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
Main motor
(M204)
Fixing motor
(M201)
Scanner motor
Laser *1 *1 *1 *2 *1
TOP signal
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid

(SL202)
Cassette feed clutch
(CL202)
Registration paper sensor
(SR209)
Registration clutch
(CL203)
No. 1 delivery sensor
(SR203)
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias *3 *3
Static eliminator bias
Fixing film bias
Fixing heater *4 *4 *5
(H1/H2)
*1: Horizontal synchronization control

*2: Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
*3: Cleaning bias
*4: Target temperature control
*5: Temperature control in accordance with the fixing mode
F-1-1
1
Reader Unit
Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the start key; book mode; 1 original)
Shading correction
Start key
ON
STBY SCFW SCRW STBY
Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading
position of original of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-1-2
Basic Secure of Operation (in response to a press on the start key; ADF mode, 1 original )
Start key Shading correction

ON
STBY SCRW SCFW STBY
Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Stream reading Trailing edge Shading
position position of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-1-3
2
2 General Circuit Diagram
General Circuit Diagram 1
Left Door Switch
SW3
FILM BIAS Fixing Unit Scanner Unit
FT1 FT2
NO
1 MT1 MT2 MT3
COM
2 Fixing Film
Speed Sensor Fixing Delivery Sensor
M203
Main Sub
Thermistor Thermistor SR202 Polygon Mortor
2 1 J32 SR101
J503 BD Sensor
Fixing Motor 3 2 1 3 2 1
Laser Unit
TH1
TH2
M201
2 1
J1918 J253 M
2
2 1
J1919 M
J601 J2 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
MT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3
2
J251
Front Cover Switch
TP
TP1
H1
SW2
H2
MT5
NO
1
COM
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 J255DH J252L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J252DH
J255D J252D
1 2 J256L
1 2 3
J256LH 3 2 1
J31 J256D
LASER_CONT0
LASER_CONT1
LASER_CONT2
/P_ACC
/P_DEC
+3.3R
P_FG
+24V
GND
GND
/BDI
J30M
1 2 3
EXP_P_SNS
FILM_SENS
PWCHG
1 2 3 J30F
SNSPOW
CW/CCW
THCNCT
/VDO1
/VDO2
VDO2
/F_DCC
VDD1
/F_ACC
GND
GND
GND
+5R
M_TH
N.C
F_FG
S_TH
+24R
+24R
+24R
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
H
+5R
H2Drv
H1Drv
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J215
120/200V
1
J202 J217 J206 J205
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
3 2 1 3 2 1
RLDRV
2
J12 J13
/ZEROX
3
Power Supply PCB ESS
4
(1/3) H1DRV
5
DC Controller PCB (1/3)
H2DRV
6
DOPEN
7
GND
8
J214
+3.3R J213 J226
9
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
GND
H
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
+5R
9
1 2 3
GND
8
J16
GND
7
GND
6
/DEVDCPWM
TIMING_SNS
CAS_P_SNS
CAS_P_SNS
PRACMONI
/PRACCUR2
/PRACCUR1
/PRDCPWM
/DISDCFOT
+24R
/PRDCFOT
/DVDCFOT
/PRACFOT
/DVACFOT
TNRCHKD
TNRCHKT
5
/PRACON
/DVACON
SNSPOW
SNSPOW
SNSPOW
/DISPWM
/TRNFOT
/TRPFOT
TRCRNT
/TRPWM
/TRCHG
To Option Power Supply PCB +24R
PSIZ1
PSIZ2
PSIZ3
PSIZ4
PSIZ1
PSIZ2
PSIZ3
PSIZ4
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
(CONNECT TO J54) +24R
3
1
2
3
GND
2
+24V
J11
P1
1
J18
/ESS
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
1
To Option Power Supply PCB +3.3R

20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
2
(CONNECT TO J53) GND J100

3
J101
+24R
1
5
J265 J260 J262 J287 J288

GND 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5
2
4
+5R
HVT PCB
3
3
GND
4
SR204
2
H SR210 SR211
1
+3.3R SW4 SW7

5
J19
1
Timing Sensor Cassette 1

Cassette 2
J15
To Heater PCB Cassette 1 Size Cassette 2 Size

2
Paper Sensor
Detection Switch Paper Sensor Detection Switch
N
JP1,2
3
JP3,4 JP7,8 Tr3 JP9,10 JP5,6

1
DEVELOPMENT
2
J17
COPY
REMAINING
+24V VH-
DETECTION
1
+24V VH+ NEUTRALIZATION

To Duplex Controller PCB To NCU PCB DRUM
2
GND FIX BIAS

J14
CONTACT PLATE
3
GND
J23
4
CHARGE
4
F-2-1
Main Motor
Humidity Sensor PCB
M204
M
To 1-Cassette Unit
To Heater PCB To Finisher To Inner 2Way Tray Controller PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J280 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J259
CW/CCW
GND
GND
GND
M_FG
/M_ACC
/M_DEC
AN5
AN7
+5R
+24R
+24R
N2_PASS_SNS
ENGINE_D_EN
N2_P_DET
N2_P_DET
SNSPOW
FIN_RXD
FIN_TXD
FIN_D_E
N2_SL
RXDL
TXDL
+24V
+24V
+24V
+3.3R
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CLK
STB
+5R
+5R
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J224 J203 J204 J220 J222 J208
DC Controller PCB (2/3)
J219 J212 J201 J216 J221

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J209 J210 J211
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1
EXP2_P_SNS
MULTI_P_SNS
PICKUP_SL
EXP_FULL_SNS
FAN_LOCK
SNSPOW
SNSPOW
TN_FULL
MULTI_SL
SNSPOW
FANDRV
MFP_CL
REG_SNS
GND
GND
SNSPOW
SNSPOW
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
+24V
RG_CL
TP_CL
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
J286L
J286DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
J286H J263 1 2 3 J261
1 2 3 J279 1 2 3 J264 1 2 3
SL CL CL
SL202 CL203 CL202 SR209 SR207 SR206 SR203

Waste Toner Full
Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Registration Clutch Vertical Clutch Registration Paper Sensor No.1 Paper Sensor Detection Sensor No.1 Delivery Sensor
J277D
1 2 3 J277DH
3 2 1
J277L
J265D 1 2 3
J284D
1 2 J285D J265DH 3 2 1
J284DH 1 2 3 4
J285DH
3 2 1
2 1
J278 2 1
1 2 3
CL SL
SR208 CL201 SL201 FM1

Manual Paper Sensor Manual Pickup Clutch Manual Pickup Solenoid Heat Discharge Fan
F-2-2
5
Reader Unit
Power Supply PCB (2/3)
J460
CIS
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 To ADF Unit
J20 J21
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ADF_COVER
MODE
RMOT_A
RMOT_B
KMOT_A
KMOT_B
ADF_SENS
STAMP
EMPTY
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RK_ON1
READ
REG
LEDG2
LEDG1
VREF
/RMOT_A
/RMOT_B
RMOT_IA
RMOT_IB
SG
LEDR2
LEDR1
/KMOT_A
/KMOT_B
KMOT_IA
KMOT_IB
LEDB2
LEDB1
CLK+
SP+
LAST
SIZE_W1
SIZE_W2
+5R
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
CLK-
SP-
VIN0
VIN1
VIN2
VIN3
EXIT
+3.3R
+3.3R
+3.3R
+3.3R
SIZE_L1
SIZE_L2
30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 J402 J401 J412 J411 J410
J408
Copyboard Cover
Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor Reader Motor
CIS HP Sensor
Open/Closed Sensor (rear)
SR401 SR402 SR403 M401
Document Size Sensor
M
Original Sensor 1 Original Sensor 2 Original Sensor 5 Original Sensor 3 Original Sensor 4 Original Sensor 6 Original Sensor 7
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
AB,INCH/AB,INCH/A A AB,INCH/AB INCH/A A

J451 J452 J453 J458
SR404 SR405 SR408 SR406 SR407 SR409 SR410
S P S P S P S P S P S P S P
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J454 J455 J1923 J456 J457 J1924 J1925
CVR_SENS0
CVR_SENS1
HP_SENS
GND
GND
GND
+3.3R
+3.3R
+3.3R
B
A
/B
/A
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZEON
SIZE0
SIZE1
SIZE0
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE3
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
J407 J1926 J413 J1927 J1928 J406 J405 J409
J404 J403
34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
Reader Controller PCB
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
READER_RES*
ADF_STAMP
RTP1APWM
RTP1BPWM
RTP2APWM
RTP2BPWM
ADF_READ
XHSYNCO
ADF_EXIT
ADF_REG
HP_SENS
AP_SENS
XHSYNCI
SIDATAO
XVSYNC
SIDATAI
RTP1AX
RTP1BX
RTP2AX
RTP2BX
SVCLK+
SIZEON
SILOAD
SVCLK-
DOUT0
DOUT1
DOUT2
DOUT3
DOUT4
DOUT5
DOUT6
DOUT7
RTP1A
RTP1B
RTP2A
RTP2B
SICLK
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DES
DS
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
J309 J308
Image Processor PCB (1/5)
F-2-3
6
Soft-ID PCB DC Controller PCB (3/3) Card Reader Network Board
J207
J1 J1930
J1300A J1300B
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 J1300WH
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
NEX_RES_OUT
/SIDCNCTN
MFP_SLEEP
HAI-COUNT
SIDDOUT
COIN_RXD
LAN_TYPE
PHYENGY
COIN-TXD
SIDCLK
/PHYRST
SIDDIN
PHYESS
SIDCS
/PHYINT
+3.3V
/LAN_D
GND
GND
/CCRT
/VDO1
/VDO2
MDCK
/SCLK
RXDV
RXER
RXCK
VDO1
VDO2
TXCK
RXD0
RXD1
RXD2
RXD3
TXEN
+3.3V
+3.3V
MDIO
TXD0
TXD1
TXD2
TXD3
/BDO
+24V
/ESS
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CRS
COL
+5V
/SC
J304WH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J315 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
J317 J304A J304B
J314
5V +5PNL
SW

DEVICE
USB2.0 +3.3V +3.3PNL

J303
SW
Board to Board J310

J313 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
HOSTS
USB1.1
J301
/BAT EMP
/MDMRST
/MDMCS
/FAX D
+24VU
AGND
+3.3U
+3.3U
GND(3.3V)
GND(3.3V)
GND(3.3V)
VBAT
EXD0
EXD1
EXD2
EXD3
EXD4
EXD5
EXD6
EXD7
EXA1
EXA2
EXA3
EXA4
EXA5
EXA6
EXA7
/ESS
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
PRD
BUZ
/WR
+5U
+5U
GND(5V)
GND(5V)
/RD
CI1
CI2
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
XPCI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
5V
5V
J1200
5V 5NCU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Modem PCB SW
+24V +12V J10
REG
+3.3V 3.3NCU
SW
Power Supply PCB (3/3)
VO1 J1202
J1201
2
SPEAKER VO2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
J1203
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 J24
1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
ANLGIN
HOOK2
HOOK1
TXOUT
CAIDD
DCLIM
DGND
DGND
AGND
IPSEL
CMLD
AVCC
+3.3U
LPRD
RXIN
+12V
LPL2
LPL1
CIVS
HRD
PRD
SRD
3.3V
N.C
N.C
N.C
CI2
CI1
5V
+24V
XPCI
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
J1921 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 J1934 J1933

J1
J1804 J1803 J1802
3
CT1 Pseudo CI PCB
J1922
1
7
J1932
2
J1800
CT2
2
6
1
T1
3
Modular PCB
5
GND
NCU PCB
J1935
T2
2
4
4
HV
N.C
1
5
3
L1
6
2
L2
7
1
F-2-4
7
To Coin Vendor To RS232C PCB (USA Coin Vendor)

J1920
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1940
CRDY_CONT
PRDY_CONT
C_CRDY
CRDY_COIN
B_CRDY
C_PRDY
PRDY_COIN
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CNT-RESET
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
3.3V
Counter PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1501 CZ
J1501
J1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
A
10
A
11
A
12
A
13
A
14
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9
B
10
B
11
B
12
B
13
B
14
B
15
B
16
B
17
B
18
B
19
B
20 Serial PCB
J1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/UARTRST
/UARTCS
/WR
/RD
/CSCOUNTER
/UARTINT
/SERIAL_D
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
EXEXD7
EXEXD6
EXEXD5
EXEXD4
EXEXD3
EXEXD2
EXEXD1
EXEXD0
EXEXA1
EXEXA2
EXEXA3
EXEXA4
EXEXA5
/COUNTER_D
+3.3V
+3.3V
EXA14
EXA12
EXA13
EXA11
EXA10
EXD0
EXD1
EXD2
EXD7
EXD6
EXD5
EXD4
EXD3
EXA7
EXA6
EXA5
EXA4
EXA3
EXA2
EXA1
EXA0
EXA8
EXA9
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
/WR
/RD
A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 2 3 4
J316 J312
Board to Board Board to Board J300
J319
Board to Board J300
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
CC_4_OPTION
CC_4_KYU_COUNT
+3.3V
CC_4_LARGE_SMALL_L
DEB_RXD
GND
CC_4_KYU_CP_ENB
+5V
CC_4_CL_BW_L
GND
DEB_TXD
/ROMRESET
ROM TYPE
/CSROM2
/ROM D
EXD15
EXD14
EXD13
EXD12
EXD11
EXD10
EXA15
EXA14
EXA13
EXA12
EXA11
EXA10
EXA19
EXA20
EXA21
EXA18
EXA17
EXA16
EXA22
EXA23
+3.3V
EXD7
EXD6
EXD5
EXD4
EXD3
EXD2
EXD9
EXD1
EXD8
EXD0
EXA9
EXA8
EXA7
EXA6
EXA5
EXA4
EXA3
EXA2
EXA1
EXA0
GND
GND
GND
/WR
/RD
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 To CC4 For DEBUG
J350
Option ROM
F-2-5
8
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
MEM_DQM3
MEM_DQM2
MEM_DQ31
MEM_DQ30
MEM_DQ29
MEM_DQ28
MEM_DQ27
MEM_DQ26
MEM_DQ25
MEM_DQ24
MEM_DQ31
MEM_DQ30
MEM_DQ29
MEM_DQ28
MEM_DQ27
MEM_DQ26
MEM_DQ25
MEM_DQ24
MEM_OP_AVA
MEM_OP_64M
MEM_ST_AVA
MEM_ST_64M
MEM_DQ3
MEM_DQ2
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
1 GND 1 112 +3.3V 112 1 GND 1 112 +3.3V 112
2 GND 2 111 MEM_DQ23 111 2 GND 2 111 MEM_DQ23 111
3 MEM_DQ0 3 110 N.C. 110 3 MEM_DQ0 3 110 N.C. 110
4 N.C. 4 109 MEM_DQ22 109 4 N.C. 4 109 MEM_DQ22 109
5 MEM_DQ1 5 108 GND 108 5 MEM_DQ1 5 108 GND 108
6 N.C. 6 107 GND 107 6 N.C. 6 107 GND 107
7 MEM_DQ2 7 106 N.C. 106 7 MEM_DQ2 7 106 N.C. 106
8 N.C. 8 105 MEM_DQ21 105 8 N.C. 8 105 MEM_DQ21 105
9 MEM_DQ3 9 104 MEM_ST_NBB 104 9 MEM_DQ3 9 104 N.C. 104
10 N.C. 10 103 MEM_DQ20 103 10 N.C. 10 103 MEM_DQ20 103
11 RGV33 11 102 RGV33 102 11 RGV33 11 102 RGV33 102
12 RGV33 12 101 RGV33 101 12 RGV33 12 101 RGV33 101
13 MEM_DQ4 13 100 N.C. 100 13 MEM_DQ4 13 100 N.C. 100
14 N.C. 14 99 MEM_DQ19 99 14 N.C. 14 99 MEM_DQ19 99
15 MEM_DQ5 15 98 N.C. 98 15 MEM_DQ5 15 98 N.C. 98
16 N.C. 16 97 MEM_DQ18 97 16 N.C. 16 97 MEM_DQ18 97
17 MEM_DQ6 17 96 N.C. 96 17 MEM_DQ6 17 96 N.C. 96
18 N.C. 18 95 MEM_DQ17 95 18 N.C. 18 95 MEM_DQ17 95
19 MEM_DQ7 19 94 N.C. 94 19 MEM_DQ7 19 94 N.C. 94
20
21
N.C.
GND
20
21
SODIMM1 93
92
MEM_DQ16
GND
93
92
20
21
N.C.
GND
20
21
SODIMM2 93
92
MEM_DQ16
GND
93
92
22 GND 22 91 GND 91 22 GND 22 91 GND 91
23 MEM_DQM0 23 90 MEM_A3 90 23 MEM_DQM0 23 90 MEM_A3 90
24 N.C. 24 89 MEM_A2 89 24 N.C. 24 89 MEM_A2 89
25 MEM_DQM1 25 88 MEM_A1 88 25 MEM_DQM1 25 88 MEM_A1 88
26 N.C. 26 87 MEM_A0 87 26 N.C. 26 87 MEM_A0 87
27 RGV33 27 86 MEM_A10 86 27 RGV33 27 86 MEM_A10 86
28 RGV33 28 85 MEM_BA1 85 28 RGV33 28 85 MEM_BA1 85
29 MEM_DQ8 29 84 N.C. 84 29 MEM_DQ8 29 84 N.C. 84
30 MEM_DQ9 30 83 MEM_BA0 83 30 MEM_DQ9 30 83 MEM_BA0 83
31 MEM_DQ10 31 82 RGV33 82 31 MEM_DQ10 31 82 RGV33 82
32 MEM_DQ11 32 81 RGV33 81 32 MEM_DQ11 32 81 RGV33 81
33 MEM_DQ12 33 80 N.C. 80 33 MEM_DQ12 33 80 N.C. 80
34 MEM_DQ13 34 79 N.C. 79 34 MEM_DQ13 34 79 N.C. 79
35 GND 35 78 N.C. 78 35 GND 35 78 N.C. 78
36 GND 36 77 N.C. 77 36 GND 36 77 N.C. 77
39 N.C. 39 74 GND 74 39 N.C. 39 74 GND 74
40 N.C. 40 73 N.C. 73 40 N.C. 40 73 N.C. 73
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
MEM_CLK0
/MEM_RAS
/MEM_CAS
/MEM_CS0
MEM_CKE
MEM_CLK1
/MEM_WE
/MEM_RAS
/MEM_CAS
MEM_A11
MEM_A12
/MEM_CS1
MEM_CKE
/MEM_WE
MEM_A11
MEM_A12
MEM_A4
MEM_A5
MEM_A6
MEM_A7
MEM_A8
MEM_A9
MEM_A4
MEM_A5
MEM_A6
MEM_A7
MEM_A8
MEM_A9
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
RGV33
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
F-2-6
9
General Circuit Diagram 7 (Touch panel type)

J318
Touch Panel 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
Key Switch PCB C 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
SOLD1
SOLD2
2 1
J1709
QVGA_DETECT
RXD-UART
TXD-UART
POW_LED
/ESS_KEY
RESET-IP
Key Switch PCB
TTP-D
TTP-R
TTP-U
/DOFF-IP
TTP-L
BKLTON
XSCL-IP
/ESS-KEY
XD3-IP
XD2-IP
XD1-IP
XD0-IP
YD-IP
+3.3V
LP-IP
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
J1708 1 2 3 4
27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
1 2 27
VR J1703 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
27
-24VEE J1700
26
VLCD
25
/ESS-KEY
24
L-RTN2
23
L-DGT2
22
L-DGT1 Control Panel CPU PCB
21
Key Switch PCB B L-DGT0
20
8 K-DGT0 1 K-RTN0
19
K-DGT1 K-DGT2
18
K-DGT2 K-DGT1 J1704
17
K-RTN0 K-DGT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
16
L-DGT0 POWER-LED
15
J1706
L-DGT1 L-RTN1
14
L-DGT2 L-DGT5
13
1 L-RTN0 L-DGT4
12
8
L-DGT3
11
J1710 J1707
-24VEE
-24VEE
/DOFF
K-RTN4
VLCD
XSCL
10
GND
+5V
YD
D3
D2
D1
D0
LP
K-RTN3 FPC
9
K-RTN2
8
K-RTN1
7
K-DGT7
Key Switch PCB A
6
K-DGT6
5
K-DGT5
4
K-DGT4
3
K-DGT3
2
J1701
GND
1
1
J1705
3 2 1
GND LCD
VCCFL
BKLTON
+5V
1 2 3
J955
4
3
Control Panel
2
Inverter PCB
J956
F-2-7 1
10
Duplex Paper Duplex Paper Feed Motor Reversal Motor

Sensor 1 (Upper) Sensor 2 (Lower)
SR1002 SR1003 M1001 M1002
3 2 1 3 2 1
J273 J274 M M
Duplex Flapper Solenoid

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SL1001 J275 J276
SL
2 1
PP SENSOR1
PP SENSOR2
SNSR LED2
SNSR LED1
SL_ON
+24Vop
B
/A
/B
/A
/B
GND
GND
J1002 1 2 J1003 J1005 J1006
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Duplex Controller PCB
J1001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J1008 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RESET
BUSY
SCLK
PGM
GND
GND
VDD
RXD
TXD
VPP
1 J272D
J282 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J281 1 J272LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J272L
Flash Writing Combination
J271D 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J271LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J271L
DUP_F_RXD
DUP_F_TXD
DUP_F_CLK
/DUP_F_STB
GND
GND
+24Vop
+24Vop
/RES
+3.3R
GND
MD0
MD2
FW
+5R
J23 4 3 2 1 J218 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
To Power Supply PCB To DC Controller PCB

F-2-8
11
To DC Controller PCB
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J220
J860
SW14
5
SW13
4
SW5 GND
OP_RXDL
OP_TXDL
/OP_STB
Cassette 2 Size Detection Switch
OP_CLK
3
SW12
+3.3R
+24V
GND
GND
2
+5R
1 SW11
J700 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
+24V
1
2
SL3
SL
Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid
3
SL1_ON
2
4
J753DH
5
6
J753D
J754
7
CSPLED1 1-Cassette Unit Controller PCB Connect to Triple Option Cassette
8
3
1
SR5
Cassette 2 Paper Sensor GND
9
2
2
CSPSEN1
10
J702
1
11
1
RESET
2
12
BUSY
SCLK
PGM
GND
GND
RXD
VDD
VPP
TXD
FEEDLED1
1
13
3
SR6
Cassette 2 Retry Sensor GND

2
J704
FEEDSEN1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J703
1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 For Flash Writing

J755
J701
(No SIGNAL)
(No SIGNAL)
STERNL
+24Vop
+3.3R
GND
GND
RXDL
TXDL
STB
+5R
CLK
J800 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
To 2-Cassette Unit Controller PCB

F-2-9
12
To Finisher To 2-Cassette Unit Controller PCB
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
J50 1 2 J52 1 2
Option Power Supply PCB
1 2 3 2 1
J54 J53
AC(NEUTRAL)
AC(HOT)
GND
3.3V
ESS
J16 J18
1 2 1 2 3
To Power Supply PCB To Power Supply PCB

F-2-10
13
Reader Heater 1 Reader Heater 2
H3
H4
J1912 2 1 2 1 J1914
2 1 2 1
J1911 J1913
N
3 2 1 J1903
Heater PCB
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J1902 J1901 J1905
N
+24V
GND
J1915
3
J224 1 2 SW100
1
1
1
To DC Controller PCB
1
2
2
2
H10
H6
H7
H8
H9
N
J15 3 2 1
To Power Supply Unit Cassette 1 Heater Cassette 2 Heater Cassette 3 Heater Cassette 4 Heater Cassette 5 Heater
F-2-11
14

Service Manual Imageclass Mf7400 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Imageclass Mf7400 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Imageclass Mf7400 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

imageCLASS

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................ 2- 4

Chapter 3 Main Controller

Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ...........................................................................................................................4- 4

4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Left)............................................................................................. 4- 21

Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

Chapter 6 Image Formation

Chapter 7 Pickup and Feed System

7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing (Printer on its own) ..............................................................................................7- 3

7.5.12.1 Removing the Separation Pad.................................................................................................... 7- 16

Chapter 8 Fixing System

Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.4.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover.......................................................................................................9- 4

10.1.6 Initialization of e-RDS.......................................................................................................................... 10- 1

Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 12 Measurement and Adjustments

Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images

13.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids ...........................................................................................................13- 2

Chapter 14 Error Code

Chapter 15 Service Mode

15.3.3 SSSW-SW03....................................................................................................................................... 15- 10

15.4 Menu Switch Settings (MENU)................................................................................................................15- 17

15.6.18 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready>................................ 15- 26

15.9.1 Bit Switch Settings..............................................................................................................................15- 34

16.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................... 16- 1

Chapter 17 Service Tools

1.1 System Construction...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 Pickup/Delivery/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration

imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

*1 Standard equipment device

1.1.2 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7480)

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[1] Netwark/PCL Extension kit

* The above kits are standard equipments.

1.1.3 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (MF7470)

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[1] Netwark/PCL Extension kit

* The above kit is the standard equipment.

1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts

1.2.1.1 External View (MF7460/7470/7480)

imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480

[1] DADF [10] Left door

1.2.2 Using the Machine

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch

imageCLASS MF7460 / imageCLASS MF7470 / imageCLASS MF7480

1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch